manualshive.com logo in svg

HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 CB, Technical Manual

Share
Download
HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 CB Technical Manual Download Page 624

6 – 294

HEIDENHAIN Technical Manual TNC 426, TNC 430

6.13.16 Returning to the Contour

With HEIDENHAIN contouring controls you can resume an interrupted 
program at a specified block number by scanning the previous blocks (see 
“Mid-Program Startup” in the User’s Manual).

Markers inform the PLC about individual conditions during mid-program 
startup (block scan). Depending on these markers you can enable certain 
functions such as the axis-direction buttons for MANUAL TRAVERSE.

M4156 is set if the MANUAL TRAVERSE soft key is pressed.

M4157 is set if the RESTORE POSITION soft key is pressed (“Return to 
Contour”).

M4158 is set if the RESTORE POS. AT soft key is pressed. M4158 is reset if 
the RESTORE POSITION or INTERNAL STOP soft key is pressed.

During the block scan, PLC positioning commands are included in calculation 
only if they are also executed. The TOOL CALL block normally causes PLC 
positioning commands for tool change. If you want these positioning 
commands to be calculated in the block scan:

7

7

7

7

In MP951.x, enter the absolute position with respect to the machine datum. 

7

7

7

7

Activate the calculation for the specific axes with MP7450.

With flexible tool-pocket coding in the central tool file (See "Tool Changer” on 
page 6 – 400), the change of pocket number in the tool file must be prevented 
during block scan if the TOOL CALL blocks are not collected:

7

7

7

7

Set M4542.

The block scan can be interrupted by a programmed STOP or with M06, 
whereby you can have the programmed dwell time included:

7

7

7

7

With MP7680, bits 3 and 4, select the parameters for the block scan.

7

7

7

7

With MP7451.x, define the feed rate for returning to the contour.

If an NC program block is interrupted in 

Single block mode

 or by a STOP block 

and the positions of NC axes are changed, the NC program can be restarted 
at the changed positions. If in OEM.SYS 

STRICTREPOS = YES,

 the function for 

restoring the position is activated. (See “OEM.SYS” on page 7 – 41)

Note

You must enable these functions through machine parameters.

You must prepare the PLC program accordingly.

Summary of Contents for TNC 426 CB

Page 1: ... 10 12 2001 Bi Printed in Germany Subject to change without notice 343 734 E6 Technical Manual TNC 426 CB PB M TNC 430 CA PA M NC Software 280 470 12 280 471 12 280 472 14 280 473 14 280 474 19 280 475 19 280 476 21 280 477 21 ...

Page 2: ...mentary pages free of charge Always sort these pages into your Technical Manual immediately In this way your manual will always be up to date You can use extracts from this manual to supplement your machine documentation If you increase the size of the manual format 17 cm x 24 cm by the factor 1 225 you will have DIN A4 format No documentation is perfect Documentation is alive It thrives on your c...

Page 3: ...280 474 xx NC software Setup Disks Release 280 474 18 286 195 21 06 2001 Export version 280 475 18 286 195 21 06 2001 NC Software Setup Disks Release 280 474 19 286 195 22 08 2001 Export version 280 475 19 286 195 22 08 2001 1 3 NC software 280 476 xx NC software Setup Disks Release 280 476 15 286 197 17 11 2000 Export version 280 477 15 286 197 17 11 2000 Machine parameters n MP7441 has been expa...

Page 4: ...ou can find the measurement results of touch probe cycles 0 and 1 without probe radius and length compensation ID360 NR3 NC Software Setup Disks Release 280 476 17 286 197 19 03 2001 Export version 280 477 17 286 197 19 03 2001 Machine parameters n The PLC can change machine parameter MP2397 x n MP7683 has been expanded Bit 7 AUTOSTART function of an NC program through the PLC 0 AUTOSTART function...

Page 5: ...With consideration of head dimensions 1 Without consideration of head dimensions Machine integration n Since no speed encoder is used during volts per hertz U f control mode W322 0 Module 9164 supplies the actual speed value while the spindle is active and not during the acceleration and braking phase NC Software Setup Disks Release 280 476 18 286 197 22 05 2001 Export version 280 477 18 286 197 2...

Page 6: ...ible with the code word defined in PLCPASSWORD NC Software Setup Disks Release 280 476 20 286 197 25 08 2001 Export version 280 477 20 286 197 25 08 2001 NC Software Setup Disks Release 280 476 20 286 197 26 09 2001 Export version 280 477 20 286 197 26 09 2001 NC software Setup disks Release 280 476 21 286 197 27 11 2001 Export version 280 477 21 286 197 27 11 2001 Machine parameters n MP1152 is n...

Page 7: ... a Z1 track This resulted in the error message C310 Z1 track error As of NC software 280 476 18 in conjunction with the setup 286 197 22 the control uses the Type of encoder entry in the motor table If an encoder with Z1 track is entered in the motor table the message C310 Z1 track error appears in the event of an error If an encoder with EnDat interface is entered in the motor table the control a...

Page 8: ...g whether a clearance height was programmed in the pallet table n FN18 SYSREAD ID510 NR5 IDX axis This function can ascertain whether a clearance height was programmed for the corresponding axis n FN18 SYSREAD ID510 NR6 IDX axis This function can ascertain the clearance height for the corresponding axis With the M function M146 the current geometry information is saved in a temporary file An NC ma...

Page 9: ...d of the previous standard motor tables motor asn and motor sn Synchronous and asynchronous motors are registered in motor mot If the new motor table motor mot is not available the control looks for motor asn and motor sn You can transfer asynchronous motors from motor asn into motor mot To transfer synchronous motors into motor mot please contact HEIDENHAIN 1 8 Hardware New receiver units The EA ...

Page 10: ...parameter list updated Entire chapter Entire chapter Chapter 5 Module marker and word lists updated Entire chapter Entire chapter Chapter 6 Errors corrected some descriptions changed updated and expanded Entire chapter Entire chapter Chapter 7 Errors corrected some descriptions changed and updated Entire chapter Entire chapter Chapter 8 Errors corrected some descriptions changed and updated new de...

Page 11: ... Software 2 30 2 5 1 Designation of the Software 2 30 2 5 2 Software Option 2 32 2 5 3 PLC Software 2 32 2 5 4 NC Software Exchange 2 33 2 5 5 Data Backup 2 40 2 6 Software Releases 2 42 2 6 1 NC Software 280 470 xx and 280 471 xx 2 42 2 6 2 NC Software 280 472 xx and 280 473 xx 2 45 2 6 3 NC Software 280 474 xx and 280 475 xx 2 52 2 6 4 NC Software 280 476 xx and 280 477 xx 2 61 ...

Page 12: ...2 2 HEIDENHAIN Technical Manual TNC 426 TNC 430 ...

Page 13: ...tained centrally in the NC this means that the individual components of the NC such as feed axes spindle NC or PLC are optimally matched n High control quality because the position controller speed controller and current controller are combined into one unit n The same functions are available for commissioning optimizing and diagnosing feed drives as well as spindles With the TNC 426 PB up to five...

Page 14: ... of a compact or modular inverter system Thus together with HEIDENHAIN motors a complete control package including servo drive can be offered see Technical Manual Inverter Systems and Motors The TNC 426 CB is the version of the TNC 426 that is equipped with analog speed command interface and can control machines with up to five axes plus spindle The TNC 430 CA also has an analog speed command inte...

Page 15: ... VPP 350 kHz 1 VPP 350 kHz 312 001 xx 313 524 xx 5 position inputs 1 spindle position input 1 VPP 50 kHz 1 VPP 350 kHz 326 415 xx 326 419 xx 5 position inputs 1 spindle position input 11 µAPP 50 kHz 1 VPP 350 kHz 312 002 xx 313 525 xx LE 430 CA 8 position inputs 1 spindle position input 1 VPP 350 kHz 1 VPP 350 kHz 311 050 xx 313 523 xx 5 position inputs 3 position inputs 1 spindle position input 1...

Page 16: ...0 kHz 1 VPP Spindle up to 12 000 rpm 312 000 xx 313 527 xx Spindle up to 30 000 rpm 315 475 xx 318 178 xx 5 position inputs 1 spindle position input 6 speed inputs 1 VPP 50 kHz 1 VPP 350 kHz 1 VPP Spindle up to 12 000 rpm 326 414 xx 326 421 xx Spindle up to 30 000 rpm 326 416 xx 326 420 xx 5 position inputs 1 spindle position input 6 speed inputs 11 µAPP 50 kHz 1 VPP 350 kHz 1 VPP Spindle up to 12...

Page 17: ...ut 7 speed inputs 1 VPP 350 kHz 1 VPP 350 kHz 1 VPP 311 049 xx 313 521 xx 5 position inputs 1 spindle position input 7 speed inputs 1 VPP 50 kHz 1 VPP 350 kHz 1 VPP 326 417 xx 325 716 xx Logic unit Signal inputs ID numbers of LE for BC 120 display unit ID numbers of LE for BF 120 display unit ...

Page 18: ...eed inputs 11 µAPP 1 VPP 2 EnDats 1 VPP 2 EnDats Spindle up to 12 000 rpm 324 990 xx 324 991 xx Spindle up to 30 000 rpm 324 994 xx 324 995 xx LE 430 M with EPROMs 6 position inputs 7 speed inputs 11 µAPP 1 VPP 2 EnDats 1 VPP 2 EnDats 324 992 xx 324 993 xx 10 position inputs 10 speed inputs 11 µAPP 1 VPP 6 EnDats 1 VPP 10 EnDats 324 996 xx 324 997 xx Note A BC 120 can also be attached to the LE fo...

Page 19: ... µAPP 1 VPP 6 EnDats 1 VPP EnDat Spindle up to 12 000 rpm 344 958 xx 344 959 xx Spindle up to 30 000 rpm 344 962 xx 344 963 xx LE 430 M with flash EPROMs 6 position inputs 7 speed inputs 11 µAPP 1 VPP 6 EnDats 1 VPP EnDat 344 960 xx 344 961 xx 10 position inputs 10 speed inputs 11 µAPP 1 VPP 6 EnDats 1 VPP EnDat 344 964 xx 344 965 xx Note A BC 120 can also be attached to the LE for the BF 120 at t...

Page 20: ...3 038 11 You can find an overview of the available key symbols on Page 2 15 Horizontal rows to match the design of the flat panel display Id Nr 316 343 01 BC 120 Visual Display Unit 15 inch color screen 640 x 480 pixels Id Nr 313 037 02 BF 120 Visual Display Unit 10 4 inch color flat panel display 640 x 480 pixels Id Nr 313 506 02 ...

Page 21: ...el with snap on switchable keys You can find an overview of the available key symbols on Page 2 15 Key assignment n Emergency stop n Machine control voltage n NC start NC stop n Five axis keys n Rapid traverse n Coolant n Spindle start spindle stop n 7 keys for machine functions Standard assignment FN 1 to FN 5 Assignment for HEIDENHAIN basic PLC program Retract axis Tool change Unlock tool Menu s...

Page 22: ...t feeds n Key for actual value position capture n Three keys for machine functions definable with PLC Spindle right Spindle left Spindle stop NC start NC stop Spindle start for HEIDENHAIN basic PLC program n Two permissive buttons n Emergency stop n Magnetic holding pads Id Nr 296 469 44 HR 410 handwheel Spindle right Spindle left Spindle stop Id Nr 296 469 45 HR 410 handwheel NC start NC stop Spi...

Page 23: ...December 2001 Overview of Components 2 13 HR 130 Handwheel Panel mounted handwheel Id Nr 254 040 05 With ergonomic control knob radial cable outlet ...

Page 24: ...0 Handwheel Adapter For connecting up to three HR 150 handwheels with the TNC The axes and the subdivision factor are selected via rotary switch Id Nr 261 097 03 Id Nr 257 061 09 Id Nr 270 908 01 HRA 110 HR 150 radial cable outlet Handwheel selection switch ...

Page 25: ... 40 Spindle direction right Black Gray 330 816 41 Spindle stop White Red 330 816 47 Spindle start White Green 330 816 46 Clamp the axis Black Gray 330 816 48 Key Designation Print Background Id Nr Key Designation Print Background Id Nr X Black Orange 330 816 24 Y Black Orange 330 816 36 Z Black Orange 330 816 25 A Black Orange 330 816 42 B Black Orange 330 816 26 C Black Orange 330 816 23 U Black ...

Page 26: ...Gray 330 816 17 X Black Gray 330 816 0W X Black Gray 330 816 0V X Black Gray 330 816 0N X Black Gray 330 816 0M Y Black Gray 330 816 67 Y Black Gray 330 816 68 Y Black Gray 330 816 21 Y Black Gray 330 816 20 Y Black Gray 330 816 0P Y Black Gray 330 816 0R Y Black Gray 330 816 0D Y Black Gray 330 816 0E Z Black Gray 330 816 65 Z Black Gray 330 816 66 Z Black Gray 330 816 19 Z Black Gray 330 816 16 ...

Page 27: ...ation Print Background Id Nr A Black Gray 330 816 95 A Black Gray 330 816 96 B Black Gray 330 816 97 B Black Gray 330 816 98 C Black Gray 330 816 99 C Black Gray 330 816 0A U Black Gray 330 816 0B U Black Gray 330 816 0C V Black Gray 330 816 70 V Black Gray 330 816 69 W Black Gray 330 816 0G W Black Gray 330 816 0H IV Black Gray 330 816 71 IV Black Gray 330 816 72 ...

Page 28: ...6 Function 5 Black Gray 330 816 77 Unlock door Black Gray 330 816 78 Unlock door Black Gray 330 816 79 Coolant Black Gray 330 816 80 Coolant internal Black Gray 330 816 0S Coolant external Black Gray 330 816 0T Rinse water jet Black Gray 330 816 81 Spotlight Black Gray 330 816 82 Chip removal Black Gray 330 816 83 Chip conveyor Black Gray 330 816 84 Tool change Black Gray 330 816 89 Tool changer l...

Page 29: ...330 816 12 NC start White Green 330 816 49 NC stop White Red 330 816 50 Feed rate 1 Black Gray 330 816 33 Feed rate 2 Black Gray 330 816 34 Rapid traverse Black Gray 330 816 35 Permissive key White Green 330 816 22 Permissive key Black Gray 330 816 90 Actual position capture White Black 330 816 27 White Black 330 816 28 White Black 330 816 29 Menu selection Black Gray 330 816 92 Menu selection Bla...

Page 30: ...ter cable for connection to the LE TS 632 Touch Probe Touch trigger probe with infrared transmission for workpiece setup and measurement during machining Id Nr 331 397 xx Id Nr 346 322 xx Id Nr 346 323 xx Id Nr 354 656 xx Id Nr 310 197 xx TS 632 EA 632 receiver unit EA 652 receiver unit APE 652 interface electronics for connecting two EA 652 to the LE Adapter cable for connecting the EA 632 or the...

Page 31: ...obe Touch trigger probe for measuring tools Id Nr 296 537 xx Id Nr 335 332 xx TT 130 Adapter cable for connection to the LE Further components Id Nr Options for TNC 426 CB PB TNC 430 CA PA Additional position input for a 6th or 9th axis 350 kHz 311 537 51 Only TNC 430 PA Position input for 3 additional axes with nominal speed command interface 350 kHz 294 130 51 Ethernet interface 293 890 xx Digit...

Page 32: ...s plus spindle up to 30 000 rpm with position and speed inputs TNC 430 PA n 5 axes plus spindle up to 30 000 rpm with position and speed inputs n 6th axis with speed input TNC 430 M n 6 axes plus spindle up to 30 000 rpm with 6 position and 7 speed inputs n 9 axes plus spindle up to 30 000 rpm with position and speed inputs Basic version with analog speed command interface Position inputs 1 VPP TN...

Page 33: ... µm for linear axes Up to 0 0001 for angular axes Interpolation Straight lines 5 of 5 axes 5 of 9 axes Circle n 2 of 5 axes n 3 of 5 axes with tilted working plane n 2 of 9 axes n 3 of 9 axes with tilted working plane Helices Superimposition of circular and linear paths Interpolation Spline Cubical splines can be executed Block processing time From the hard disk 4 ms Specifications TNC 426 TNC 430...

Page 34: ...rating period n Up to 300 m min for encoders with 100 µm grating period Speed TNC 426 PB Standard TNC 426 M 12 000 rpm TNC 426 PB option TNC 426 M 30 000 rpm TNC 430 PA TNC 430 M Volts per hertz control mode TNC 426 M 12 000 rpm TNC 426 M 30 000 rpm Volts per hertz control mode TNC 430 M TNC 426 CB TNC 430 CA Error compensation n Linear and nonlinear axis error n Backlash n Reversal spikes during ...

Page 35: ... inputs as option Analog outputs 10 V TNC 426 PB M 13 TNC 430 PA M 13 TNC 430 CA 3 with 9 NC axes plus spindle TNC 430 CB 7 with 5 NC axes plus spindle Inputs for thermistors 3 additional inputs as option Commissioning aids n Oscilloscope n Trace function n Table function n Logic diagram n Log Data Interfaces n One each RS 232 C V 24 and RS 422 V 11 with max 115 Kbps n Expanded data interface with...

Page 36: ...gh surface normal vectors n Automatic compensation of machine geometry when working with tilted axes M114 M115 M128 M129 M130 n Changing the position of the swivel head with the electronic handwheel during program run The position of the tool tip does not change n Jerk reduction n Spline n Tool perpendicular to contour n Tool radius compensation perpendicular to traversing and tool direction Machi...

Page 37: ...ly into the part program Test graphics display modes Graphical simulation before a program run n Plan view n Projection in three planes n 3 D view n Magnification of details Programming graphics In the Programming and Editing operating mode the contours of the NC blocks are drawn while they are being entered 2 D pencil trace graphics Program run graphics display modes Graphic simulation during rea...

Page 38: ...ch probe with infrared transmission or n TT 130 triggering 3 D touch probe for tool measurement Digitizing of 3 D surfaces n With the TS 220 triggering 3 D touch probe and software module for the TNC option n Adapter kit for measuring 3 D touch probe option n PC evaluation software for digitized data SUSA Data transfer software TNCremoNT TNCremo PLC development software PLCdesign Software for gene...

Page 39: ...g and triggering touch probe option 8 Export version without option 9 Standard version without option Variant Changes to LE 426 C P LE 430 C P xxx xxx 2x Initial version xxx xxx 3x Stronger rectifier in power supply xxx xxx 4x 4 MB RAM 3 row VGA connection 3 phase current controller xxx xxx 5x Power supply unit with higher performance Variant Changes to LE 426 M LE 430 M 324 990 xx to 324 997 xx C...

Page 40: ... the PLC The NC software is identified with an eight digit number The ID number is displayed briefly after the TNC is switched on If you press the MOD key in any operating mode you can display the ID numbers of the NC software the DSP software and the setup disks If the hardware contains flash EPROMs the letter F is displayed before the NC software Id Nr ...

Page 41: ...ersion 4 EPROMs 280 470 xx 1 disk 280 640 xx 4 EPROMs 280 471 xx 4 EPROMs 280 472 xx 3 disks 280 641 xx to 280 641 05 2 disks 4 EPROMs 280 473 xx 4 EPROMs 280 474 xx 3 disks 286 195 xx 4 EPROMs 280 475 xx 6 EPROMs 280 476 xx Delivered software 4 disks 286 197 xx to 286 197 03 3 disks 6 EPROMs 280 477 xx NC software version Data record for controls with flash EPROMs Standard Export 280 476 xx 340 4...

Page 42: ...d with one of the options Please contact HEIDENHAIN for further information 2 5 3 PLC Software The PLC software is stored on the hard disk of the TNC You can order a PLC commissioning program directly from HEIDENHAIN With the PLC development software PLCdesign the PLC program can very easily be adapted to the requirements of the machine Option Option number Id Nr of the adapter kit Id Nr of the so...

Page 43: ...e English language through machine parameter MP 7230 x If a software exchange becomes necessary HEIDENHAIN provides new EPROMs and setup disks or a new complete setup for controls with flash EPROMs Information about the cycles Change the OEM cycles into binary format before reconversion otherwise the TNC will not recognize these cycles and will add ERROR blocks to the NC programs These ERROR block...

Page 44: ...ted Each error message contains n Error message n Error number n Error cause n File concerned Example ERROR REMANENT PLC DATA NOT RESTORED ERRNO 2 ERROR MESSAGE Program name not found FILE PLCMEM A Error message Meaning CANNOT OPEN DIRECTORY Directory cannot be opened REMANENT PLC DATA NOT RESTORED The file PLCMEM A cannot be accessed NOT ENOUGH SPACE Not enough free memory on the hard disk CONVER...

Page 45: ...sk from binary to ASCII format 7 7 7 7 The name and path of a log file can be entered after Path in the header 7 7 7 7 After conversion switch the control off 7 7 7 7 Exchange the EPROMs on the processor board with the IC extraction insertion tool expansion slots see graphic 7 7 7 7 After exchanging the EPROMs switch the TNC on again 7 7 7 7 Complete or erase the machine parameters Information abo...

Page 46: ...mber 95148 and confirm with ENT 7 7 7 7 In the machine parameter editing mode of operation press the MOD key 7 7 7 7 Convert updated data to binary format Press the soft key UPDATE DATA and CONVERT ASC BIN The name of a log file may also be entered 7 7 7 7 Read in files which you had saved to a PC 7 7 7 7 End of the NC software switch 7 7 7 7 With the COPY SAMPLE FILES soft key the cutting data ta...

Page 47: ...December 2001 Software 2 37 Position of EPROMs LE 426 CB PB and LE 430 CA PA LE 426 M and LE 430 M IC 1 IC 2 IC 3 IC 4 IC 5 IC 6 Buffer battery Software module for digitizing EPROMs ...

Page 48: ...nary to ASCII format 7 7 7 7 The name and path of a log file can be entered after Path in the header 7 7 7 7 Connect the TNC to a PC through a serial data interface or by Ethernet 7 7 7 7 Enter the SETUP or SETUP32 command on the PC to read in the new NC software After setup the control carries out a RESET DOS and Windows in the DOS window Use the SETUP command followed by the number of the PC s s...

Page 49: ...C software switch 7 7 7 7 With the COPY SAMPLE FILES soft key the cutting data tables the tables for tilted axis geometry and the table of M function macros can be copied into the corresponding directory Activating and deleting already existing NC software For controls with flash EPROMs each new NC software is saved to its own directory in the SYS partition To activate already existing NC software...

Page 50: ...m the confirmation question with the YES soft key 2 5 5 Data Backup HEIDENHAIN provides a data backup program called TNCBACK EXE free of charge HEIDENHAIN recommends that the machine manufacturer use the software TNCBACK EXE to save all his machine specific data to a floppy disk and that he supply the disk with the machine The disk must also contain the program TNCBACK EXE The customer too can sav...

Page 51: ...December 2001 Software 2 41 ...

Page 52: ...tware 280 470 04 export version 280 471 04 Release 09 96 Improvements n MP6500 bit 4 and bit 5 new n FN18 group numbers 350 and 500 new n FN17 group number 500 new n Cycles for tool measurement 31 to 33 expanded by the entry of a Q parameter in which the result of measurement is saved NC software 280 470 05 export version 280 471 05 Release 12 96 Improvements n Rotary axes can be synchronized n MP...

Page 53: ...t for tilted axes touch probe center misalignment n MP750 and MP752 new backlash compensation n MP3143 expanded 3 same as input value 1 except that the second reference mark is evaluated NC software 280 470 09 export version 280 471 09 Release 06 97 Improvements n MP6500 expanded bit 10 and bit 11 NC software 280 470 10 export version 280 471 10 Release 07 97 NC software 280 470 11 export version ...

Page 54: ...2 44 HEIDENHAIN Technical Manual TNC 426 TNC 430 ...

Page 55: ...e contour pocket cycle n Cycle 204 Back boring n With MP7682 bit 2 you can define whether rotary axes should always be positioned by the shortest path n It is now possible to enter a chamfering feed rate in an NC block for chamfering CHF n Cycle 19 Working plane has been extended with parameters for feed rate and safety clearance This applies only if the cycle positions tilted axes which is define...

Page 56: ...les with numbers greater than 200 can be programmed with graphic support also OEM cycles n ISO Cycles G75 and G76 rectangular pocket now include an input box for corner radius n ISO Parameter H limit angle can be entered after M112 n ISO G60 Running digitized data new n MP2000 removed Digital axes can be defined in MP120 n In the compensation value tables COM and CMA you select the columns for the...

Page 57: ...P7500 expanded Bit 3 Setting the datum in a tilted coordinate system n Editor for creating the format of freely definable tables n FN18 ID200 and ID270 new n FN17 ID350 new n M4161 new n PLC commands BTX BCX and BSX new NC software 280 472 03 export version 280 473 03 Release 08 97 Improvements n Spline blocks also in tilted working plane n MP7680 bit 10 new spline curve at compensated outside cor...

Page 58: ...e 280 472 06 export version 280 473 06 Release 12 97 Improvements n FN17 ID990 NR2 Switch sensor monitoring on or off n FN17 ID990 NR3 Transfer sensor data to tool table n FN17 ID990 NR4 Coordinate transformation n New timers T96 to T143 n M4065 All workpiece dimensions are OK n M4066 Workpiece must be remachined n M4067 Workpiece to be scrapped n New touch probe cycles NC software 280 472 07 expo...

Page 59: ...ersion 280 473 09 Release 10 98 Improvements n MP6500 bit 13 Tilted system in which the tool is measured n Module 9210 Path and name of the screen mask as an immediate string n Cycle 420 Determine angle in the touch probe axis n Cycle 427 Automatic length and radius compensation NC software 280 472 10 export version 280 473 10 Release 11 98 Improvements n The version of the setup disks is also dis...

Page 60: ...NC 430 NC software 280 472 13 export version 280 473 13 Release 06 99 NC software 280 472 14 export version 280 473 14 Release 12 99 Improvements n When the control is shut down the hard disk is put into sleep mode n MP2600 Input range changed ...

Page 61: ...December 2001 Software Releases 2 51 ...

Page 62: ...CH programs are supported with a separate standard value entry NC software 280 474 02 export version 280 475 02 Release 01 98 NC software 280 474 03 export version 280 475 03 Release 04 98 Improvements n MP111 Position encoder input for first and second spindle n MP112 Speed encoder inputs for the axes n MP113 Speed encoder input for first and second spindle n MP121 Nominal speed value output for ...

Page 63: ...wo spindles can be operated alternately n The active M functions can be displayed with the STATUS M FUNCT soft key n Indexed tools can be entered n Program sections can be marked deleted and copied in the NC editor n ISO Tool offsets can be entered when the tool number is programmed n With M128 a feed rate can be entered for the maximum speed of the compensation traverse for the linear axes n Cycl...

Page 64: ...d uncontrolled state n Module 9156 Switch axis from uncontrolled controlled state n Module 9220 Traversing the reference marks in each operating mode and with PLC axes n Module 9225 Compensation value for zero pulse n Master slave torque control n ISO With G36 spindle orientation it is possible to program a Q parameter as an angular value n ISO In cycle G80 a feed rate and a safety clearance can b...

Page 65: ...ce values as well as the values from the previous manual touch probe cycle with the key Actual position capture n ISO Cycle G128 Cylinder surface slot NC software 280 474 06 export version 280 475 06 Release 07 98 NC software 280 474 07 export version 280 475 07 Release 08 98 Improvements n MP1094 Cutoff frequency for HSC filter n MP1220 Removed n MP1390 Removed n MP1392 Axis specific switching be...

Page 66: ...m mm min to mm spindle revolution and vice versa n M138 Axes with M114 M128 and Tilt the working plane but without M116 can be indicated n With touch probe cycle 3 you can probe without retraction n The block number for mid program startup or the block number for Test Run is input in a pop up window NC software 280 474 08 export version 280 475 08 Release 09 98 Improvements n ISO New soft key for ...

Page 67: ...controlled axis n The control type NC software files selected and control in operation symbol status are recorded in the log book n Format instructions for the large PLC window expanded n The fast PLC input defined in MP4130 0 no longer causes automatic switch off of the drive n The version of the setup disks is also displayed via the MOD key n With the manual touch probe cycles the datum must be ...

Page 68: ...large PLC window special characters can be entered with xYY n With C axis operation the bit for the spindle or the axis can be transferred to modules 9161 and 9162 n Module 9035 Axis specific handwheel superpositioning M118 n Module 9040 and 9041 Reference values with calculated backlash compensation n Module 9044 Spindle coordinates in the form 0 0001 n Module 9122 Interrogate whether PLC axis ha...

Page 69: ... Module 9130 New error codes 1 Invalid analog output and 2 Disabled analog output added n Module 9189 The drive ready signal is removed n ISO The Q key of the numerical keypad or the ASCII keyboard may be used n When the control is shut down the hard disk is put into sleep mode n Improved search function n Cycles 400 to 403 An error message appears if a measurement in a tilted plane is to be carri...

Page 70: ...chnical Manual TNC 426 TNC 430 NC software 280 474 17 export version 280 475 17 Release 09 00 NC software 280 474 18 export version 280 475 18 Release 06 01 NC software 280 474 19 export version 280 475 19 Release 08 01 ...

Page 71: ...ndle angle during calibration n MP7411 One block several blocks of sensor calibration data n MP7500 Cycle 19 with spatial angle C not equal to 0 n MP7530 Input of a formula for temperature compensation with swivel heads and tilting tables n MP73xx New default values for color settings n HSC filter The jerk value in MP1097 x is for curvature changes n If the fast PLC input defined in MP4130 0 is se...

Page 72: ... with the Actual position capture key n M136 Switching from mm min to mm spindle revolution n Feed rate with three decimal places n Number of transfer parameters for OEM cycles increased to 32 n The last input value is suggested as default value with the F and F MAX soft keys n M91 M92 Linear movements in the machine coordinate system with tilted working plane n File access in LSV2 protocol via Et...

Page 73: ...7500 Tilting axis positioning during datum setting n MP7683 Display the AUTOSTART soft key n Numerical range for M functions from 0 to 999 n Assignment of NC macros to M functions through a table n Description of tilting axis geometry in tables n M4586 Autostart n NCMACRO SYS Executing an NC macro in case of an error or after an external internal stop n NCMACRO SYS Executing a macro after leaving ...

Page 74: ...r the axis can be transferred with C axis operation n Module 9189 Shut down the control n Module 9291 Calling an NC macro n Strings can be shown in the TABLE function n Before the PLC program is converted the PLC outputs are reset n Various LSV2 telegrams are entered in the log book n Two M functions in one NC block n New NC blocks SEL TABLE SEL PATTERN and CYCL CALL PAT n Cycle 208 Parameter Q342...

Page 75: ... NC stop active n M4222 Error from PET table EM STOP active n Module 9002 9003 9005 9008 9009 Error code 24 Module was called in the submit job or spawn job added n Module 9007 Diagnostic information of the PL n Module 9040 9041 Coordinate type 8 temperature compensation from description tables added n Module 9087 Status of PLC error message n Module 9098 Ascertain the active geometry description ...

Page 76: ...n FN17 ID990 Orient spindle n FN18 ID990 Find spindle angle n Hard disks larger than 3 25 MB are supported n Module 9035 Transfer value 26 jog increment limiting added n Module 9060 Status of M functions n Module 9186 Transfer value 6 jog increment added n Module 9300 Locking releasing the pocket table n Module 9305 Pocket exchange in the pocket table n Module 9310 Read the machine parameter from ...

Page 77: ...ction macros you can determine if the NC should wait for acknowledgement from the PLC n With the aid of the machine parameter subfile column in the assignment table of the tilting axis geometry description a function for changing milling heads can be created n 16 strings n After the drive is switched on the control waits 2 s for the ready signal n Module 9097 Error codes 9 Error in the MPFILE colu...

Page 78: ...m in freely definable tables n New error messages for FN14 n M4587 Feed rate limit not effective n During powerfail Attempt to reset PLC outputs and to maintain readiness for 3 seconds n FN17 ID600 Factor for velocity semifeedforward n FN17 ID600 Factor from MP1396 for velocity semifeedforward n FN18 ID20 Coordination between logical and geometrical axis n FN18 ID310 M144 active n Module 9035 Stat...

Page 79: ...P7442 expanded n MP7500 bit 8 Recalculate the datum to the home position of the tilting element n EnDat multiturn encoders as position encoders n Actual to nominal value transfer only occurs in the affected axis during an erasable positioning error n New function Field orientation for synchronous spindles with encoders without a Z1 track or nonaligned encoders with EnDat interface n New motor tabl...

Page 80: ...476 17 export version 280 477 17 Release 03 01 n MP2397 Can be changed by the PLC n MP7683 bit 7 Execute AUTOSTART function by PLC n M4182 AUTOSTART function activated n M4183 Time for AUTOSTART function expired n STRICTREPOS in OEM SYS can be used to activate the function for restoring the position when an NC program is interrupted during Single Block mode or by a STOP block and the positions of ...

Page 81: ...20 export version 280 477 20 Release 08 01 NC software 280 476 21 export version 280 477 21 Release 11 01 n MP1152 I3 control is ready signal acknowledgement is passed on directly to the NC or is first processed by the PLC n The machining plane position indication MP7500 bit 1 1 has been expanded by the following swivel axis combination Swivel head and rotary table axis sequence B variable A varia...

Page 82: ...2 72 HEIDENHAIN Technical Manual TNC 426 TNC 430 ...

Page 83: ... LE 430 M 3 24 3 4 3 Buffer Battery for the Logic Unit 3 26 3 4 4 PLC Power Supply 3 27 3 4 5 Power Supply for the PL 4xxB 3 28 3 4 6 Supply Voltage for Control is Ready Signal LE 426 M LE 430 M 3 29 3 4 7 Power Supply for Visual Display Units 3 29 3 5 Encoders 3 31 3 5 1 Prerequisites 3 31 3 5 2 Position Encoder 3 31 3 5 3 Speed Encoder LE 426 PB M LE 430 PA M 3 37 3 5 4 Adapters for Encoder Sign...

Page 84: ... LE 426 M LE 430 M Max 6 Axes 3 108 3 23 4 LE 430 M Max 9 Axes 3 109 3 23 5 TE 420 3 110 3 23 6 MB 420 3 111 3 23 7 BC 120 3 112 3 23 8 BF 120 3 113 3 23 9 BTS 110 3 114 3 23 10 BTS 120 3 115 3 23 11 PL 4xx B 3 116 3 23 12 Adapter Block for the Data Interface 3 117 3 23 13 Voltage Controller 3 118 3 23 14 Handwheels 3 119 3 23 15 Touch probe systems 3 125 3 24 Grounding Diagrams 3 133 3 24 1 Groun...

Page 85: ...M TNC 430 M with SIMODRIVE 611D in Double Row 3 147 3 26 Cable Overviews 3 148 3 26 1 Cable Overview TNC 426 CB TNC 430 CA Basic Configuration 3 148 3 26 2 Cable Overview TNC 426 PB TNC 430 PA Basic Configuration 3 149 3 26 3 Cable Overview for TNC 426 M TNC 430 M with Modular HEIDENHAIN Inverter Basic Configuration 3 150 3 26 4 Cable Overview for TNC 426 M TNC 430 M with HEIDENHAIN Nonregenerativ...

Page 86: ...3 4 HEIDENHAIN Technical Manual TNC 426 TNC 430 ...

Page 87: ...e and inductive coupling from electrical conductors or from device inputs outputs such as n Strong magnetic fields from transformers or electric motors n Relays contactors and solenoid valves n High frequency equipment pulse equipment and stray magnetic fields from switch mode power supplies n Power lines and leads to the above equipment Protective measures n A minimum distance of 20 cm from the l...

Page 88: ...itional free threaded holes in the housing into which the screws are inserted after the hard disk has been released When is it necessary to use the shipping brace n Before beginning operation the shipping brace of the hard disk must be released and the screws inserted in the storage holes n The shipping brace for the hard disk is not required when the machine is being transported n Should servicin...

Page 89: ...ld flow over surfaces that have good thermal conductivity to the external surroundings n For a closed steel housing without assisted cooling the figure for heat conduction is 3 watt m2 of surface per C air temperature difference between inside and outside n Use of a heat exchanger with separate internal and external circulation HEIDENHAIN advises against blowing external air through the control ca...

Page 90: ...he TNC not be switched off so as to avoid condensation on the circuit boards 3 2 3 Mechanical Vibration Permissible vibration 0 075 mm 10 to 41 Hz 5 m s2 41 Hz to 500 Hz Permissible shock 50 m s2 11 ms Permissible shock when hard disk shipping brace is used only LE 426 M LE 430 M 300 m s2 11 ms 3 2 4 Mounting Position Warning When mounting please observe proper minimum clearance space requirements...

Page 91: ...r air circulation Free space for servicing Illustration of max swivel range The minimum angle of swivel for exchange of subassemblies should be at least 90 Minimum clearance for servicing recommended approx 250 mm Maintain clearance for screwdriver Connecting cables must not hinder swivel movement of the control Air outlet 22 72 3 15 3 15 4 33 1 57 1 57 3 94 1 18 1 18 3 94 6 3 9 65 1 18 3 27 1 57 ...

Page 92: ...ce for air circulation Free space for servicing Illustration of max swivel range The minimum angle of swivel for exchange of subassemblies should be at least 90 Minimum clearance for servicing recommended approx 250 mm Maintain clearance for screwdriver Connecting cables must not hinder swivel movement of the control Air outlet 22 72 3 15 3 15 4 33 1 57 1 57 3 94 1 18 1 18 3 94 6 3 12 09 1 18 3 27...

Page 93: ...vicing Connecting cables must be laid in a way that allows the LE to be opened Leave space for air circulation and servicing Leave space for air circulation and servicing Leave space for air circulation Temperatures of 150 C are possible with UE 21x B with integral braking resist or Do not mount any temperature sensitive components ...

Page 94: ...pace requirements for air circulation are shown in the dimension drawing at the end of this chapter BF 120 visual display unit The BF 120 flat panel display must be viewed with a slight backward slant 7 7 7 7 During installation ensure a viewing angle of 150 α 90 PLC input output unit A maximum of four PL 410B or one PL 405B can be connected to the TNC TNC 426 CB TNC 430 CA n You can mount one PL ...

Page 95: ...ggering touch probe for workpiece measurement X13 Triggering touch probe for tool measurement X14 Measuring touch probe option X21 RS 232 C V 24 data interface X22 RS 422 V 11 data interface X23 Handwheel input X25 Ethernet interface option X26 Ethernet interface option X30 Reference signal for spindle X31 NC power supply X41 PLC output X42 PLC input X43 CRT screen or X49 Color flat panel display ...

Page 96: ...piece measurement X13 Triggering touch probe for tool measurement X14 Measuring touch probe option X15 to X20 Encoder for speed X21 RS 232 C V 24 data interface X22 RS 422 V 11 data interface X23 Handwheel input X25 Ethernet interface option X26 Ethernet interface option X30 Reference signal for spindle X31 NC power supply X41 PLC output X42 PLC input X43 CRT screen or X49 Color flat panel display...

Page 97: ... for tool measurement X14 Measuring touch probe option X15 to X19 Encoder for speed X21 RS 232 C V 24 data interface X22 RS 422 V 11 data interface X23 Handwheel input X25 Ethernet interface option X26 Ethernet interface option X30 Reference signal for spindle X31 NC power supply X41 PLC output X42 PLC input X43 CRT screen or X49 Color flat panel display X44 PLC supply voltage X45 TNC keyboard uni...

Page 98: ...rement X13 Triggering touch probe for tool measurement X14 Measuring touch probe option or X38 Additional position encoder input option X21 RS 232 C V 24 data interface X22 RS 422 V 11 data interface X23 Handwheel input X25 Ethernet interface option X26 Ethernet interface option X30 Reference signal for spindle X31 NC power supply X35 to X37 Position encoder X41 PLC output X42 PLC input X43 CRT sc...

Page 99: ...ional position encoder input option X15 to X20 Encoder for axes speed X21 RS 232 C V 24 data interface X22 RS 422 V 11 data interface X23 Handwheel input X25 Ethernet interface option X26 Ethernet interface option X30 Reference signal for spindle X31 NC power supply X35 to Position encoder for 3 axes with analog X37 speed command interface option X41 PLC output X42 PLC input X43 CRT screen or X49 ...

Page 100: ...ch probe for workpiece measurement X13 Triggering touch probe for tool measurement X14 Measuring touch probe option X15 to X20 Encoder for speed X21 RS 232 C V 24 data interface X22 RS 422 V 11 data interface X23 Handwheel input X26 Ethernet interface option X30 Reference signal for spindle X34 Input 24 V for Control is ready X41 PLC output X42 PLC input X43 CRT screen or X49 Color flat panel disp...

Page 101: ...ring touch probe for tool measurement X14 Measuring touch probe option X15 to X19 Encoder for axes speed X21 RS 232 C V 24 data interface X22 RS 422 V 11 data interface X23 Handwheel input X26 Ethernet interface option X30 Reference signal for spindle X34 Input 24 V for Control is ready X41 PLC output X42 PLC input X43 CRT screen or X49 Color flat panel display X44 PLC supply voltage X45 TNC keybo...

Page 102: ... to 13 X12 Triggering touch probe for workpiece measurement X13 Triggering touch probe for tool measurement X14 Measuring touch probe option X15 to X20 Encoder for axes speed X21 RS 232 C V 24 data interface X22 RS 422 V 11 data interface X23 Handwheel input X26 Ethernet interface option X30 Reference signal for spindle X34 Input 24 V for output Control is ready X41 PLC output X42 PLC input X43 CR...

Page 103: ...30 Reference signal for spindle X34 Input 24 V for Control is ready X35 to X38 Position encoder X41 PLC output X42 PLC input X43 CRT screen or X49 Color flat panel display X44 PLC supply voltage X45 TNC keyboard unit X46 Machine operating panel X47 PLC expansion X48 PLC analog input X51 to X59 Output to motor power module X60 Encoder for spindle speed X61 Output to spindle motor power module X62 t...

Page 104: ...3 22 HEIDENHAIN Technical Manual TNC 426 TNC 430 ...

Page 105: ...ply voltage for the drive control 7 7 7 7 Connect the dc link voltage of the servo amplifier to the terminals UZ and UZ 385 Vdc to 660 Vdc The LE monitors the rectified voltage n An overvoltage up to 720 V is permissible for 5 seconds n Over 720 V the NC prevents a pulse release for the IGBT of the power module the motors coast to a non controlled stop and there can be no energy recovery to the dc...

Page 106: ...tor 50 pin Assignment 1a to 5b 5 V 6a to 7b 12 V 8a 5 V low voltage separation 8b 0 V low voltage separation 9a 15 V 9b 15 V 10a UZAN 10b 0 V 11a IZAN 11b 0 V 12a RES PS 12b 0 V 13a PF PS ZK 13b GND 14a ERR UZ GR 14b GND 15a ERR IZ GR 15b GND 16a ERR TMP 16b GND 17a RDY PS 17b GND 18a ERR ILEAK 18b GND 19a PF PS AC not with UV 130 UE 2xx UE 2xxB 19b GND 20a Do not assign 20b GND 21a Do not assign ...

Page 107: ...nts a pulse release for the IGBT of the power module the motors coast to a non controlled stop and there can be no energy recovery to the dc link n Below 385 Vdc powerfail all drives are brought to a controlled stop the control must be switched off and on again n Below 155 Vdc the control is reset RESET n At 135 Vdc the dc link power supply switches off ...

Page 108: ...battery case remove the cover with a screwdriver and one fourth of a revolution counterclockwise 7 7 7 7 Exchange the batteries and ensure that the battery box is closed properly LE 426 M LE 430 M Battery type 1 lithium battery type CR 2450N Renata Id Nr 315 878 01 The batteries must be exchanged if the TNC displays the message EXCHANGE BUFFER BATTERY 7 7 7 7 Open the LE The buffer battery may be ...

Page 109: ... Vdc Power consumption If half of the outputs are switched at the same time the following are the values for power consumption PL 410B approx 460 W PL 405B approx 235 W Nominal operating current per output LE 0 125 A with a simultaneity factor of 0 5 PL 410B 2 A with max current consumption of 20 A PL 405B 2 A with max current consumption of 20 A X44 PLC supply voltage Pin layout of the logic unit...

Page 110: ...X9 0 V X10 24 Vdc logic power supply and for control is ready signal X11 24 Vdc Power supply for outputs O32 O39 O64 O71 O128 O135 O160 O167 X12 24 Vdc Power supply for outputs O40 O47 O72 O79 O136 O143 O168 O175 X13 24 Vdc Power supply for outputs O48 O55 O80 O87 O144 O151 O176 O183 X14 24 Vdc Power supply for outputs O56 O62 O88 O94 O152 O158 O184 O190 Terminal Assignment PL 1 PL 2 PL 3 PL 4 X9 ...

Page 111: ...ly for Visual Display Units BC 120 Connection to line power via Euro connector BF 120 Power supply with basic insulation in accordance with EN 50 178 Power consumption 15 W Connecting terminal X34 Assignment Connection when using a HEIDENHAIN inverter 1 24 V X72 1 2 0 V X72 2 Supply voltage and power consumption Line voltage 100 V to 240 V Frequency range 50 Hz to 60 Hz Power consumption 80 W Conn...

Page 112: ...3 30 HEIDENHAIN Technical Manual TNC 426 TNC 430 ...

Page 113: ...e LE encoders with EnDat interface can be connected n LE 426 M LE 430 M with EPROMs only certain inputs n LE 426 M LE 430 M with flash EPROMs all speed encoder inputs 6 position encoder inputs Please use only HEIDENHAIN encoder cables connectors and couplings For maximum cable lengths see Cable Overview at the end of this chapter Current consumption of encoders Maximum current consumption n 200 mA...

Page 114: ...5 xx 326 419 xx 50 kHz LE 430 PA X6 311 049 xx 313 521 xx 326 417 xx 325 716 xx 350 kHz X1 to X5 311 049 xx 313 521 xx 350 kHz 325 716 xx 326 417 xx 50 kHz X35 to X38 311 049 xx 313 521 xx 326 417 xx 325 716 xx 350 kHz LE 430 CA X6 311 050 xx 313 523 xx 326 418 xx 326 424 xx 350 kHz X1 to X5 311 050 xx 313 523 xx 350 kHz 326 418 xx 326 424 xx 50 kHz X35 to X38 311 050 xx 313 523 xx 326 418 xx 326 ...

Page 115: ...x 3x X35 to X38 Note The interfaces comply with the requirements of EN 50 178 for low voltage electrical separation Logic unit Encoder cable D sub connection male 15 pin Assignment D sub cnnctr female 15 pin 1 5 V 1 Brown 2 0 V 2 White 3 l1 3 Green 4 l1 4 Yellow 5 0 V 5 White Brown internal shield 6 l2 6 Blue 7 l2 7 Red 8 0 V 8 9 5 V 9 10 l0 10 Gray 11 0 V 11 12 l0 12 Pink 13 0 V 13 14 Do not assi...

Page 116: ...17 505 05 Encoder cable D sub connection male 15 pin Assignment Female Male D sub cnnctr female 15 pin 1 5 V 1 1 1 Brown 2 0 V 2 2 2 White 3 l1 3 3 3 Green 4 l1 4 4 4 Yellow 5 Do not assign 5 5 5 White Brown internal shield 6 l2 6 6 6 Blue 7 l2 7 7 7 Red 8 0 V 8 8 8 9 5 V 9 9 9 10 l0 10 10 10 Gray 11 0 V 11 11 11 12 l0 12 12 12 Pink 13 0 V 13 13 13 14 Do not assign 14 14 14 15 Do not assign 15 15 ...

Page 117: ...Female Male Color 1 5 V UP 1 Brown Green 12 12 Brown Green 2 0 V UN 2 White Green 10 10 White Green 3 A 3 Brown 5 5 Brown 4 A 4 Green 6 6 Green 5 Do not assign 5 6 B 6 Gray 8 8 Gray 7 B 7 Pink 1 1 Pink 8 Do not assign 8 9 5 V sensor line 9 Blue 2 2 Blue 10 R 10 Red 3 3 Red 11 0 V sensor line 11 White 11 11 White 12 R 12 Black 4 4 Black 13 0 V 13 14 Do not assign 14 Violet 7 7 Violet 15 Do not assi...

Page 118: ...n Black 15 15 Green Black 15 15 Green Black 2a 4 A 4 Yellow Black 16 16 Yellow Black 16 16 Yellow Black 2b 5 Data 5 Gray 14 14 Gray 14 14 Gray 3b 6 B 6 Blue Black 12 12 Blue Black 12 12 Blue Black 1a 7 B 7 Red Black 13 13 Red Black 13 13 Red Black 1b 8 Data 8 Pink 17 17 Pink 17 17 Pink 3a 9 5 V sensor line 9 Blue 1 1 Blue 1 1 Blue 6a 10 Free 10 3 3 Red 3 3 11 0 V sensor line 11 White 4 4 White 4 4...

Page 119: ...ine count of the speed encoder when choosing the spindle motor x line count of the speed encoder f maximum input frequency n maximum spindle speed x f 60 1000 n x 410 60 1000 24000 1024 LE Input with EnDat interface LE 426 M 12 000 rpm with EPROMs X19 X20 LE 426 M 30 000 rpm with EPROMs X19 X60 LE 430 M 6 axes with EPROMs X19 X20 LE 430 M 9 axes with EPROMs X15 to X20 X62 to X64 X60 LE 426 M 12 00...

Page 120: ...llow Black 2 2 Yellow Black 2 5 0 V 6 B 6 Blue Black 11 11 Blue Black 11 7 B 7 Red Black 12 12 Red Black 12 8 0 V 8 Internal shield 17 17 Internal shield 17 9 Do not assign 10 Do not assign 11 Do not assign 12 Do not assign 13 Temperature 13 Yellow 8 8 Yellow 8 14 5 V UP 14 Blue 16 16 Blue 16 15 Do not assign 16 0 V UN 16 White 15 15 White 15 17 R 17 Red 3 3 Red 3 18 R 18 Black 13 13 Black 13 19 C...

Page 121: ... B 6 Blue Black 11 11 Blue Black 11 7 B 7 Red Black 12 12 Red Black 12 8 0 V 8 Internal shield 17 17 Internal shield 17 9 Do not assign 10 Clock 10 Green 5 5 Green 5 11 Do not assign 12 Clock 12 Brown 14 14 Brown 14 13 Temperature 13 Yellow 8 8 Yellow 8 14 5 V sensor line 14 Blue 16 16 Blue 16 15 Data 15 Red 3 3 Red 3 16 0 V sensor line 16 White 15 15 White 15 17 Do not assign 18 Do not assign 19 ...

Page 122: ... 11 µAPP or TTL levels can be adapted to the 1 VPP interface with HEIDENHAIN adapter connectors Note Please note n The adapters adjust only the levels not the signal shape n The contamination signal of the square wave encoder cannot be evaluated n A square wave signal can be subdivided no more than 4 fold ...

Page 123: ...Ua1 5 0 V 5 0 V 6 B 6 Ua2 7 B 7 Ua2 8 0 V 8 0 V 9 5 V 9 5 V 10 R 10 Ua0 11 0 V 11 0 V 12 R 12 Ua0 13 0 V 13 0 V 14 UaS 14 UaS 15 Not assigned 15 Not assigned D sub connctr female 15 pin Assignment D sub connctn male 15 pin Assignment 1 Not assigned 1 Not assigned 2 0 V 2 0 V 3 A 3 Ua1 4 A 4 Ua1 5 Not assigned 5 Not assigned 6 B 6 Ua2 7 B 7 Ua2 8 Not assigned 8 Not assigned 9 Not assigned 9 Not ass...

Page 124: ... and D sub connector male D sub connctr female 15 pin Assignment D sub connctn male 15 pin Assignment 1 5 V UP 1 5 V UP 2 0 V UN 2 0 V UN 3 A 3 0 4 A 4 0 5 0 V 5 0 V 6 B 6 90 7 B 7 90 8 0 V 8 0 V 9 5 V 9 5 V 10 R 10 R 11 0 V 11 0 V 12 R 12 R 13 0 V 13 0 V 14 Not assigned 14 Not assigned 15 Not assigned 15 Not assigned ...

Page 125: ...December 2001 Encoders 3 43 ...

Page 126: ...Motors The components required for operation of the LE with non HEIDENHAIN inverter systems are described in the manual Technical Information for the Operation of SIMODRIVE and POWER DRIVE Inverter Systems X51 to X59 X61 Outputs to the motor power module The following applies for the outputs to the motor power module Logic level 5 V Analog signals IACT 7 5 V PWM frequency X51 to X59 Can be set fro...

Page 127: ...ignment D sub connctr male 15 pin D sub connctr female 15 pin X1 X2 D sub connection female 15 pin 1 Do not assign 1 Black 1 1 2 PWM U1 2 Blue 2 2 3 PWM U2 3 Gray 3 3 4 PWM U3 4 White 4 4 5 Reset 5 Green 5 5 6 Ready 6 White Pink 6 6 7 Iact2 7 Gray Pink 7 7 8 Iact1 8 Black 8 8 9 0 V U1 9 Red 9 9 10 0 V U2 10 Pink 10 10 11 0 V U3 11 Brown 11 11 12 0 V analog 12 Brown Green 12 12 13 Temp warn 13 Red ...

Page 128: ...LE 430 M Ribbon connector 20 pin Assignment 1a PWM U1 1b 0 V U1 2a PWM U2 2b 0 V U2 3a PWM U3 3b 0 V U3 4a SH2 4b 0 V SH2 5a SH1B 5b 0 V SH1B 6a Iactl 1 6b Iactl 1 7a 0 V analog 7b Iactl 2 8a Iactl 2 8b 0 V analog 9a Do not assign 9b Do not assign 10a Temp warning 10b Ready ...

Page 129: ...10 V to 10 V Input resistance 250 kΩ Resolution W480 W482 W484 100 mV Resolution Module 9003 10 mV LE 100 mV PL 410 B Internal value range 100 to 100 at a resolution of 100 mV 10 to 10 at a resolution of 10 mV Inputs for Pt 100 thermistors Constant current 5 mA Temperature range 0 C to 100 C Resolution W486 W488 W490 0 5 C Resolution Module 9003 0 1 C LE 0 5 C PL 410 B Internal value range 0 to 20...

Page 130: ...0 4 U1 Measuring input for Pt 100 5 I2 Constant current for Pt 100 6 I2 Constant current for Pt 100 7 U2 Measuring input for Pt 100 8 U2 Measuring input for Pt 100 9 I3 Constant current for Pt 100 10 I3 Constant current for Pt 100 11 U3 Measuring input for Pt 100 12 U3 Measuring input for Pt 100 13 Do not assign 14 Analog input 1 10 V to 10 V 15 Analog input 1 0 V reference potential 16 Analog inp...

Page 131: ...r Pt 100 thermistors 7 7 7 7 Configure the thermistor connection as a four conductor circuit Note The interface complies with the requirements of EN 50 178 for low voltage electrical separation Connecting terminals Assignment 1 I Constant current for Pt 100 2 U Measuring input for Pt 100 3 U Measuring input for Pt 100 4 I Constant current for Pt 100 5 Shield 1 2 4 5 Measuring input U Measuring inp...

Page 132: ...0 x and MP121 x to assign the corresponding analog outputs on terminal X8 or X9 to the nominal speed outputs n The connecting cables to the nominal value outputs must not have more than one intermediate terminal n If you must branch to physically separate servo inputs the connection must be made in a grounded terminal box e g Id Nr 251 249 01 from HEIDENHAIN The housing of the terminal box must be...

Page 133: ...e shielding is led to insulated wire of 0 14 mm by means of crimping rings 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 X Y Z IV V S LE Connecting terminals Axis Spindle Assignment 1 Nominal value in X axis 10 V 2 0 V 3 Nominal value in Y axis 10 V 4 0 V 5 Nominal value in Z axis 10 V 6 0 V 7 Nominal value in axis 4 10 V 8 0 V 9 Nominal value in axis 5 10 V 10 0 V 11 Nominal value in spindle 10 V 12 0 V...

Page 134: ... 10 V 1 Brown 2 Do not assign 2 Brown Green 3 Analog output 2 10 V 3 Yellow 4 Analog output 5 10 V 4 Red Blue 5 Analog output 3 10 V 5 Pink 6 Analog output 5 0 V 6 Gray Pink 7 Analog output 4 10 V 7 Red 8 Analog output 6 10 V 8 Violet 9 Analog output 1 0 V 9 White 10 Do not assign 10 White Gray 11 Analog output 2 0 V 11 Green 12 Do not assign 12 13 Analog output 3 0 V 13 Gray 14 Analog output 4 0 ...

Page 135: ...2 Analog output 13 10 V 2 Brown Green 3 Analog output 8 10 V 3 Yellow 4 Analog output 11 10 V 4 Red Blue 5 Analog output 9 10 V 5 Pink 6 Analog output 11 0 V 6 Gray Pink 7 Analog output 10 10 V 7 Red 8 Analog output 12 10 V 8 Violet 9 Analog output 7 0 V 9 White 10 Analog output 13 0 V 10 White Gray 11 Analog output 8 0 V 11 Green 12 Do not assign 12 13 Analog output 9 0 V 13 Gray 14 Analog output...

Page 136: ...3 54 HEIDENHAIN Technical Manual TNC 426 TNC 430 ...

Page 137: ...pter 3 9 1 Triggering Touch Probe for Workpiece Measurement X12 Touch probe connection Pin layout for TS 220 Note The interface complies with the requirements of EN 50 178 for low voltage electrical separation LE AK 274 543 xx TS 220 Female Assignment Male Color Pin Pin Color 1 0 V internal shield 1 2 Do not assign 2 3 Ready 3 Pink 4 4 4 Start 4 5 15 V 10 UP max 100 mA 5 Gray 3 3 6 5 V 5 UP max 10...

Page 138: ...Start 4 Yellow 3 3 5 15 V 10 UP max 100 mA 5 Brown 2 2 Brown 6 5 V 5 UP max 100 mA 7 Battery warning 7 Blue 6 6 Blue 8 0 V UN 8 White 1 1 White 9 Trigger signal 10 Trigger signala 10 Green 4 4 Green 11 to 15 Do not assign Hsg External shield Hsg External shield Hsg Hsg a Stylus at rest means logic level HIGH LE AK 310 197 xx APE 511 275 759 xx VB 336 157 xx EA 552 339 317 xx TS 632 Male Female Mal...

Page 139: ...N 50 178 for low voltage electrical separation LE AK 335 332 xx TT 130 296 537 xx Female Assignment Male Color Female Male Color 1 Ready 1 Pink 6 6 2 0 V UN 2 White Green 1 1 White 3 Do not assign 3 4 15 V 5 UP 4 Brown Green 2 2 Brown 5 Do not assign 5 5 5 6 Do not assign 6 7 5 V 5 UP 7 8 Trigger signal 8 Brown 3 3 Green 9 Trigger signala 9 Green 4 4 Yellow 7 7 Hsg External shield Hsg External shi...

Page 140: ...of EN 50 178 for low voltage electrical separation Logic unit mounting set Adapter cable Id Nr 296 839 xx Renishaw VB A 1016 6640 Reni shaw SP 2 1 D sub cnnctr female 25 pin Assgnmnt D sub cnnctr male 25 pin Cplng on mntng base female 21 pin Cnnctr male 21 pin 3 Ua2 Axis X 3 Pink 7 4 Ua1 4 Yellow 5 16 Ua2 16 Gray 6 17 Ua1 17 Green 4 7 Ua2 Y axis 7 Brown Blue 11 8 Ua1 8 Red 9 20 Ua2 20 White Blue 1...

Page 141: ...December 2001 Touch Probe Systems 3 59 ...

Page 142: ... logic unit connecting cables and adapter block Note The interface complies with the requirements of EN 50 178 for low voltage electrical separation Logic unit Connecting cable Id Nr 239 760 xx AB Id Nr 310 085 01 Connecting cable Id Nr 274 545 01 D sub cnnctr female 25 pin Assign ment D sub cnnctr male 25 pin D sub cnnctr female 25 pin D sub cnnctr male 25 pin D sub cnnctr female 25 pin D sub cnn...

Page 143: ... Connecting cable Id Nr 289 208 xx PL Id Nr 310 086 01 D sub cnnctr female 15 pin Assignment D sub connctr male 15 pin D sub cnnctr female 15 pin D sub connctn male 15 pin D sub cnnctr female 15 pin 1 Chassis GND 1 black external shield 1 1 1 2 RXD 2 Blue 2 2 2 3 CTS 3 Gray 3 3 3 4 TXD 4 White 4 4 4 5 RTS 5 Green 5 5 5 6 DSR 6 White Green 6 6 6 7 DTR 7 Green Pink 7 7 7 8 Signal GND 8 Black 8 8 8 9...

Page 144: ...Mbps X26 RJ45 connection Please note the maximum cable length n Unshielded 100 m n Shielded 400 m Note The interface complies with the requirements of EN 50 178 for low voltage electrical separation RJ45 connection female 8 pin Assignment 1 TX 2 TX 3 REC 4 Do not assign 5 Do not assign 6 REC 7 Do not assign 8 Do not assign ...

Page 145: ...December 2001 Data Interface 3 63 ...

Page 146: ...R 150 Panel Mounted Handwheels via the HRA 110 handwheel adapter n HR 410 Portable Handwheel X23 Handwheel input Pin layout of the logic unit Note The interface complies with the requirements of EN 50 178 for low voltage electrical separation D sub connection female 9 pin Assignment 1 CTS 2 0 V 3 RTS 4 12 V 0 6 V UV 5 Do not assign 6 DTR 7 TxD 8 RxD 9 DSR Housing External shield ...

Page 147: ...Adapter cable Id Nr 296 466 xx Connecting cable Id Nr see next page HR 410 Id Nr 296 469 xx D sub cnnctr male 9 pin D sub cnnctr female 9 pin D sub cnnctr male 9 pin Cplng on mntng base fem 5 7 pin Cnnctr male 5 7 pin Cnnctr female 5 7 pin Cnnctr male 5 7 pin Housing Shield Housing Hsg Shield Housing Housing Shield Housing Hsg Shield 2 White 2 2 White E E White E E 4 Brown 4 4 Brown D D Brown D D ...

Page 148: ... immediate need for these terminal strips they can be ordered in advance See the Additional components table below Internal wiring of the contacts for the EMERGENCY STOP and permissive buttons Additional components Id Nr Dummy plug for EMERGENCY STOP circuit 271 958 03 Connecting cable Spiral cable 312 879 01 Normal cable 296 467 xx Metal armor 296 687 xx Plug in terminal strips for advance orderi...

Page 149: ... meter Pin layout for extension cable and handwheel Extension cable Id Nr 281 429 xx HR 130 Id Nr 254 040 xx D sub cnnctr male 9 pin Color D sub connctr female 9 pin D sub cnnctr male 9 pin Color Housing Shield Housing Housing Shield 2 White 2 2 White 4 Brown 4 4 Brown 6 Yellow 6 6 Yellow 8 Green 8 8 Green 7 Gray 7 ...

Page 150: ...e g the interpolation factor for the handwheel In the PLC you must evaluate the current position of the handwheel selection switch and activate the corresponding interpolation factor with Module 9036 See Overview of Modules on page 5 3 X1 X2 X3 Inputs for HR 150 handwheels Pin layout on the HRA 110 for the HR 150 HRA 110 X3 X2 X1 X23 LE X23 S1 X31 24 V Achswahl Option AXIS SELECTION OPTIONAL Unter...

Page 151: ...xx D sub connection female 9 pin Assignment 1 RTS 2 0 V 3 CTS 4 12 V 0 6 V UV 5 Do not assign 6 DSR 7 RxD 8 TxD 9 DTR Housing External shield Warning The power supply of the PLC must not be used simultaneously for the HRA 110 otherwise the metallic isolation of the PLC inputs outputs would be bridged HRA 110 261 097 xx Connecting terminal Assignment 1 24 Vdc as per IEC 742 VDE 551 2 0 V ...

Page 152: ...3 70 HEIDENHAIN Technical Manual TNC 426 TNC 430 ...

Page 153: ...coder directly on the spindle i e without a mechanical transmission ratio you must not connect this input If you use the X30 input for evaluation of the reference signal then adjust this function with MP3143 See Machine Parameters on page 4 3 X30 Reference signal for spindle Pin layout Connecting terminal Assignment 1 24 V 2 0 V ...

Page 154: ...of 24 Vdc must be available at X50 to enable the drive motors X50 Drive enabling Pin layout for logic units up to Id Nr xxx xxx 3x Pin layout for logic units beginning with Id Nr xxx xxx 4x Connecting terminal Assignment 1 24 Vdc 2 Do not assign 3 0 V Connecting terminal Assignment 1 24 Vdc 2 to 6 Do not assign 7 0 V ...

Page 155: ...panel I64 to I127 I64 to I95 64 32 First PLC input output board PL 410B First PLC input output board PL 405B I192 to I255 I192 to I223 64 32 Second PLC I O board PL 410B Second PLC input output board PL 405B I256 to I319 I256 to I287 64 32 Third PLC input output board PL 410B Third PLC input output board PL 405B I320 to I383 I320 to I351 64 32 Fourth PLC input output board PL 410B Fourth PLC input...

Page 156: ...8 I27 28 White Yellow 29 I28 29 Gray Blue 30 I29 30 Pink Blue 31 I30 31 Pink Red 32 I31 32 Brown Blue 33 LE 426 CB PB LE 430 CA PA Do not use LE 426 M LE 430M I32 Drive enabling 33 Pink Green 34 Do not assign 34 Brown 35 0 V PLC Test output do not assign 35 Yellow Pink 36 0 V PLC Test output do not assign 36 Violet 37 0 V PLC Test output do not assign 37 White Housing External shield Housing Exter...

Page 157: ...264 I328 10 I73 I201 I265 I329 11 I74 I202 I266 I330 12 I75 I203 I267 I331 13 I76 I204 I268 I332 14 I77 I205 I269 I333 15 I78 I206 I270 I334 16 I79 I207 I271 I335 X4 Terminal Assignment 1st PL 2nd PL 3rd PL 4th PL 1 I80 I208 I272 I336 2 I81 I209 I273 I337 3 I82 I210 I274 I338 4 I83 I211 I275 I339 5 I84 I212 I276 I340 6 I85 I213 I277 I341 7 I86 I214 I278 I342 8 I87 I215 I279 I343 9 I88 I216 I280 I3...

Page 158: ...298 I362 12 I107 I235 I299 I363 13 I108 I236 I300 I364 14 I109 I237 I301 I365 15 I110 I238 I302 I366 16 I111 I239 I303 I367 X6 Terminal Assignment 1st PL 2nd PL 3rd PL 4th PL 1 I112 I240 I304 I368 2 I113 I241 I305 I369 3 I114 I242 I306 I370 4 I115 I243 I307 I371 5 I116 I244 I308 I372 6 I117 I245 I309 I373 7 I118 I246 I310 I374 8 I119 I247 I311 I375 9 I120 I248 I312 I376 10 I121 I249 I313 I377 11 I...

Page 159: ... I328 10 I73 I201 I265 I329 11 I74 I202 I266 I330 12 I75 I203 I267 I331 13 I76 I204 I268 I332 14 I77 I205 I269 I333 15 I78 I206 I270 I334 16 I79 I207 I271 I335 X4 Terminal Assignment 1st PL 2nd PL 3rd PL 4th PL 1 I80 I208 I272 I336 2 I81 I209 I273 I337 3 I82 I210 I274 I338 4 I83 I211 I275 I339 5 I84 I212 I276 I340 6 I85 I213 I277 I341 7 I86 I214 I278 I342 8 I87 I215 I279 I343 9 I88 I216 I280 I344 ...

Page 160: ...may be driven at the same time simultaneity factor 0 5 Output signals Addresses Logic unit PL 4xxB Min output voltage for 1 signal 3 V below supply voltage Nominal operating current per output 0 125 A simultaneity factor 0 5 2 0 A at max PL current consumption of 20 A Note The switching outputs need a minimum load of 5 mA They conform to EN 61131 2 Address Number Device O0 to O30 31 Logic unit X41...

Page 161: ...ite Red 7 O6 7 White Green 8 O7 8 Red Blue 9 O8 9 Yellow Red 10 O9 10 Gray Pink 11 O10 11 Black 12 O11 12 Pink Brown 13 O12 13 Yellow Blue 14 O13 14 Green Blue 15 O14 15 Yellow 16 O15 16 Red Supply via X44 pin 2 disconnectable by EM STOP 17 O16 17 Gray 18 O17 18 Blue 19 O18 19 Pink 20 O19 20 White Gray 21 O20 21 Yellow Gray 22 O21 22 Green Red 23 O22 23 White Pink 24 O23 24 Gray Green Supply via X...

Page 162: ...Green 34 Control is ready 34 Brown 35 Test output do not assign 35 Yellow Pink 36 Test output do not assign 36 Violet 37 Test output do not assign 37 White Housing External shield Housing External shield Logic unit Connecting cable Id Nr 244 005 xx Id Nr 263 954 xx D sub connctn female 37 pin Assignment D sub connctr male 37 pin ...

Page 163: ...O168 10 O41 O73 O137 O169 11 O42 O74 O138 O170 12 O43 O75 O139 O171 13 O44 O76 O140 O172 14 O45 O77 O141 O173 15 O46 O78 O142 O174 16 O47 O79 O143 O175 X8 Terminal Assignment 1st PL 2nd PL 3rd PL 4th PL 1 O48 O80 O144 O176 2 O49 O81 O145 O177 3 O50 O82 O146 O178 4 O51 O83 O147 O179 5 O52 O84 O148 O180 6 O53 O85 O149 O181 7 O54 O86 O150 O182 8 O55 O87 O151 O183 9 O56 O88 O152 O184 10 O57 O89 O153 O...

Page 164: ...PL 1 O48 O80 O144 O176 2 O49 O81 O145 O177 3 O50 O82 O146 O178 4 O51 O83 O147 O179 5 O52 O84 O148 O180 6 O53 O85 O149 O181 7 O54 O86 O150 O182 8 O55 O87 O151 O183 9 O56 O88 O152 O184 10 O57 O89 O153 O185 11 O58 O90 O154 O186 12 O59 O91 O155 O187 13 O60 O92 O156 O188 14 O61 O93 O157 O189 15 O62 O94 O158 O190 16 Control is ready ...

Page 165: ...electrical cabinet TNC 426 PB M TNC 430 PA M The PLs must be mounted separately in the electrical cabinet The PL 410B is available with and without analog inputs No more than one PL 405B may be used If connecting through PL 410B the PL 405B must be connected last Device Id Nr Switching inputs 24 Vdc Switching outpt 24 Vdc Analoginputs 10 V Inputs for Pt 100 thermistors PL 410B 263 371 xx 64 31 PL ...

Page 166: ...te Blue 8 8 WRITE EXTERN 9 WRITE EXTERN 9 White Red 9 9 WRITE EXTERN 10 Address 5 10 Gray Pink 10 10 Address 5 11 Address 3 11 Blue 11 11 Address 3 12 Address 1 12 Green 12 12 Address 1 13 Do not assign 13 13 13 Do not assign 14 PCB identifier 3 14 Yellow Blue Pink Blue Yellow Black 14 14 12 V 15 PCB identifier 4 15 Yellow Red Gray Red Pink Red 15 15 12 V 16 Do not assign 16 Gray Blue 16 16 PCB id...

Page 167: ...White Blue 8 8 WRITE EXTERN 9 WRITE EXTERN 9 White Red 9 9 WRITE EXTERN 10 Address 5 10 Gray Pink 10 10 Address 5 11 Address 3 11 Blue 11 11 Address 3 12 Address 1 12 Green 12 12 Address 1 13 Do not assign 13 13 13 Do not assign 14 PCB identifier 4 14 Yellow Blue Pink Blue Yellow Black 14 14 12 V 15 PCB identifier 3 15 Yellow Red Gray Red Pink Red 15 15 12 V 16 PCB identifier 2 16 Gray Blue 16 16 ...

Page 168: ...3 86 HEIDENHAIN Technical Manual TNC 426 TNC 430 ...

Page 169: ...ring the PLC inputs I151 and I152 as well as the PLC outputs O0 to O7 Assignment of PLC inputs to the keys of the MB 420 X46 PLC inputs and outputs PLC inputs I128 to I152 and the PLC outputs O0 to O7 are located at X46 of the machine operating panel The reference potential PLC for outputs O0 to O7 is connected to pins 34 and 35 Pin layout of logic unit connecting cable and machine operating panel...

Page 170: ...5 I142 15 Yellow 15 15 FN5 16 I143 16 Red 16 16 Spindle on 17 I144 17 Gray 17 17 Spindle off 18 I145 18 Blue 18 18 Coolant On Off 19 I146 19 Pink 19 19 NC start 20 I147 20 White Gray 20 20 NC stop 21 I148 21 Yellow Gray 21 21 Rapid traverse 22 I149 22 Green Red 22 22 Black 23 I150 23 White Pink 23 23 Black 24 I151 24 Gray Green 24 24 Via X3 25 I152 25 Yellow Brown 25 25 Via X3 26 O0 26 Gray Brown ...

Page 171: ...December 2001 Machine Operating Panel 3 89 X3 PLC inputs Pin layout X4 PLC outputs Pin layout Terminal Assignment 1 I151 2 I152 3 24 V Terminal Assignment 1 O0 2 O1 3 O2 4 O3 5 O4 6 O5 7 O6 8 O7 9 0 V ...

Page 172: ...ment male 9 pin Assignment 1 SL0 2 SL1 3 SL2 4 SL3 5 Do not assign 6 RL15 7 RL14 8 RL13 9 RL12 Logic unit Connecting cable Id Nr 263 954 xx TE 420 313 038 xx D sub connctn female 37 pin Assignment D sub cnnctr male 37 pin D sub cnnctr female 37 pin X2 D sub connctn male 37 pin 1 RL0 1 Gray Red 1 1 2 RL1 2 Brown Black 2 2 3 RL2 3 White Black 3 3 4 RL3 4 Green Black 4 4 5 RL4 5 Brown Red 5 5 6 RL5 6...

Page 173: ...9 Gray Blue 29 29 30 Do not assign 30 Pink Blue 30 30 31 RL21 31 Pink Red 31 31 32 RL22 32 Brown Blue 32 32 33 RL23 33 Pink Green 33 33 34 Spindle override wiper 34 Brown 34 34 35 Feed rate override wiper 35 Yellow Pink 35 35 36 5 V override potentiometer 36 Violet 36 36 37 0 V override potentiometer 37 White 37 37 Housing External shield Housing External shield Housing Housing Logic unit Connecti...

Page 174: ... is included with the display unit X43 Visual Display Unit BC 120 Pin layout for the LE 426 CB PB LE 430 CA PA with Id Nr xxx xxx 3x the adapter the connecting cable and the visual display unit LE BC 120 BC 110B LE 426 CB PB LE 430 CA PA to hardware xxx xxx 3x Adapter two row three row Id Nr 313 434 02 No adapter required LE 426 CB PB LE 430 CA PA from hardware xxx xxx 4x No adapter required Adapt...

Page 175: ...in 3 row 1 GND 1 Coax I red 1 1 2 Do not assign 2 Coax I green 2 2 3 Do not assign 3 Coax I blue 3 3 4 Do not assign 4 4 4 5 Do not assign 5 5 5 6 Do not assign 6 Coax S red 6 6 7 R 7 Coax S GN 7 7 8 Do not assign 8 Coax S blue 8 8 9 HSYNC 9 9 9 10 VSYNC 10 Gray 10 10 11 GND 11 Green 11 11 12 Do not assign 12 12 12 13 Do not assign 13 Pink 13 13 14 G 14 Yellow 14 14 15 B 15 15 15 Housing External ...

Page 176: ...8 xx BC 120 D sub connctn female 15 pin 3 row Assignment D sub cnnctr male 15 pin 3 row D sub connctr female 15 pin 3 row D sub cnnctr male 15 pin 3 row 1 R 1 Coax I red 1 1 2 G 2 Coax I green 2 2 3 B 3 Coax I blue 3 3 4 Do not assign 4 4 4 5 Do not assign 5 5 5 6 GND 6 Coax S red 6 6 7 GND 7 Coax S GN 7 7 8 GND 8 Coax S blue 8 8 9 Do not assign 9 9 9 10 GND 10 Gray 10 10 11 GND 11 Green 11 11 12 ...

Page 177: ...ctr female 15 pin 2 row D sub cnnctr male 15 pin 2 row 1 GND 1 1 1 2 Do not assign 2 2 2 3 Do not assign 3 3 3 4 Do not assign 4 4 4 5 Do not assign 5 5 5 6 Do not assign 6 6 6 7 R 7 Coax red 7 7 8 Do not assign 8 8 8 9 HSYNC 9 Yellow 9 9 10 VSYNC 10 Pink 10 10 11 GND 11 Black 11 11 12 Do not assign 12 12 12 13 Do not assign 13 13 13 14 G 14 Coax green 14 14 15 B 15 Coax blue 15 15 Housing Externa...

Page 178: ... 3 row 2 row D sub connctr male 15 pin 2 row 1 R 1 Coax I red 1 1 2 G 2 Coax I green 2 2 3 B 3 Coax I blue 3 3 4 Do not assign 4 4 4 5 Do not assign 5 5 5 6 GND 6 Coax S red 6 6 7 GND 7 Coax S GN 7 7 8 GND 8 Coax S blue 8 8 9 Do not assign 9 9 9 10 GND 10 Gray 10 10 11 GND 11 Green 11 11 12 Do not assign 12 12 12 13 HSYNC 13 Pink 13 13 14 VSYNC 14 Yellow 14 14 15 Do not assign 15 15 15 Housing Ext...

Page 179: ...k 2 2 3 HSYNC 3 Green Black 3 3 Green Black 3 3 4 BLANK 4 Orange Black 4 4 Orange Black 4 4 5 VSYNC 5 Blue Black 5 5 Blue Black 5 5 6 0 V 6 Green White 6 6 Green White 6 6 7 R0 7 Orange White 7 7 Orange White 7 7 8 R1 8 Brown White 8 8 Brown White 8 8 9 R2 9 Gray White 9 9 Gray White 9 9 10 R3 10 Blue White 10 10 Blue White 10 10 11 0 V 11 Violet White 11 11 Violet White 11 11 12 G0 12 Violet Brow...

Page 180: ...0 31 R3 31 White Blue 31 31 White Blue 31 31 32 0 V 32 Gray Violet 32 32 Gray Violet 32 32 33 G0 33 Brown Violet 33 33 Brown Violet 33 33 34 G1 34 Green Violet 34 34 Green Violet 34 34 35 G2 35 Orange Violet 35 35 Orange Violet 35 35 36 G3 36 Blue Violet 36 36 Blue Violet 36 36 37 0 V 37 Gray Red 37 37 Gray Red 37 37 38 B0 38 Brown Red 38 38 Brown Red 38 38 39 B1 39 Gray Yellow 39 39 Gray Yellow 3...

Page 181: ...49 49 50 C3 50 Yellow Orange 50 50 Yellow Orange 50 50 51 C4 51 Yellow Blue 51 51 Yellow Blue 51 51 52 C5 52 Blue Yellow 52 52 Blue Yellow 52 52 53 to 56 Do not assign 53 to 56 Free 53 to 56 53 to 56 Free 53 to 56 53 to 56 57 to 62 0 V 57 to 62 Free 57 to 62 57 to 62 Free 57 to 62 57 to 62 Housing Housing Housing Housing Housing Housing Logic unit VB 312 876 xx VB 312 875 xx BF 120 D sub cnnctr fe...

Page 182: ...ard connections Refer to the Sections TNC Operating Panel and Visual Display Unit for the pin layouts of the individual connections X3 Switching between keyboards Depending on the signal at X3 one of the keyboards at X4 or X5 is activated X8 Supply voltage for BTS 120 Pin layout on the BTS 120 Jumper setting Active potentiometers Always keyboard 1 at X4 Currently active keyboard Connection designa...

Page 183: ...December 2001 BTS 1x0 Monitor Keyboard Switch 3 101 ...

Page 184: ...he Optional PCBs in the LE 426 CB PB LE 430 CA PA HEIDENHAIN supplies the optional PCBs separately Danger The installation must be performed only by trained personnel X37 X36 X35 X14 Id Nr 311 647 51 Id Nr 293 890 51 Id Nr 294 130 51 X38 Id Nr 311 537 51 X14 X38 X14 ...

Page 185: ...e Optional PCBs in the LE 426 M LE 430 M 3 103 3 22 Mounting the Optional PCBs in the LE 426 M LE 430 M 3 22 1 Ethernet Interface X26 X25 click click 1 2 3 4 Warning The installation must be performed only by trained personnel ...

Page 186: ...3 104 HEIDENHAIN Technical Manual TNC 426 TNC 430 3 22 2 Digitizing with the Measuring 3 D Touch Probe X14 click click 1 2 3 4 5 Warning The installation must be performed only by trained personnel ...

Page 187: ...December 2001 Dimensions 3 105 3 23 Dimensions Note All dimensions in mm ...

Page 188: ...3 106 HEIDENHAIN Technical Manual TNC 426 TNC 430 3 23 1 LE 426 PB LE 430 PA Weight 8 8 kg 476 5 84 456 2 10 193 5 2 45 2 13 15 7 83 5 9 12 5 326 0 5 R 3 3 1 424 26 Ø 1 0 5 215 10 280 0 3 ...

Page 189: ...December 2001 Dimensions 3 107 3 23 2 LE 426 CB LE 430 CA Weight 8 8 kg 137 5 2 132 5 2 45 2 R 3 2 5 83 5 145 10 326 0 5 280 0 3 13 476 5 456 2 84 10 15 7 9 12 5 24 Ø 1 0 5 427 5 0 5 ...

Page 190: ...3 108 HEIDENHAIN Technical Manual TNC 426 TNC 430 3 23 3 LE 426 M LE 430 M Max 6 Axes Weight approx 8 5 kg ...

Page 191: ...December 2001 Dimensions 3 109 3 23 4 LE 430 M Max 9 Axes Weight approx 9 kg ...

Page 192: ...3 110 HEIDENHAIN Technical Manual TNC 426 TNC 430 3 23 5 TE 420 Weight 2 4 kg F Front panel opening M Mounting surface ...

Page 193: ...December 2001 Dimensions 3 111 3 23 6 MB 420 Weight 0 9 kg F Front panel opening M Mounting surface ...

Page 194: ...3 112 HEIDENHAIN Technical Manual TNC 426 TNC 430 3 23 7 BC 120 Weight 14 kg F Front panel opening M Mounting surface ...

Page 195: ...December 2001 Dimensions 3 113 3 23 8 BF 120 Weight 3 kg F Front panel opening M Mounting surface ...

Page 196: ...3 114 HEIDENHAIN Technical Manual TNC 426 TNC 430 3 23 9 BTS 110 ...

Page 197: ...December 2001 Dimensions 3 115 3 23 10 BTS 120 ...

Page 198: ...3 116 HEIDENHAIN Technical Manual TNC 426 TNC 430 3 23 11 PL 4xx B Weight 1 5 kg I PLC inputs O PLC outputs ...

Page 199: ...December 2001 Dimensions 3 117 3 23 12 Adapter Block for the Data Interface RS 232 C V 24 adapter block and RS 422 V 11 adapter block ...

Page 200: ...3 118 HEIDENHAIN Technical Manual TNC 426 TNC 430 3 23 13 Voltage Controller Voltage controller for encoders with EnDat interface ...

Page 201: ...December 2001 Dimensions 3 119 3 23 14 Handwheels HR 130 Weight approx 0 7 kg ...

Page 202: ...3 120 HEIDENHAIN Technical Manual TNC 426 TNC 430 HR 150 Weight approx 0 7 kg ...

Page 203: ...December 2001 Dimensions 3 121 HR 410 ...

Page 204: ...3 122 HEIDENHAIN Technical Manual TNC 426 TNC 430 Adapter cables Mounting opening for wall thickness S 4 Mounting opening for wall thickness S 4 ...

Page 205: ...December 2001 Dimensions 3 123 HRA 110 Weight approx 1 5 kg ...

Page 206: ...3 124 HEIDENHAIN Technical Manual TNC 426 TNC 430 Control knob for HR 130 and HR 150 ...

Page 207: ...December 2001 Dimensions 3 125 3 23 15 Touch probe systems TT 130 ...

Page 208: ...3 126 HEIDENHAIN Technical Manual TNC 426 TNC 430 Adapter cable for TT and TS Mounting coupling for quick connection Mounting coupling for HEIDENHAIN standard connector ...

Page 209: ...December 2001 Dimensions 3 127 TS 220 Adapter cable for TS 120 TS 220 ...

Page 210: ...3 128 HEIDENHAIN Technical Manual TNC 426 TNC 430 EA 6x2 Receiver Unit ...

Page 211: ...December 2001 Dimensions 3 129 TS 632 ...

Page 212: ...3 130 HEIDENHAIN Technical Manual TNC 426 TNC 430 APE 652 ...

Page 213: ...December 2001 Dimensions 3 131 ...

Page 214: ...3 132 HEIDENHAIN Technical Manual TNC 426 TNC 430 ...

Page 215: ...December 2001 3 133 3 24 Grounding Diagrams 3 24 1 Grounding diagram TNC 426 CB PB TNC 430 CA PA ...

Page 216: ...December 2001 3 134 3 24 2 Grounding Diagram for TNC 426 M TNC 430 M with Modular Nonregenerative HEIDENHAIN Inverter ...

Page 217: ...December 2001 3 135 3 24 3 Grounding Diagram for TNC 426 M TNC 430 M with Modular Energy Recovery HEIDENHAIN Inverter ...

Page 218: ...December 2001 3 136 3 24 4 Grounding Diagram for TNC 426 M TNC 430 M with HEIDENHAIN Compact Inverter UE 2xx B ...

Page 219: ...December 2001 3 137 3 24 5 Grounding plan TNC 426 M TNC 430 M with POWERDRIVE Inverter System ...

Page 220: ...December 2001 3 138 3 24 6 Grounding plan TNC 426 M TNC 430 M with SIMODRIVE Inverter System in single row configuration ...

Page 221: ...December 2001 3 139 3 24 7 Grounding plan TNC 426 M TNC 430 M with SIMODRIVE Inverter System in double row configuration ...

Page 222: ...mperature warning Drive enable PLC output Control is ready Acknowledgement Control is ready Machine control voltage on Permissive button 1 Permissive button 2 Permissive operation Door contact switch 1 Functional test Door contact switch 2 Functional test Enable Automatic operation Functional test Emergency Stop Safety contactor combination SSK 1 Measuring voltage U Z 5 V Unit bus Supply Unit Read...

Page 223: ...PLC output Temperature ERR TEMP Position RPM Rotor position Motor temperature Readiness RDY Iact Iact Temperature ERR TEMP Readiness RDY Safety contactor combination EMERGENCY STOP Control ready Acknowledgement of control ready EMERGENCY STOP Limit switch Control voltage on Permissive button Detachable key switch Permissive button 2 Automatic operation Permissive operation Door contact 1 Door cont...

Page 224: ...December 2001 3 142 3 25 3 Basic Circuit Diagram for TNC 426 M TNC 430 M with Modular Energy Recovery HEIDENHAIN Inverter ...

Page 225: ...December 2001 3 143 3 25 4 Basic Circuit Diagram for TNC 426 M with HEIDENHAIN Compact Inverter UE 2xx with UV 102 ...

Page 226: ... UE 2xx B Power supply LE Inverter Axis Spindle enable Monitoring Braking resistor only UE 21x B Heat sink temperature Short circuit 3 x 400 V Power supply Temperature PLC output Position RPM Rotor position Standby Control is ready Machine control voltage on Permissive button 1 Permissive button 2 Permissive operation Door contact switch 1 Functional test Door contact switch 2 Functional test Auto...

Page 227: ...V UP 110 X79 X44 4 K2 K3 5 V 15 V 24 V Uz Power fail t ca 1s Monitoring Heat sink temperature Short circuit PLC output Position RPM Rotor position Control ready Machine control voltage on Permissive button 1 Permissive button 2 Permissive operation Door contact switch 1 Functional test Door contact switch 2 Functional test Automatic operation Holding brake Limit switch Detachable key switch Functi...

Page 228: ...December 2001 3 146 3 25 7 Basic Circuit Diagram TNC 426 M TNC 430 M with SIMODRIVE 611D in Single Row ...

Page 229: ... Speed Rotor position Motor temperature Standby Temperature warning Control ready for operation Machine control voltage on Permissive button 1 Enabling operation Door contact switch 1 Functional test Door contact switch 2 Functional test PMW enable Automatic operation Functional test Emergency Stop Safety contactor combination Measuring voltage U Z 5 V Unit bus Supply Unit Standby Monitoring heat ...

Page 230: ...December 2001 3 148 3 26 Cable Overviews 3 26 1 Cable Overview TNC 426 CB TNC 430 CA Basic Configuration ...

Page 231: ...December 2001 3 149 3 26 2 Cable Overview TNC 426 PB TNC 430 PA Basic Configuration ...

Page 232: ... 816 xx X69 250 479 07 16 KDR 1xx 51m LC 181 313 791 xx LC 481 332 790 xx LC LC 181 313 791 xx LC 481 332 790 xx LC KDR 120 344 505 01 KDR 140 333 068 01 KDR 150 355 253 01 312 875 xx VL Extension cable for separation points with connecting cable for extending existing connecting cable Rotary encoder for speed control Motor power cable see Motors data sheet Terminal box 251 249 01 Encoders for pos...

Page 233: ...x 332 115 xx VL 323 897 xx 332 115 xx max 1m 20 07 2001 9m 309 783 xx 60m 310 199 xx 298 429 xx 298 430 xx PW 210 51m LC 181 313 791 xx LC 481 332 790 xx LC LC 181 313 791 xx LC 481 332 790 xx LC VL Extension cable for separation points with connecting cable for extending existing connecting cable Rotary encoder for speed control Motor power cable see Motors data sheet Terminal box 251 249 01 Enco...

Page 234: ...December 2001 3 152 3 26 5 Cable Overview for TNC 426 M TNC 430 M with HEIDENHAIN Regenerative Compact Inverter UR 2xxB Basic Configuration ...

Page 235: ...1m UV 101 B 250 479 07 16 250 479 07 16 X69 X51 X59 61 20 07 2001 9m 309 783 xx 60m 310 199 xx 298 429 xx 298 430 xx 51m LC 181 313 791 xx LC 481 332 790 xx LC LC 181 313 791 xx LC 481 332 790 xx LC Protective PCB Interface card Interface card Two axis 313 437 03 One axis 324 955 03 VL Extension cable for separation points with connecting cable for extending existing connecting cable Motor power c...

Page 236: ...3 897 xx 332 115 xx max 1m 30m 289 440 xx VL 336 847 xx 324 952 01 9m 309 783 xx 60m 310 199 xx 298 429 xx 298 430 xx 20 07 2001 20m 51m LC 181 313 791 xx LC 481 332 790 xx LC LC 181 313 791 xx LC 481 332 790 xx LC VL Extension cable for separation points with connecting cable for extending existing connecting cable Motor power cable for Fa SIEMENS Terminal box 251 249 01 37 pin male connector 315...

Page 237: ...0 479 07 16 250 479 07 16 X69 X51 X59 61 20 07 2001 9m 309 783 xx 60m 310 199 xx 298 429 xx 298 430 xx 51m LC 181 313 791 xx LC 481 332 790 xx LC LC 181 313 791 xx LC 481 332 790 xx LC Protective PCB Interface card Interface card Two axis 313 437 03 One axis 324 955 03 VL Extension cable for separation points with connecting cable for extending existing connecting cable Motor power cable Terminal ...

Page 238: ...PA TS 632 331 397 xx 335 332 xx 50m TT 130 296 537 xx 50m TS 220 293 488 xx 336 157 xx APE 652 354 656 01 336 157 xx 336 157 xx 0 5 m 0 5 m 310 197 xx 50m 0 5 m 274 543 xx max 10 m TNC 410 M 1 x PL 405 B max 2 x PL 410 B TNC 426 M CB PB TNC 430 M CA PA 1 x PL 405 B max 4 x PL 410 B EA 652 346 323 xx EA 632 346 322 xx RS 232 C Adapter 310 085 01 VL Extension cable for separation points with connect...

Page 239: ... Velocity Feedforward Control 4 23 4 3 4 Operation with Following Error Servo Lag 4 24 4 3 5 Integrated Speed and Current Control 4 25 4 3 6 Spindle 4 31 4 3 7 Integral PLC 4 35 4 3 8 Configuration of the Data Interface 4 37 4 3 9 3 D touch probe 4 39 4 3 10 Digitizing with TS option 4 41 4 3 11 Digitizing with Measuring Touch Probe option 4 42 4 3 12 Tool measurement with TT 4 43 4 3 13 Tapping 4...

Page 240: ...4 2 HEIDENHAIN Technical Manual TNC 426 TNC 430 ...

Page 241: ...city Feedforward Control 1700 to 1999 Operation with Following Error Servo Lag 2000 to 2999 Integrated Speed and Current Control 3000 to 3999 Spindle 4000 to 4999 Integral PLC 5000 to 5999 Data Interface 6000 to 6199 3 D touch probe 6200 to 6299 Digitizing with triggering touch probe 6300 to 6399 Digitizing with measuring touch probe 6500 to 6599 Tool measurement with triggering touch probe 7100 t...

Page 242: ...machine parameters either by hand on the keyboard or download them through the data interface 4 2 1 Input Format You can enter the input values either in decimal binary or hexadecimal format 7 7 7 7 Enter a number for each machine parameter The value represents for example the acceleration in mm s2 or the analog voltage in V You can add a comment to your entry be preceding it with a semicolon Bina...

Page 243: ...entering the formula you must pay attention to the case of the letters whether they are small or capital Functions are written small variables are written in capitals Functions Variable Addition sin Sine Subtraction cos Cosine Multiplication tan Tangent Division asin Arc sine log Logarithm acos Arc cosine log10 Logarithm to the base of 10 atan Arc tangent exp Exponent sqrt Square root Expressions ...

Page 244: ...rs a default value is entered You can enter more than one machine parameter list in the TNC 7 7 7 7 Select the lists with the PGM MGT key and the SELECT soft key The last selected machine parameter list becomes active when you exit the machine parameter editor 4 2 3 Changing the Input Values A machine parameter list can be changed either with the machine parameter editor or directly through the PL...

Page 245: ...m being edited through the code number 95148 7 7 7 7 In the OEM SYS file define a new code number in the entry MPPASSWORD code number for editing the machine parameter list Then it is no longer possible to edit through the code number 95148 To protect individual machine parameters against editing 7 7 7 7 In the MPLOCKFILE entry in the OEM SYS file enter the path of a machine parameter subfile Then...

Page 246: ...ue becomes valid again after the machine parameter file is edited and exited For non indexed machine parameters zero must be transferred as the index Once the NC program has started the module operates only during the output of an M S T Q strobe Call only in a submit job Call PS B W D K MP number PS B W D K MP index PS B W D MP value CM 9031 PL B W D Error code 0 No error 1 MP does not exist is no...

Page 247: ...ine parameter file is read not any value modified in the run time memory by PLC Module 9031 For non indexed machine parameters zero must be transferred as the index Call only in a submit job Call PS B W D K MP number PS B W D K MP index CM 9032 PL B W D MP value Error code 1 MP number does not exist 2 No separator 3 MP value out of range 4 MP not found in file 5 No MP file found 6 Call was not in ...

Page 248: ... by the number of possible decimal places A value is read from the run time memory For non indexed machine parameters zero must be transferred as the index Call PS B W D K MP number PS B W D K MP index CM 9310 PL B W D MP value Error code 1 MP number does not exist 6 Call was not in a submit or spawn job 7 MP is of the string type 8 No system memory Error recognition Marker Value Meaning M4203 0 M...

Page 249: ...rs are not permitted If the PLC program is created externally ensure that lower case letters are not used for the file name Once the NC program has started the module operates only during the output of an M S T Q strobe Call only in a submit job Call PS B W D K String number 0 to 15 CM 9033 Note If a new file is selected program execution ends here PS B W D Error code 0 No error File was already s...

Page 250: ...path name and file extension Further characters even space characters are not permitted If the PLC program is created externally ensure that lower case letters are not used for the file name Once the NC program has started the module operates only during the output of an M S T Q strobe Call only in a submit job Call PS B W D K String number 0 to 3 CM 9034 PL B W D Error code 0 No error 1 String do...

Page 251: ...encoder signals MP20 2 Edge separation of encoder signals MP21 Monitoring functions for the spindle Format xx Input Bit 0 Spindle 1 0 Monitoring not active 1 Monitoring active Bit 1 Spindle 2 0 Monitoring not active 1 Monitoring active PLC RUN 6 11 MP21 0 No function MP21 1 Amplitude of encoder signals MP21 2 Edge separation of encoder signals MP100 Designation of axes Format XYZABCUVWxyzabcuvw In...

Page 252: ... Speed encoder inputs X15 to X20 60 Speed encoder input X60 only LE with integral spindle DSP 62 to 64 Speed encoder inputs X62 to X64 280 474 03 RESET 6 18 6 183 MP113 0 Speed encoder for the first spindle MP113 1 Speed encoder for the second spindle MP115 0 Position encoder input 1 VPP or 11 µAPP Format xxxxxxxxxx Input Bit 0 to bit 5 Position encoder inputs X1 to X6 Bit 6 to bit 9 Position enco...

Page 253: ...lled axis A1 to A6 or 1 to 6 Analog outputs 1 to 6 at terminal X8 A7 to A13 or 7 to 13 Analog outputs 7 to 13 at terminal X9 S1 Digital spindles RESET MP121 0 Nominal speed command output of the first spindle Input 0 No servo controlled axis 1 to 6 Analog output 1 to 6 at terminal X8 7 to 13 Analog output 7 to 13 at terminal X9 51 to 59 61 Digital outputs X51 to X59 X61 280 474 01 RESET MP121 1 No...

Page 254: ...irth coupling 1 Hirth coupling PLC 6 398 MP430 0 8 Prescribed increment for Hirth coupling Input 0 0000 to 30 0000 PLC 6 398 MP710 1 8 Backlash compensation for axes 1 to 9 Input 1 0000 to 1 0000 mm or PLC 6 36 MP711 0 8 Height of the spikes during circular movement only analog for axes 1 to 9 Input 1 0000 000 to 1 0000 999 mm digital 0 PLC RUN 6 47 MP712 0 8 Compensation value per control loop cy...

Page 255: ...it switches for tilting axes with modulo display M94 and encoders with EnDat interface Input xxxxxxxxx 0 Software limit switch not active 1 Software limit switch active 280 476 07 RESET 6 232 MP850 0 8 Synchronized axes Input 0 Master axis 1 Slave axis to axis 1 2 Slave axis to axis 2 3 Slave axis to axis 3 4 Slave axis to axis 4 5 Slave axis to axis 5 6 Slave axis to axis 6 7 Slave axis to axis 7...

Page 256: ...LC 6 25 MP921 0 8 Negative software limit switches traverse range 2 Input 99 999 9999 to 99 999 mm or PLC 6 25 MP922 0 8 Negative software limit switches traverse range 3 Input 99 999 9999 to 99 999 mm or PLC 6 25 MP950 0 8 Datum for positioning blocks with M92 for axes 1 to 9 Input 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 mm or Values with respect to the machine datum PLC RUN 6 224 MP951 0 8 Simulating tool ch...

Page 257: ...0 Positive 1 Negative 6 10 MP1050 0 8 Analog axes Analog voltage for rapid traverse in axes 1 to 9 Input 1 000 to 9 000 V Digital axes without function Input 1 PLC 6 128 MP1060 0 8 Acceleration for axes 1 to 9 Input 0 001 to 30 000 m s or 1000 s PLC 6 118 MP1070 Radial acceleration Input 0 001 to 30 000 m s or 1000 s PLC RUN 6 152 MP1080 0 8 Analog axes Integral factor for offset adjustment for ax...

Page 258: ...s Over Reference Point operating modes MP1096 Tolerance for contour transitions Input 0 No nominal position value filter 0 001 to 3 000 mm PLC RUN 6 118 6 153 MP1097 0 8 Max permissible axis specific jerk single HSC filter Input 0 1 to 1000 0 m s or 1000 s PLC RUN 6 118 MP1098 0 8 Max permissible axis specific jerk double HSC filter Input 0 1 to 1000 0 m s or 1000 s PLC RUN 6 118 MP1099 Minimum fi...

Page 259: ...ective after expiration of the time from MP1150 1 Input 0 to 65 535 s MP1152 Interrogation of I3 Control is ready signal acknowledgement Input 0 I3 is passed on directly to the NC 1 I3 is processed by the PLC before being passed on to the NC 280 476 21 6 173 MP1220 Analog axes automatic cyclic offset adjustment Input 0 to 65 536 s 0 No automatic adjustment from 280 474 07 no longer PLC RUN 6 151 M...

Page 260: ...ROGRAM RUN FULL SEQUENCE operating modes Input 0 Operation with velocity feedforward control 1 Operation with following error lag from 280 474 07 no longer PLC 6 121 MP1391 Velocity feedforward control in the MANUAL and HANDWHEEL operating modes Format xxxxxxxxx Input Bits 0 to 8 correspond to axes 1 to 9 0 Operation with following error lag 1 Operation with velocity feedforward control PLC RUN 6 ...

Page 261: ...o 1000 000 m min mm PLC RUN 6 125 MP1511 0 8 Factor for static friction compensation for axes 1 to 9 Input 0 to 16 777 215 s PLC RUN 6 49 MP1512 0 8 Limit to the amount of static friction compensation for axes 1 to 9 Input 0 to 16 777 215 counting steps PLC RUN 6 49 MP1513 0 8 Feed rate limitation for static friction compensation for axes 1 to 9 Input 0 to 300 000 mm min PLC RUN 6 49 MP1515 0 8 kv...

Page 262: ...g for operation with following error EMERGENCY STOP for axes 1 to 9 Input 0 0000 to 300 0000 mm Recommended 1 4 following error PLC 6 159 MP1810 0 8 kv factor for operation with following error for axes 1 to 9 Input 0 100 to 20 000 m min mm PLC 6 123 MP1815 0 8 kv factor for operation with following error effective after M105 for axes 1 to 9 Input 0 100 to 20 000 m min mm PLC 6 123 MP1820 0 8 Mult...

Page 263: ...elected power stage is entered by the TNC 6 465 MP2170 Waiting time between the switch on of the drive and the drive s standby signal Input 0 001 to 4 999 s 0 2 s 280 476 09 6 144 MP2180 0 8 PWM frequency of the axes Input 3000 to 7000 Hz 0 5000 Hz for HEIDENHAIN inverters 280 472 07 6 467 MP2181 PWM frequency of the spindle Input 3000 to 7000 Hz 0 5000 Hz for HEIDENHAIN inverters 280 476 19 6 467...

Page 264: ... 000 rated current of motor 0 I2 t monitoring of spindle motors turned off 1 Rated current of motor as reference value 6 167 MP2312 0 8 Reference value for utilization of feed motors for axes 1 to 9 Input 0 to 1000 000 rated current of motor 0 or 1 Reference value is rated current of motor 6 170 MP2313 Reference value for utilization display of the spindle motor Input 0 to 1000 000 rated current o...

Page 265: ...3000 000 kW 0 Braking power is not limited 280 476 09 6 200 MP2395 0 Wye connection MP2395 1 Delta connection MP2397 Maximum torque of the spindle motor Input 0 No torque limiting 0 1 to 3000 000 Nm 280 476 13 PLC 6 192 MP2397 0 Wye connection MP2397 1 Delta connection MP2400 0 8 Gain for current controller at standstill for axes 1 to 9 Input 0 00 to 9 999 00 V A 0 Controller disable 6 148 MP2401 ...

Page 266: ...a connection Input 0 to 100 000 000 A PLC 6 212 MP2512 0 8 Limiting the integral action component of the speed controller for axes 1 to 9 Input 0 000 to 30 000 s realistically 0 1 to 2 0 PLC 6 49 6 139 MP2520 0 8 Differential factor of the speed controller for axes 1 to 8 Input 0 to 1 0000 As PLC 6 136 MP2521 0 1 Differential factor of the spindle speed controller for wye and delta connection Inpu...

Page 267: ... inactive 280 476 03 PLC RUN 6 149 6 198 MP2591 Braking ramp for the first spindle in an emergency stop Input 0 1 to 999 9 rpm ms 0 Function inactive 280 476 03 PLC RUN 6 198 MP2600 0 8 Acceleration feedforward for axes 1 to 9 Input 0 to 30 000 A rev s PLC 6 139 MP2602 0 8 IPC time constant T1 for axes 1 to 9 Input 0 0001 to 1 0000 s 0 IPC inactive 280 476 05 PLC RUN 6 141 MP2604 0 8 IPC time cons...

Page 268: ...thout function Digital axes 0 to 99 999 999 mm 0 No monitoring PLC 6 161 MP2900 0 8 Tensioning torque between master and slave for master slave torque control entry for the slave axis Input 100 00 to 100 00 Nm 280 474 04 PLC 6 97 MP2910 0 8 P factor of the torque controller for master slave torque control entry for the slave axis Input 0 00 to 999 99 1 Nm min 280 474 04 PLC 6 97 MP2920 0 8 Factor ...

Page 269: ...spindle stop PLC RESET 6 180 MP3011 Function of analog output S if MP3010 3 Input 0 No special function 1 Voltage is proportional to the current contouring feed rate depending on MP3012 2 Voltage is defined as through Module 9130 3 Voltage is defined through M functions M200 to M204 RESET 6 452 MP3012 Feed rate from output of an analog voltage of 10 V MP3011 1 Input 0 to 300 000 mm min 6 452 MP301...

Page 270: ...3 1 Negative counting direction with M03 PLC RUN 6 186 MP3142 Line count of the spindle position encoder Input 100 to 9 999 lines PLC RUN 6 181 MP3143 Mounting configuration of the spindle position encoder Input 0 Position encoder directly on the first spindle 1 Position encoder via transmission transmission in MP3450 x and MP3451 x X30 pin 1 reference pulse 2 Position encoder via transmission tra...

Page 271: ...o 8 Input Analog axes 0 to 1 999 V ms Digital axes 0 to 1 999 1000 rpm ms PLC RUN 6 185 MP3412 Multiplication factor for MP3411 x Input 0 000 to 1 999 PLC RUN 6 186 6 202 6 207 6 211 MP3412 0 With M05 MP3412 1 With oriented spindle stop MP3412 2 With tapping with floating tap holder MP3412 3 With rigid tapping MP3415 Overshoot behavior of the spindle with M03 M04 and M05 Input 0 to 1000 ms PLC RUN...

Page 272: ...7 Number of spindle revolutions for gear ranges 1 to 8 Input 0 to 65 535 0 No transmission PLC RUN 6 181 MP3510 0 7 Rated speed for the gear ranges 1 to 8 Input 0 to 99 999 999 rpm PLC 6 187 MP3515 0 7 Maximum spindle speed for gear ranges 1 to 8 Input 0 to 99 999 999 rpm PLC 6 191 MP3520 0 Speed activation through marker M4011 Input 0 to 99 999 999 rpm PLC RUN 6 205 MP3520 1 Spindle speed for ori...

Page 273: ...0 inputs 0 Values with a change rate of 1 K s are accepted 1 Accept results immediately Bit 8 Behavior after an ext emergency stop 0 Approach position is not automatically activated 1 Approach position is automatically activated Bit 9 Behavior of a simulated key 0 Simulated key is transferred immediately to the NC 1 Simulated key before being transferred to the NC is first processed by an active P...

Page 274: ... use I32 enter the following values up to 280 474 11 MP4130 0 159 as of 280 474 12 MP4130 0 32 as of 280 476 01 MP4130 0 32 7 21 MP4131 0 Activation criterion for fast PLC input for switching off the monitoring functions 6 157 MP4131 1 Reserved MP4131 2 5 Condition for activating fast PLC inputs Input 0 Activation at low level 1 Activation at high level 7 21 MP4210 0 47 Setting a number in the PLC...

Page 275: ...not active 1 Active Bit 3 0 Transmission stop by DC3 not active 1 Active Bit 4 0 Character parity even 1 Odd Bit 5 0 Character parity not desired 1 Desired Bit 6 0 Bit 7 0 Length of the stop 1 5 bits Bit 6 1 Bit 7 0 Length of the stop 2 bits Bit 6 0 Bit 7 1 Length of the stop 1 bits Bit 6 1 Bit 7 1 Length of the stop 1 bits PLC CN123 RUN 8 18 MP5020 0 Operating mode EXT1 MP5020 1 Operating mode EX...

Page 276: ...fer rate in operating mode EXT3 data transfer through PLC Input 0 110 bps 1 150 bps 2 300 bps 3 600 bps 4 1200 bps 5 2400 bps 6 4800 bps 7 9600 bps 8 19200 bps 9 38400 bps 10 57600 bps 11 115 200 bps PLC RUN 8 30 MP Function and input Software versionand behavior Page ...

Page 277: ...tion directly by NC 0 Function inactive 1 to 999 Number of the M function for spindle orientation by the PLC PLC CN123 RUN 6 352 MP6161 M function for orienting the touch probe before every measuring process Input 1 Spindle orientation directly by the NC 0 Function inactive 1 to 999 Number of the M function 280 474 08 PLC CN123 RUN 6 350 MP6162 Orientation angle Input 0 to 359 9999 280 474 08 PLC ...

Page 278: ...uge center for Probing Cycle 2 with respect to the machine datum traverse range 2 Input 0 to 99 999 9999 mm 280 472 05 PLC CN123 6 352 MP6181 0 X coordinate MP6181 1 Y coordinate MP6181 2 Z coordinate MP6182 Coordinates of the ring gauge center for Probing Cycle 2 with respect to the machine datum traverse range 3 Input 0 to 99 999 9999 mm 280 472 05 PLC CN123 6 353 MP6182 0 X coordinate MP6182 1 ...

Page 279: ...distance for lubrication of the touch probe axis at line end Input 0 to 999 999 mm PLC CN123 RUN 6 363 MP6221 Time after which the probe axis must be lubricated Input 0 to 65 535 mm PLC CN123 RUN 6 363 MP6230 Feed rate in normal direction Input 0 to 1 000 mm min PLC CN123 RUN 6 361 MP6240 Maximum deflection of the stylus Input 0 to 10 000 mm PLC CN123 RUN 6 361 MP6260 Output of M90 in NC blocks wi...

Page 280: ...ut 0 Touch probe axis X 1 Touch probe axis Y 2 Touch probe axis Z CN123 6 369 MP6330 Maximum deflection of the stylus measuring touch probe Input 0 1 to 4 000 mm CN123 6 369 MP6350 Feed rate for positioning to the MIN point and approaching the contour measuring touch probe Input 1 to 3000 mm min CN123 6 369 MP6360 Probing feed rate measuring touch probe Input 1 to 3000 mm min CN123 6 349 6 369 MP6...

Page 281: ...or radius TT R OFFS is entered Bit 3 0 Tool measurement with spindle orientation 1 Tool measurement without spindle orientation individual tooth measurement not possible tool radius measurement possibly faulty Bit 4 0 Automatically determine speed 1 Always use minimum spindle speed Bit 5 NC stop during tool checking 0 The NC program when exceeding the breaking tolerance is not stopped 1 When excee...

Page 282: ...e principle axes 1 Pre positioning to starting point in the tool axis and in the axis of the probing direction MP6505 bit 9 0 Bit 11 Tool checking and changing in the tool routine 0 After tool checking the tool table is changed 1 After tool checking the tool table is not changed Bit 12 PLC datum shift 0 Do not include 1 Include Bit 13 0 Tool is measured in the tilt position in which the tool touch...

Page 283: ...ant probing feed rate PLC CN123 6 375 MP6510 Permissible measuring error for tool measurement with rotating tool Input 0 002 to 0 999 mm PLC CN123 6 375 MP6510 0 First measurement error MP6510 1 Second measurement error MP6520 Probing feed rate for tool measurement with non rotating tool Input 1 to 3000 mm min PLC CN123 RUN 6 376 MP6530 Distance from the tool end to the top of the probe contact du...

Page 284: ...1 Safety clearance in the plane perpendicular to the tool axis 280 474 03 MP6550 Rapid traverse in probing cycle for TT 130 Input 10 to 20 000 mm min 6 372 MP6560 M function for spindle orientation during individual tooth measurement Input 1 Spindle orientation directly by NC 0 Function inactive 1 to 999 Number of the M function for spindle orientation by the PLC PLC CN123 RUN 6 371 MP Function an...

Page 285: ...99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 mm PLC CN123 6 373 MP6582 0 2 Coordinates of the TT 130 probe contact center with respect to the machine datum traverse range 3 Input 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 mm PLC CN123 6 373 MP6585 Monitoring the position of the rotary and additional linear axes during the tool measurement cycles Format xxxxxx Input 0 Axis is not monitored 1 Axis is monitored Bit 0 A axis Bit 1 B a...

Page 286: ... 6 207 MP7130 Run in behavior of the spindle during rigid tapping Input 0 001 to 10 min PLC 6 211 MP7150 Positioning window of the tool axis during rigid tapping Input 0 0001 to 2 mm PLC 6 211 MP7160 Spindle response during Cycle 17 and 18 Format xxxx Input Bit 0 Oriented spindle stop with Cycle 17 0 Before execution of Cycle 17 spindle orientation 1 Before execution of Cycle 17 no spindle orienta...

Page 287: ...number increment for ISO programs Input 0 to 250 PLC CN123 RUN 6 301 MP7224 0 Disabling soft keys for file types Format xxxxxxxx Input 0 Do not disable 1 Disable Bit 0 HEIDENHAIN programs H Bit 1 ISO programs I Bit 2 Tool tables T Bit 3 Datum tables D Bit 4 Pallet tables P Bit 5 Text files A Bit 6 HELP files HLP Bit 7 Point tables PNT PLC CN123 RUN 6 300 MP7224 1 Protecting file types Format xxxxx...

Page 288: ...age Input 0 English 1 German 2 Czech 3 French 4 Italian 5 Spanish 6 Portuguese 7 Swedish 8 Danish 9 Finnish 10 Dutch 11 Polish 12 Hungarian 13 Reserved 14 Russian PLC CN123 RUN 6 326 MP7230 0 NC conversational language MP7230 1 PLC conversational language user parameters soft keys for OEM cycles MP7230 2 Write PLC error messages MP7230 3 Help files MP7235 Time difference to Universal Time Greenwic...

Page 289: ...e file OEM SYS PLC RUN 6 329 MP7245 Disabling auxiliary cycles Input 0 Auxiliary cycles disabled 1 Auxiliary cycles permitted 280 474 09 PLC RUN 6 287 MP7246 Disabling paraxial positioning blocks Input 0 Paraxial positioning block enabled 1 Paraxial positioning block disabled PLC RUN 6 327 MP7260 Number of tools in the tool table Input 0 to 30 000 CN123 6 402 MP7261 0 3 Number of pockets in the to...

Page 290: ...ay of the feed rate also before pressing an axis direction key smallest value from MP1020 for all axes PLC CN123 RUN 6 237 MP7280 Decimal character Input 0 Decimal comma 1 Decimal point PLC CN123 RUN 6 326 MP7281 Depiction of the NC program Input 0 All blocks completely 1 Current block all at once others line by line 2 All blocks line by line block when editing all at once 280 476 03 PLC RUN 6 245...

Page 291: ...s keys Input 0 Datum can be set by axis keys and by soft keys 1 Datum can be set only by soft key PLC CN123 RUN 6 224 MP7300 Erasing the status display and Q parameters Input 0 Status display Q parameters and tool data are deleted when the program is selected 1 Status display Q parameters and tool data are deleted with M02 M30 END PGM or when a program is selected 2 Erase the status display and to...

Page 292: ...aphic simulation without TOOL CALL Input 0 0000 to 99 999 9999 mm PLC CN123 RUN 6 454 MP7316 Penetration depth of the tool Input 0 0000 to 99 999 9999 mm PLC CN123 RUN 6 454 MP7317 M function for graphic simulation PLC CN123 RUN 6 454 MP7317 0 Beginning of graphic simulation Input 0 to 88 MP7317 1 Interruption of the graphic simulation Input 0 to 88 MP7330 0 15 Specifying the user parameters 1 to ...

Page 293: ...xt MP7354 2 Active block MP7354 3 Background of inactive window MP7355 Programming program text display PLC RUN 6 225 MP7355 0 Background MP7355 1 General program text MP7355 2 Active block MP7355 3 Background of inactive window MP7356 Status window and PLC window PLC RUN 6 226 MP7356 0 Background MP7356 1 Axis positions in the status display MP7356 2 Status display other than axis positions MP735...

Page 294: ...texts of the pocket calculator os in cos MP7363 Programming graphics PLC RUN 6 226 MP7363 0 Background MP7363 1 Resolved contour MP7363 2 Subprograms and frame for zooming MP7363 3 Alternative solutions MP7363 4 Unresolved contour MP7364 Color of the help illustrations for cycles PLC RUN 6 226 MP7364 0 6 Colors 1 to 7 of the graphic program used MP7364 7 Line color color 8 of the graphic program M...

Page 295: ...6 3 Title bar MP7366 4 Scroll bar field MP7366 5 Scroll bar MP7366 6 14 Reserved MP7367 Large PLC window PLC RUN 6 227 MP7367 0 Background MP7367 1 Color 1 MP7367 2 Color 2 MP7367 3 Color 3 MP7367 4 Color 4 MP7367 5 Color 5 MP7367 6 14 Colors 6 to 14 MP7392 Screen saver Input 1 to 99 min 0 No screen saver PLC CN123 RUN 6 227 MP Function and input Software versionand behavior Page ...

Page 296: ...nnel milling 0 Channel milling of the contours for pockets counterclockwise clockwise for islands 1 Channel milling of the contours for pockets clockwise counterclockwise for islands Bit 1 Sequence for rough out and channel milling 0 First channel milling then pocket rough out 1 First pocket rough out then channel milling Bit 2 Merging of listed contours 0 Contours are merged only if the tool cent...

Page 297: ...e tool axis with M103 0 Function is not in effect 1 Function is in effect Bit 5 Reserved Bit 6 Automatic activation of M134 0 M134 must be activated in the NC program 1 M134 is automatically activated when an NC program is selected PLC CN123 RUN 6 47 6 123 6 125 6 286 6 455 MP7441 Error message during cycle call Format xxx Input Bit 0 0 Error message Spindle is not suppressed 1 Error message Spind...

Page 298: ... Angle for constant contour speed at corners Input 0 0001 to 179 9999 PLC CN123 RUN 6 155 MP7470 Maximum contouring tool feed rate at 100 override Input 0 to 300 000 mm min 0 No limitation PLC CN123 RUN MP7471 Maximum velocity of the principle axes during compensating movements through M128 Input 0 to 300 000 mm min 280 472 05 PLC CN123 RUN 6 84 MP7475 Reference for datum table Input 0 Reference i...

Page 299: ...r changes 2 Output of the tool number with every TOOL DEF block 3 Output of the tool and pocket number only when tool number changes 4 Output of the tool and pocket number output with every TOOL DEF block MP7490 Functions for traverse ranges Format xxxx Input Bit 0 0 Display one traverse range via MOD 1 Display three traverse ranges via MOD Bit 1 0 Each traverse range has its own datum and 3 memor...

Page 300: ... axes of the head table Bit 2 0 With Cycle 19 the tilting axes are not positioned 1 With Cycle 19 the tilting axes are positioned Bit 3 0 The active tilting axis position with respect to the machine datum is included 1 The first axis assumes a 0 position Bit 4 0 The mechanical offset when changing the spindle head when calling M128 M114 or tilted working plane is compensated for 1 Mechanical offse...

Page 301: ...ing angles in the 3D ROT window b Manual tilting is inactive is derived from the reference coordinates Bit 8 0 The active tilting axis position depending on bits 3 5 and 7 is included 1 In case manual tilting is active the datum to be set for the principle axes X Y and Z is recalculated to the home position of the tilting element PLC 6 81 MP7502 Functionality of M144 M145 Input xxx Bit 0 0 M144 M1...

Page 302: ...put Bit 0 Tilting axis 0 Swivel head 1 Tilting table Bit 1 Type of dimension in MP7530 0 Incremental dimension for swivel head 1 Absolute relative to the machine datum for the tilting table PLC RUN 6 82 MP7520 0 14 Transformation 1 to transformation 15 MP7530 Type of dimension for transformation Input 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 0 Free tilting axis PLC RUN 6 82 MP7530 0 14 Transformation 1 to trans...

Page 303: ...t effective 1 Override effective Bit 1 Non functional Bit 2 Feed rate override if rapid traverse key and machine direction button in Manual operating mode are pressed 0 Override not effective 1 Override effective Bit 3 Feed rate override and spindle speed override in 1 steps or along a nonlinear curve 0 1 steps 1 Nonlinear characteristic curve Bit 4 Non functional Bit 5 Reserved Bit 6 Feed rate sm...

Page 304: ...Switch position 3 3rd handwheel axis V 1 Switch position 3 3rd handwheel axis Z Switch position 4 3rd handwheel axis IV Switch position 5 3rd handwheel axis V 2 Switch position 3 3rd handwheel axis Z Switch position 4 3rd handwheel axis IV Switch position 5 3rd handwheel axis V MP7645 1 Fixed assignment of third handwheel if MP7645 2 1 Input 4 Axis Z 8 Axis IV MP410 3 16 Axis V MP410 4 MP7645 2 As...

Page 305: ...RUN 6 381 MP7670 Interpolation factor for handwheel Input 0 to 10 PLC RUN 6 381 6 384 MP7670 0 Interpolation factor for low speed MP7670 1 Interpolation factor for medium speed only HR 410 MP7670 2 Interpolation factor for high speed only HR 410 MP7671 Handwheel feed rate in the Handwheel operating mode with HR 410 Input 0 to 1000 of MP1020 PLC RUN 6 384 MP7671 0 Low speed MP7671 1 Medium speed on...

Page 306: ... dwell time during the block scan 0 Include the dwell time 1 Do not include the dwell time Bit 5 Start of calculation for block scan 0 Start from block with cursor 1 Start from beginning of program Bit 6 Tool length in blocks with normal vectors 0 Without R2 from tool table south pole 1 With R2 from tool table center of sphere Bit 7 Inserting a defined rounding arc or spline 0 Defined rounding arc...

Page 307: ...and departed at the beginning and end of the slot a rounding arc with a diameter equal to the slot is inserted PLC RUN 6 153 6 155 6 293 6 295 6 344 6 416 MP7681 M S T Q transfer to the PLC during block scan Format xxxx Input Bit 0 0 During block scan transfer M functions to the PLC 1 Collect M functions and after the block scan to the PLC Bit 1 0 Transfer T code to the PLC during block scan 1 Tra...

Page 308: ...rating mode PROGRAM RUN SINGLE BLOCK 0 During the start a line of the NC program is run The pallet change macro is executed completely 1 During the start a complete NC program is run Bit 1 Operating mode PROGRAM RUN FULL SEQUENCE 0 During the start a complete NC program is run 1 At the start all NC programs are executed up to the next pallet Bit 2 PROGRAM RUN FULL SEQUENCE operating mode 0 As defi...

Page 309: ...TOSTART function of an NC program is performed by the PLC The NC does not trigger an NC start MP7690 MEMORY TEST during switch on Format xxx Input 1 No MEMORY TEST during switch on 0 MEMORY TEST during switch on Bit 0 Test the RAM Bit 1 Test the EPROM Bit 2 Test the hard disk 6 326 MP Function and input Software versionand behavior Page MP Function and input Software versionand behavior Page MP130...

Page 310: ...4 72 HEIDENHAIN Technical Manual TNC 426 TNC 430 ...

Page 311: ...December 2001 5 1 5 Modules Markers and Words 5 1 Overview of Modules 5 3 5 2 Overview of Markers and Words 5 10 ...

Page 312: ...5 2 HEIDENHAIN Technical Manual TNC 426 TNC 430 ...

Page 313: ...07 6 391 9009 Update certain outputs of a PLC input output unit 280 472 07 6 392 9010 9011 9012 Read in the word range 7 178 9019 Size of the processing stack 7 47 9020 9021 9022 Write in the word range 7 179 9031 Overwrite machine parameters 4 8 9032 Read machine parameters 4 9 7 37 9033 Select machine parameter file 4 11 9034 Load a machine parameter subfile 4 12 9035 Reading status information ...

Page 314: ...indow 6 251 9082 Showing a string in the small PLC window 6 252 9083 Showing a moving bar diagram in the small PLC window 6 254 9085 Display PLC error messages 6 289 9086 Erase PLC error messages 6 290 9087 Status of PLC error message 6 290 9088 Displaying the M functions 280 474 03 6 239 9089 Control in operation 6 240 9090 Selection of a line in the pallet table 6 306 6 309 9091 Finding the line...

Page 315: ...ed rate override for PLC axis 6 31 9125 Stop PLC axis at next Hirth grid position 6 32 9130 Output of an analog voltage 6 394 9133 Internal temperature of the LE 280 476 09 6 165 9135 Switch on 3 D touch probe 280 472 05 6 346 9145 Actual to nominal value transfer 280 472 07 6 132 9146 Saving and reestablishing actual position values 280 476 13 6 219 9147 Assigning the reference value to an axis 2...

Page 316: ...nabling individual NC keys 6 340 9183 Disabling groups of NC keys 6 340 9184 Re enabling groups of NC keys 6 341 9186 Call a soft key function 6 341 9187 Status of a soft key function call 6 342 9189 Shutting down the control 280 476 03 6 249 9190 Starting the operating times 6 329 9191 Stopping the operating times 6 329 9192 Reading the operating times 6 330 9193 Setting the operating times 6 330...

Page 317: ...r tables 6 318 9252 Positioning the cursor in the PLC editor 6 318 9255 Reading a field out of a table 6 312 9256 Writing to a field in a table 6 314 9260 Receiving and waiting for events 7 166 9261 Sending events 7 167 9262 Context change between spawn processes 7 168 9263 Interrupting a spawn process for a defined time 7 168 9270 Reading a code word 7 43 9271 Writing a code word 7 43 9275 Writin...

Page 318: ...rch for a free pocket in the tool magazine 280 476 07 6 412 9305 Tool exchange in the pocket table 280 476 06 6 411 9306 Exchange tools between tool magazines 280 476 07 6 413 9310 Read the machine parameter from the run time memory 280 476 06 4 10 9320 Status of the NC program end 280 476 06 6 246 Module Function SW Vers Page ...

Page 319: ...December 2001 Overview of Modules 5 9 ...

Page 320: ...Disable speed output for spindle PLC PLC 6 187 6 238 M 4009 Counterclockwise spindle rotation for gear change PLC PLC 6 189 M 4010 Clockwise spindle rotation for gear change PLC PLC 6 189 M 4011 Activate rotational speed MP3520 0 and direction of rotation from M4013 PLC PLC 6 205 M 4012 Opening the spindle control loop PLC PLC 6 203 6 352 M 4013 Direction for spindle orientation from a standstill ...

Page 321: ...ear tolerance not exceeded 1 Wear tolerance exceeded NC NC PLC 6 378 M 4063 0 Breakage tolerance not exceeded 1 Breakage tolerance exceeded NC NC PLC 6 378 M 4065 Workpiece dimensions are OK NC PLC 280 474 03 6 353 M 4066 Workpiece must be reworked NC PLC 280 474 03 6 353 M 4067 Workpiece is scrap NC PLC 280 474 03 6 353 M 4070 Strobe signal for gear code NC NC 6 189 M 4071 Strobe signal for S cod...

Page 322: ...ating mode Program run full sequence NC NC M 4155 Operating mode Traversing the reference marks NC NC M 4156 MANUAL TRAVERSE soft key pressed NC NC 6 295 M 4157 Returning to the contour APPROACH POSITION is active NC NC 6 295 M 4158 Block scan active NC NC 6 295 M 4159 PLC editor END key or soft key pressed NC NC PLC 6 317 M 4160 Pallet table selected NC NC 6 306 M 4161 M S T Q transfer after bloc...

Page 323: ...e NC NC 280 474 15 6 278 M 4222 Error from PET table with EM STOP active NC NC 280 474 15 6 278 M 4230 NC start via LSV2 NC NC 280 476 05 6 344 M 4231 NC stop via LSV2 NC NC 280 476 05 6 344 M 4300 to 4315 Value from MP4310 0 NC NC 7 36 M 4316 to 4331 Value from MP4310 1 NC NC 7 36 M 4332 to 4347 Value from MP4310 2 NC NC 7 36 M 4348 to 4363 Value from MP4310 3 NC NC 7 36 M 4364 to 4379 Value from...

Page 324: ...4 M 4561 Rapid traverse PLC PLC 6 344 M 4562 Memory function for axis direction keys MP7680 Bit 0 1 PLC PLC 6 344 M 4563 Feed rate enable for all axes PLC PLC 6 131 M 4564 NC start PLC PLC 6 344 M 4570 Unit of measure for transfer with FN19 NC NC 7 22 M 4571 Activation of decoded M code transfer in M1900 to M1999 PLC PLC 6 283 M 4572 Enabling the incremental jog positioning PLC PLC 6 395 M 4574 Se...

Page 325: ...0 Status fast PLC input from MP4130 2 NC PLC 7 21 M 4591 Status fast PLC input from MP4130 3 NC PLC 7 21 M 4592 Status fast PLC input from MP4130 4 NC PLC 7 21 M 4593 Status fast PLC input from MP4130 5 NC PLC 7 21 Marker Description Set Reset SW Vers Page ...

Page 326: ...sed NC NC 6 273 W 320 Nominal speed value rpm NC NC 6 184 W 322 Actual speed value rpm NC NC 6 184 D 356 Programmed speed 0 001 rpm NC NC 6 184 6 189 D 360 Programmed feed rate NC NC 6 128 D 364 Nominal speed value rpm NC NC 280 472 05 6 184 D 368 Actual speed value rpm NC NC 280 472 05 6 184 D 388 Current tool feed rate mm min NC NC 6 128 W 480 484 Analog input at X48 0 1 V NC NC 6 393 W 486 490 ...

Page 327: ...Percentage for spindle override PLC to NC NC PLC NC PLC 6 191 W 766 Percentage for feed rate override PLC to NC NC PLC NC PLC 6 237 D 768 956 Values from MP4210 0 to MP4210 47 NC NC 7 35 W 960 968 Value from MP4220 0 to MP4310 4 NC NC 7 36 W 976 988 Value from MP4310 3 to MP4310 6 NC NC 7 36 W 1008 S code for minimum speed NC NC 6 194 W 1018 Number of files opened by the PLC NC NC 280 476 03 6 301...

Page 328: ...g positioning in positive direction PLC PLC 6 395 W 1052 Incremental jog positioning in negative direction PLC PLC 6 395 W 1054 Reference end position PLC PLC 6 102 W 1056 Lubrication pulse Value in MP4060 exceeded NC NC 6 26 W 1058 Resetting the accumulated distance PLC PLC 6 26 W 1060 Axis specific feed rate enable PLC PLC 6 131 W 1062 Lock the handwheel for specific axes PLC PLC 280 474 07 6 38...

Page 329: ...December 2001 Overview of Markers and Words 5 19 ...

Page 330: ...5 20 HEIDENHAIN Technical Manual TNC 426 TNC 430 ...

Page 331: ...ure Compensation with Tilting Axes 6 74 6 5 4 Changing the Milling Heads 6 76 6 5 5 Tilt Working Plane Feature 6 77 6 5 6 Automatic Compensation of Offset for Tilting Axes 6 83 6 5 7 Cylindrical Surface 6 85 6 6 Synchronized Axes 6 87 6 6 1 Gantry Axes 6 87 6 6 2 Master Slave Torque Control 6 91 6 7 Reference Marks 6 98 6 7 1 Definition 6 98 6 7 2 Traversing the Reference Marks 6 98 6 8 The Contro...

Page 332: ...6 12 6 Braking the Spindle for an Emergency Stop 6 197 6 12 7 Oriented Spindle Stop 6 201 6 12 8 Tapping with Floating Tap Holder and Nominal Speed Output 6 206 6 12 9 Tapping with Floating Tap Holder and Coded Spindle Speed Output 6 208 6 12 10 Rigid Tapping 6 209 6 12 11 Speed Controller Only TNC 426 PB M TNC 430 PA M 6 212 6 12 12 Current Controller Only TNC 426 PB M TNC 430 PA M 6 213 6 12 13 ...

Page 333: ...NC program 6 357 6 15 4 Digitizing with the Touch Trigger Probe 6 360 6 15 5 Digitizing with the Measuring Trigger Probe 6 367 6 15 6 Tool Measurement 6 370 6 16 Electronic Handwheel 6 380 6 16 1 HR 130 Panel Mounted Handwheel 6 383 6 16 2 HR 410 Portable Handwheel 6 383 6 16 3 HR 150 Panel Mounted Handwheels with HRA 110 Handwheel Adapter 6 385 6 17 PLC Inputs Outputs 6 387 6 17 1 24 Vdc Switchin...

Page 334: ...ommissioning 6 462 6 24 1 Preparation 6 462 6 24 2 Digital Axes 6 462 6 24 3 Analog Axes 6 502 6 24 4 Digital Spindle for TNC 426 without Spindle DSP 6 506 6 24 5 Digital Spindle for TNC 430 TNC 426 with Spindle DSP 6 512 6 24 6 Analog Spindles 6 517 6 25 Block Diagram TNC 426 TNC 430 6 519 ...

Page 335: ... letters n PLC axes are designated with lowercase letters n Axes that are not present are given a hyphen MP100 Designation of axes Format XYZABCUVWxyzabcuvw Input Characters 1 to 9 correspond to axes 1 to 9 MP100 0 Designation of axes for traverse range 1 MP100 1 Designation of axes for traverse range 2 MP100 2 Designation of axes for traverse range 3 MP7291 Display of axes on the screen Format SX...

Page 336: ...otion If the machine moves its workpiece holding element table in a particular axis instead of the tool then the direction of actual motion is opposite to the direction of axis motion In this case the direction of motion is designated with the same algebraic sign as the axis direction but with an apostrophe X Y and Z Rotary axes A B C The directions of the rotary axes A B and C follow the right fi...

Page 337: ...December 2001 Machine Axes 6 7 Secondary linear axes The secondary linear axes U V and W are parallel to the principal axes X Y and Z Y X U V W Z ...

Page 338: ... periods for the length given in MP331 x From these data the TNC calculates the quotient Signal period HEIDENHAIN offers linear encoders with distance coded reference marks The nominal increment between two fixed reference marks depends on the encoder being used 7 7 7 7 In MP334 x enter for each axis the nominal increments between two fixed reference marks If the number of grating periods between ...

Page 339: ...lation factor for external interpolation As of software version 280 476 01 Input 0 to 99 0 1 No external interpolation Encoder signals Position encoders with 1 VPP or 11 µAPP signals can be connected with the LE 426 M and LE 430 M With MP115 0 you select the signal at position encoder inputs 1 to 10 and with MP115 2 you select the maximum input frequency at the position encoder inputs 1 to 10 The ...

Page 340: ...parameters provoke the error message standstill monitoring in axis MP210 Counting direction of position encoder output signals Format xxxxxxxxx Input Bits 0 to 8 correspond to axes 1 to 9 0 Positive 1 Negative MP1040 Analog axes Polarity of nominal value voltage Digital axes Algebraic sign of the nominal speed value Format xxxxxxxxx Input Bits 0 to 8 correspond to axes 1 to 9 0 Positive 1 Negative...

Page 341: ...0 2 Edge separation of encoder signals MP21 Monitoring functions for the spindle Format xx Input Bit 0 Spindle 1 0 Monitoring not active 1 Monitoring active Bit 1 Spindle 2 0 Monitoring not active 1 Monitoring active MP21 Has no function Input 0 MP21 1 Amplitude of encoder signals MP21 2 Edge separation of encoder signals Criterion Error message Absolute position with distance coded reference mark...

Page 342: ...imal notation The error codes may also appear combined in which case they add themselves together There are two possible types of errors n The encoder reports an error n Access to the encoder via the EnDat interface is faulty Codes of errors reported by the encoder Error code to 280 476 12 Meaning 00001 Light source defective 00010 Signal amplitude too small 00100 Incorrect position value Error co...

Page 343: ...f an encoder with EnDat interface is entered in the motor table the control attempts to communicate with the encoder If this fails the error message C3F0 EnDat not found axis appears Error code Meaning 0x80010000 Delete the alarm bit 0x80020000 Read the alarm status 0x80040000 Read the number of pulses 0x80080000 Read the number of signal periods 0x80100000 Read the number of differentiable revolu...

Page 344: ...trol attempts to communicate with an encoder with EnDat interface The control then assumes that it is dealing with an encoder with a Z1 track and tries to read the track If this is not possible for example because it is actually an encoder with EnDat interface the error message C3F0 DSP error in axis axis appears ...

Page 345: ...ation MP100 x Position MP110 x X1 to X6 Speed MP112 x X15 to X20 Nominal value MP120 x X51 to X56a LE 426 PB M 30 000 rpm Designation MP100 x Position MP110 x X1 to X6 Speed MP112 x X15 to X19 Nominal value MP120 x X51 to X55a LE 430 PA Designation MP100 x Position MP110 x X1 to X6 and X35 to X38 Speed MP112 x X15 to X20 Nominal value MP120 x X51 to X56a LE 430 M 6 axes Designation MP100 x Positio...

Page 346: ...ftware version 280 474 01 Input 0 No servo controlled axis 1 to 6 Analog outputs 1 to 6 at terminal X8 7 to 13 Analog outputs 7 to 13 at terminal X9 51 to 59 Digital outputs X51 to X59 MP120 0 8 Assignment of speed encoder outputs to the axes As of software version 280 470 01 Input 0 No servo controlled axis A1 to A6 Analog outputs 1 to 6 at terminal X8 A7 to A13 Analog outputs 7 to 13 at terminal...

Page 347: ...l X51 to X56 Analog 1 to 13 Analog 1 to 13 Analog 1 to 13 First spindle Second spindle Speed Nominal value Speed Nominal value X60 Digital X61 X15 to X19 Digital X51 to X56 X60 Digital X61 Analog 1 to 13 Analog 1 to 13 Analog 1 to 13 First spindle Second spindle Speed Nominal value Speed Nominal value X60 Digital X61 X15 to X20 Digital X51 to X56 X60 Digital X61 Analog 1 to 13 Analog 1 to 13 Analo...

Page 348: ...to X64 MP121 Nominal speed command output of the spindle s As of software version 280 474 01 MP121 0 Nominal speed command output of the first spindle Input 0 No servo controlled spindle 1 to 6 Analog outputs 1 to 6 at terminal X8 7 to 13 Analog outputs 7 to 13 at terminal X9 51 to 59 61 Digital output X51 to X59 X61 MP121 1 Nominal speed command output of the second spindle Input 0 No servo contr...

Page 349: ...December 2001 Machine Axes 6 19 ...

Page 350: ...axes 1 PS B W D K Status information See table above CM 9038 PL B W D Information Error recognition Status information Meaning 0 0 Axis spindle not active MP10 or MP3010 or no encoder 1 Axis spindle active 1 Depending on the current traverse range 0 NC axis or not active 1 PLC axis 2 0 No servo controlled axis spindle only display or not active 1 Servo controlled axis spindle 3 Maximum temperature...

Page 351: ...gramming with G17 to G20 In the PLC you can interrogate the current tool axis via marker Set Reset M4526 Axis 1 is tool axis NC NC M4527 Axis 2 is tool axis NC NC M4528 Axis 3 is tool axis NC NC M4529 Axis 4 is tool axis NC NC M4530 Axis 5 is tool axis NC NC M4531 Axis 6 is tool axis NC NC M4532 Axis 7 is tool axis NC NC M4533 Axis 8 is tool axis NC NC M4534 Axis 9 is tool axis NC NC ...

Page 352: ...0 Determining range of traverse 7 7 7 7 You can determine the current range of traverse with Module 9035 Module 9035 Reading status information Call PS B W D K 27 CM 9035 PL B W D Range of traverse 0 to 2 Traverse ranges 1 to 3 Error recognition Selecting the traverse range You can switch the range of traverse in two ways 7 7 7 7 Select the traverse range with Module 9151 or 9152 With Module 9152 ...

Page 353: ... K S String with axis designation Format XYZABCUVWxyzabcuvw Characters 1 to 9 correspond to axes 1 to 9 With 1 the axis designations from M100 x are valid PS B W D K Traverse range 0 to 2 Range of traverse 1 Do not change range of traverse CM 9151 Error recognition Set Reset M4574 Select the traverse range with M4575 PLC PLC M4575 Select the traverse range with M4574 PLC PLC M4135 Strobe marker fo...

Page 354: ...ts the V key With 1 the key configuration from MP410 is valid PS B W D K S String with axis display Format SWVUCBAZYXwvucbazyx Characters 1 to 9 from the right represent lines 1 to 9 Character 10 S always in line 10 With 1 the axis display from MP7291 is valid PS B W D K S String with axis designation Format XYZABCUVWxyzabcuvw Characters 1 to 9 correspond to axes 1 to 9 With 1 the axis designation...

Page 355: ...tting after power on Input 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 mm or MP921 0 8 Negative software limit switches traverse range 2 Input 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 mm or MP922 0 8 Negative software limit switches traverse range 3 Input 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 mm or MP7490 Functions for traverse ranges Format xxxx Input Bit 0 0 Display one traverse range via MOD Bit 0 1 Display three traverse ranges via MO...

Page 356: ...ts in W1056 when the entered distance in an axis has been exceeded 7 7 7 7 With W1058 you reset the distance counter to 0 after lubrication MP4060 0 8 Traverse distance for lubrication of axes 1 to 9 Input 0 to 99 999 9999 mm or Note After the TNC has been reset the accumulated distance is reset Set Reset W1056 Lubrication pulse Value in MP4060 exceeded Bits 0 to 8 represent axes 1 to 9 NC NC W105...

Page 357: ...December 2001 Machine Axes 6 27 ...

Page 358: ...owever the axes are not interpolated with each other n PLC axes are positioned by the shortest path if you enter a modulo value in MP810 x With MP100 x you define for every traverse range which axes the PLC controls and which the NC controls Uppercase letters represent NC axes and lowercase letters represent PLC axes To indicate axes that are not present mark them with a hyphen MP100 Designation o...

Page 359: ...pon switch on Call PS B W D K Axis 0 to 8 correspond to axes 1 to 9 PS B W D K Target position Input unit 0 0001 mm PS B W D K Feed rate Input unit mm min PS B W D K Mode Bit 0 Type of target position input 0 Absolute i e relative to the machine datum 1 Incremental CM 9120 PL B W D Error code 0 No error Positioning was started 1 Axis does not exist 2 Not a PLC axis 3 Axis is already being position...

Page 360: ... axis 0 NC axis or not active 1 PLC axis Bit 1 Reference mark 0 Reference mark not yet traversed 1 Reference mark traversed Bit 2 Positioning 0 Inactive 1 Active Bit 3 Direction of motion 0 Positive 1 Negative Bit 4 Positioning error 0 No positioning errors occurred 1 Positioning error Bit 5 Close loop or open loop axis 0 Close loop axis was programmed 1 Axis programmed which was switched to open ...

Page 361: ...1 Negative CM 9123 PL B W D Error code 0 No error Positioning was started 1 Axis does not exist 2 Not a PLC axis 3 Axis is already being positioned 5 Programmed axis not in closed loop 6 Feed rate not permitted Module 9124 Feed rate override for PLC axis Enters the feed rate override for one PLC axis Conditions n After interruption of a PLC program the override value is set to 100 n When a positio...

Page 362: ...tion Stop an already started PLC positioning of an axis at the next Hirth grid position Call PS B W D K Axis 0 to 8 correspond to axes 1 to 9 CM 9125 PL B W D Error code 0 Positioning is canceled 1 Axis does not exist 2 Not a PLC axis 3 Axis was already stationary 4 Axis is not a Hirth axis MP420 x ...

Page 363: ...If you reset these markers positioning is canceled This is necessary if you would like to change a parameter for example the feed rate during positioning The following conditions apply to a PLC positioning command n If more than one axis is moved simultaneously then the axes will be interpolated n If you start another axis during a PLC positioning movement then the first positioning command will b...

Page 364: ...oning is started 1 Axis is not in a closed loop or is an auxiliary axis 2 Inadmissible values for the feed rate 3 Axis has not traversed the reference mark 4 No M S T Q strobe during running program 5 Programmed axis not in closed loop Module 9222 Status request of PLC positioning movement With this module you can interrogate the status of a PLC positioning movement Call PS B W DK Axis 0 to 8 corr...

Page 365: ...positioning movement Set markers M4120 to M4124 for the desired axis Set Reset D528 544 Target position for PLC positioning PLC PLC W560 568 Feed rate for PLC positioning PLC PLC M4120 PLC positioning axis 1 active NC PLC NC PLC M4121 PLC positioning axis 2 active NC PLC NC PLC M4122 PLC positioning axis 3 active NC PLC NC PLC M4123 PLC positioning axis 4 active NC PLC NC PLC M4124 PLC positioning...

Page 366: ...1 Backlash Compensation Cause outside of the control loop During a reversal in axis direction there is often a little play between the rotary encoder and table This play is referred to as backlash Positive backlash The rotary encoder reading is ahead of the table The table traverse is too short Negative backlash The rotary encoder reading is behind the table The table traverse is too long Compensa...

Page 367: ...necessary Compensation 7 7 7 7 In MP750 enter the reversal error in mm 7 7 7 7 In MP752 enter the time in which the distance to be compensated should be traversed MP750 0 8 Backlash in axes 1 to 9 Input 1 0000 to 1 0000 mm or MP752 0 8 Compensation time for backlash in axes 1 to 9 Input 0 to 1000 ms Example MP750 0 03 mm MP752 15 ms For every change in direction a nominal speed command signal is o...

Page 368: ... the axis error in mm m 7 7 7 7 With MP730 activate the linear axis error compensation MP720 0 8 Linear axis error compensation for axes 1 to 9 Input 1 000 to 1 000 mm m MP730 Selection of linear nonlinear axis error compensation Format xxxxxxxxx Input Bits 0 to 8 correspond to axes 1 to 9 0 Linear axis error compensation 1 Nonlinear axis error compensation Note Linear axis error compensation is n...

Page 369: ...ed by the sagging of another axis or external influences e g temperature can cause nonlinear axis errors These graphics show typical nonlinear axis errors The best way to measure nonlinear axis error is with a comparator measuring system such as the HEIDENHAIN VM 101 Note The TNC can compensate screw pitch error and axis sag simultaneously ...

Page 370: ... whose positions affect the error of the compensated axis 7 7 7 7 Begin your entry with the soft key HEAD LINE Enter the datum for the compensation values as a distance from the machine datum MP960 x 7 7 7 7 Enter a value for the spacing of the compensation points as a power to the base of 2 The maximum input value is 23 Example The input value 16 represents 216 65536 6 5536 mm 7 7 7 7 Exit the he...

Page 371: ...point of compensation values Z 200 mm Y 90 mm n Desired spacing of compensation points 7 mm Calculations Input values for the spacing of the compensation points possible powers of 216 6 5536 mm Number of compensation points Entries 500 mm 6 5536 mm 77 compensation points in Y 800 mm 6 5536 mm 123 compensation points in Z Y axis Ballscrew pitch error in column 2 F sag error in column 3 F Z axis Bal...

Page 372: ...es for which you have created compensation value tables 7 7 7 7 Enter the compensation value table You can assign more than one compensation value table to each axis however only one table can be active Enter the file names of the compensation value tables in the respective lines You can select the active line either with the soft key SET ACTIV LINE or with Module 9095 With Module 9035 you can int...

Page 373: ...g program without strobe 10 CMA file is protected Module 9035 Reading status information Call PS B W D K 19 Active line in the configuration file CMA 1 No CMA file active CM 9035 PL B W D Active line number 0 Line number 1 No CMA file active Error recognition A rotary axis is a special case For a rotary axis only the compensation values for the entries of 0 to 60 are effective relative to the mach...

Page 374: ...becomes active This means that the actual position is offset by a certain value per PLC cycle until the complete value is compensated 7 7 7 7 In MP4070 enter the value for the offset per PLC cycle For gantry axes the compensation value must be transferred separately for each axis Heat compensation when using tilting axes is defined through machine parameters or the kinematics table See Temperature...

Page 375: ...by transferring the axis number and a compensation value Call PS B W D K Axis Axis 0 to 8 PS B W D K Compensation value Range 30 000 to 30 000 1 10µ CM 9231 Error recognition Marker Value Meaning M4203 0 No error 1 Error code in W1022 W1022 1 Invalid axis number 2 Invalid compensation value 24 The module was called in a spawn job or submit job ...

Page 376: ...M grid encoder and the ACCOM evaluation software you can measure the size and duration of the spikes Calculation Duration of the reversal spike The spike width is displayed in the diagram The feed rate mm min is the programmed tool path feed rate Compensation per control loop cycle time The compensation value is entered in MP712 x tSpD s Peak width 2 π radius mm 60 360 feed rate mm min Comp mm Rev...

Page 377: ...digital 0 If the compensation has no effect it may be because the machine s dynamic performance is too weak You can selectively increase the contour accuracy with a higher kv factor With the M function M105 you can switch to a second set of kv factors In this way a second set of machine parameters becomes active for reversal spike compensation MP715 x and MP716 x M106 resets M105 7 7 7 7 Enable th...

Page 378: ... control in each axis with MP1391 x for manual operation Calculations For compensation of static friction an additive nominal velocity is output whose value Fzus is calculated from the factor for static friction compensation Fzus additional feed rate m min sa following error difference after one control loop cycle mm tR control loop cycle time µs kv control loop gain m min mm MP1511 x factor for s...

Page 379: ...es 1 to 9 Input 0 to 16 777 215 counting steps MP1513 0 8 Feed rate limitation for static friction compensation for axes 1 to 9 Input 0 to 300 000 mm min MP1391 Velocity feedforward control in the MANUAL and HANDWHEEL operating modes Format xxxxxxxxx Input Bits 0 to 8 correspond to axes 1 to 9 0 Operation with following error lag 1 Operation with velocity feedforward control Digital axes Limit to ...

Page 380: ...the speed controller and causes a sliding friction that depends on the speed When the traverse direction is reversed at high feed rates the sliding friction might be overcompensated In a circular interpolation test such overcompensation appears in the form of reversal spikes that jut inward With MP2612 x you can prevent overcompensation by delaying the compensation MP2610 0 8 Friction compensation...

Page 381: ...December 2001 Axis Error Compensation 6 51 ...

Page 382: ...fset As an example we will show how to determine the mechanical offset of a 45 double swivel head and of a forked swivel head Double swivel head 45 In this example the mechanical offset of a double swivel head is determined by using a 3 D touch probe Input values for the machine parameters n MP7500 xxxx101 n MP7510 0 000100 Shift in Z axis n MP7510 1 000001 Shift in X axis n MP7510 2 001000 Rotate...

Page 383: ...December 2001 Tilting Axes 6 53 Step 1a n Bring tilting axes B and C into 0 position n Probe surface X1 n Set X 0 Step 1b n Probe surface Z n Set Z 0 ...

Page 384: ...6 54 HEIDENHAIN Technical Manual TNC 426 TNC 430 Step 2 n Position C 180 n Probe surface Z n MP7530 0 determined value probe length ball radius Step 3 n Probe surface X1 n MP7530 1 0 5 determined value ...

Page 385: ... Position C 0 n Probe surface X2 n L determined value Step 4b n Position B 90 n Probe surface X1 n X1 determined value n Position B 90 n Probe surface X2 n X2 determined value n MP7530 3 0 5 X2 X1 L 2 probe length 2 ball radius MP7530 0 cos 45 ...

Page 386: ...surfaces X1 X2 Y2 and Z in a tilted working plane with the tilting angles B 90 B 90 and C 180 with MP7500 xxxxx0x n If there are differences between the individual tilting angles the offsets from MP7530 0 and MP7530 3 should be determined with a different process steps 6 to 8 and the averages from both processes should be entered in MP7530 0 and MP7530 3 Step 6 n Probe surface Y2 n Set Y 0 ...

Page 387: ...ere is a difference between MP7530 0 and Z1 then MP7530 0 0 5 MP7530 0 Z Step 8 n Position C 0 n Position B 90 n Probe surface Z n Z determined value n Position B 90 n Probe surface Z n Z 0 5 Z determined value probe length ball radius Z1 cos 45 Z1 see step 7 n If there is a difference between MP7530 3 and Z then MP7530 3 0 5 MP7530 3 Z ...

Page 388: ...r Temporary input values for the machine parameters n MP7500 xxxx101 n MP7510 0 000100 Shift in Z axis n MP7510 1 000010 Shift in Y axis n MP7510 2 001000 Free tilting axis A n MP7510 3 000001 Shift in X axis n MP7510 4 000010 Shift in Y axis n MP7510 5 100000 Free tilting axis C n MP7510 6 000000 End transformation Y Z X Z Step 1a Determining the Y offset n Position A 90 n Set dial indicator to 0...

Page 389: ...then MP7530 1 offset n If the determined value 0 then MP7530 1 offset Step 1c Checking the settings n Activate 3 D ROT n Position A 90 n Set dial indicator to 0 n Datum setting n Position A 90 n Probe same position again n Display and dial indicator must read 0 Step 2a Determining the Z offset n Position A 90 n Set dial indicator to 0 0 0 ...

Page 390: ... Position A 0 n Place dial indicator against the spindle nose n MP7530 0 determined value cylinder radius Step 3 Determining the Y offset n Position A 0 n Position C 0 and set C 0 n Position C 180 n Read Y offset from the dial indicator n MP7530 4 0 5 determined value MP7530 1 0 180 0 ...

Page 391: ...December 2001 Tilting Axes 6 61 Step 4 Determining the X offset n Position C 90 and set C 0 n Position C 180 n Read X offset from the dial indicator n MP7530 3 0 5 determined value 180 0 ...

Page 392: ...sequence of the transformed axes in MP7520 x the type of axis and dimensional data and in MP7530 x enter the value of the offset See the examples on the following pages 7 7 7 7 In MP7550 x enter the home position of the tilting device in the machine coordinate system If a rotation has been entered it must be canceled again in an additional transformation Compensation of mechanical offset when exch...

Page 393: ...nd enter the code number 807667 7 7 7 7 Choose the file PLC OEM SYS from within program management 7 7 7 7 Enter the code word KINEMATIC followed by the file name with its complete path from the assignment table e g KINEMATIC PLC KINEMAT KINELIST TAB 7 7 7 7 Leave OEM SYS by pressing the END key 7 7 7 7 To create an assignment table In program management switch to the desired directory and enter t...

Page 394: ...6 64 HEIDENHAIN Technical Manual TNC 426 TNC 430 Note The active description table is indicated with the status M in program management Assignment table Description tables ...

Page 395: ... INSERT LINE soft key 7 7 7 7 Enter RAX_OFFS as Field name C for Field type 31 for Field width 4 for the number of decimal places and a dialog text for the desired dialog languages e g OFFSET of angular axes 7 7 7 7 Press the END key The new column RAX_OFFS has been added to the description table In the first three lines of these columns you can enter the phase angle error of the adapter spindle n...

Page 396: ...the assignment table 3 Assignment table is not defined 4 Description table does not exist 5 Description table is incomplete 6 Module was not called in a spawn job or submit job 7 Call during running NC program without strobe 8 No KINEMATIC entry in the OEM SYS file Error recognition Marker Value Meaning M4203 0 Geometry description was selected 1 Error code in W1022 W1022 2 Invalid mode or line wa...

Page 397: ...S B W D K String number for table name 0 to 7 String number line number is also found 1 Find only line number no name CM 9098 PL B W D Line number in the assignment table 1 Line number not found Error recognition Marker Value Meaning M4203 0 Name and or line number was found 1 Error code in W1022 W1022 2 Incorrect parameter for string number 20 Module was not called in a submit job or spawn job ...

Page 398: ...6 68 HEIDENHAIN Technical Manual TNC 426 TNC 430 Example 1 Rectangular double swivel head Z1 200 4 mm Z2 3 1 mm X1 201 5 Y1 1 9 mm 1 to 4 Sequence of transformations ...

Page 399: ...MP 7520 0 00 Incremental dimensions swivel head MP 7520 1 00 Incremental dimensions swivel head MP 7520 2 00 Incremental dimensions swivel head MP 7520 3 00 Incremental dimensions swivel head MP 7520 4 00 Incremental dimensions swivel head MP 7520 5 00 Incremental dimensions swivel head MP 7530 0 200 4 Dimension Z1 MP 7530 1 1 9 Dimension Y1 MP 7530 2 0 Variable dimension free tilting axis A MP 75...

Page 400: ...6 70 HEIDENHAIN Technical Manual TNC 426 TNC 430 Example 2 Double swivel head 45 Z1 150 5 mm Z2 251 5 mm A1 45 A2 45 X1 1 2 mm X2 0 8 mm 1 to 6 Sequence of transformations ...

Page 401: ... Incremental dimensions swivel head MP 7520 1 00 Incremental dimensions swivel head MP 7520 2 00 Incremental dimensions swivel head MP 7520 3 00 Incremental dimensions swivel head MP 7520 4 00 Incremental dimensions swivel head MP 7520 5 00 Incremental dimensions swivel head MP 7520 6 00 Incremental dimensions swivel head MP 7520 7 00 Incremental dimensions swivel head MP 7530 0 150 5 Dimension Z1...

Page 402: ...430 Example 3 Universal table pitch tilt rotation Y1 2 7 mm Z1 331 3 mm Z2 125 9 mm Coordinates with respect to machine datum of the center of rotation of table C when all tilting axes are in their home position XR 420 0 mm YR 151 2 mm ZR 395 4 mm ...

Page 403: ...000000 End of the transformation chain MP 7520 0 11 Absolute dimension tilting table MP 7520 1 11 Absolute dimension tilting table MP 7520 2 11 Absolute dimension tilting table MP 7520 3 01 Tilting table MP 7520 4 01 Tilting table MP 7520 5 01 Tilting table MP 7520 6 01 Tilting table MP 7520 7 01 Tilting table MP 7520 8 01 Tilting table MP 7530 0 420 Dimension XR MP 7530 1 151 2 Dimension YR MP 75...

Page 404: ...ermanently effective temperature compensation by entering a formula in the TEMPCOMP column of the description table In most cases the formula to be used will be the formula for calculating a change in length l l T α l change in length l Length T change in temperature α coefficient of expansion steel 11 5 10 6 1 K Example Z1 300 mm at 20 C αsteel 11 5 10 6 1 K coefficient of expansion of steel W486...

Page 405: ...g movement The variables are monitored every second and if there are any changes MP7530 x is recalculated Permanent temperature compensation The permanent temperature compensation with the formula from the TEMPCOMP column is only effective if the description table is active The algebraic sign of the compensation must match that of the axis error compensation in Words W576 to W584 The variables are...

Page 406: ...nment table in which a machine parameter subfile is activated which sets the bits in MP10 to 0 for the affected axes If the encoder of a digital axis needs to be disconnected then the appropriate bit must also be set in MP20 x bit x 0 In addition MP2200 x must be set 7 7 7 7 Change the milling head 7 7 7 7 Choose a row in the assignment table which contains a machine parameter subfile for the new ...

Page 407: ...sition of the working plane the TNC calculates the position of the tilting axes and saves the coordinates in Q parameters n Q120 Coordinate of the A axis n Q121 Coordinate of the B axis n Q122 Coordinate of the C axis With FN17 SYSWRITE ID990 NR5 IDX5 you can determine if a principle axis is shown on top of another principle axis in an untilted coordinate system due to a tilt motion Automatic posi...

Page 408: ...first rotary table axis only this axis can align a workpiece For all other axes datum setting in X Y and Z is possible with tilted working plane active MP7500 bit 5 0 See MP7500 bit 3 0 MP7500 bit 5 1 It can happen with titling elements with Hirth couplings that by locking the Hirth coupling the actual value of the encoder will no longer exactly agree with the mechanical position of the tilting el...

Page 409: ...tilted working plane is active 1 The reference coordinates of the linear axes are maintained when tilted working plane is inactive and the tilting element is in its home position 2 MP7500 bit 8 1 During datum setting for X Y and Z the datum is recalculated back to the home position of the tilting element when tilted working plane is active 1 So when tilted working plane is inactive and the tilting...

Page 410: ... n A datum shift via PLC also works with the tilted working plane function n The axis designations for the tilting axes are limited to A B C Each designation can be used only once n Starting with NC software 280 476 xx it is possible to position with M91 or M92 when Cycle 19 tilted working plane is active If the position of the working plane is entered only the following swivel axes with tool axis...

Page 411: ... spindle head when calling M128 M114 or tilted working plane 1 Compensate mechanical offset during PLC datum shift Bit 5 0 The current tilting axis position is taken into account with respect to the machine datum 1 The tilting axis position that was entered with the 3 D ROT soft key applies Bit 6 0 Spatial angle C is realized through a rotation of the coordinate system 1 Spatial angle C is realize...

Page 412: ...1 Absolute with respect to the machine datum for tilting table MP7520 0 14Transformation 1 to transformation 15 MP7530 Type of dimension for transformation Input 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 0 Free tilting axis MP7530 0 14Transformation 1 to transformation 15 MP7550 Home position of the tilting element Input 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 MP7550 0 A axis MP7550 1 B axis MP7550 2 C axis MP7682 Machine pa...

Page 413: ...pensates the tool length then the programmed feed rate refers to the tool point Otherwise it refers to the tool datum Miscellaneous function M114 Automatic compensation with M114 n Linear and rotational movements are superimposed The resulting contour deviations depend on the length of the linear interpolation n When the table is rotated the coordinate system is rotated against the machine coordin...

Page 414: ... the handwheel positioning movements can be superimposed on the program run movements The TNC automatically performs the compensating movements in the principle axes When M128 is used the principal axes make compensating movements 7 7 7 7 In MP7471 define the maximum velocity of the principal axes during compensating movements MP7471 Maximum velocity of the principal axes during compensating movem...

Page 415: ...active 1 M144 M145 active 6 5 7 Cylindrical Surface Cycles 27 and 28 Cylinder Surface enable the user to machine a contour on a cylindrical surface see the User s Manual Prerequisites n In MP7510 to MP7530 the center of rotation of a rotary axis must be defined see example 3 MP7500 is not needed if only one rotary axis is present n If a PLC datum compensation is used the same home position must ap...

Page 416: ...6 86 HEIDENHAIN Technical Manual TNC 426 TNC 430 ...

Page 417: ...s to axis 3 4 Slave axis to axis 4 5 Slave axis to axis 5 6 Slave axis to axis 6 7 Slave axis to axis 7 8 Slave axis to axis 8 9 Slave axis to axis 9 Example Axis 4 is slave to axis 1 n MP850 0 0 n MP850 1 0 n MP850 2 0 n MP850 3 1 n MP850 4 0 n MP850 5 0 n MP850 6 0 n MP850 7 0 n MP850 8 0 Master slave position deviation The TNC monitors the synchronism of the coupled axes If the master and slave...

Page 418: ...rence mark is traversed in both axes The monitoring function is not active until after the compensation movement The monitoring function is not active before the reference marks are traversed Conditions n The same type of reference mark traverse must be set for both the master and slave axes MP1350 x n The velocity with which an offset after traversing a reference mark or emergency stop is compens...

Page 419: ... software limit switches feed rate for reference mark traverse and manual feed rate are also taken over from the input values of the master axis for the slave axis n When operating with following error the kv factors for master and slave must be the same n The axes must be either both analog or both digital n Up to NC software 280 470 04 Master and slave axes must be linear n For gantry axes one p...

Page 420: ...6 90 HEIDENHAIN Technical Manual TNC 426 TNC 430 ...

Page 421: ...es two axes can be controlled in the torque master slave control whereby you must keep in mind that the master and slave axis are on the same speed controller PCB First speed controller PCB X15 to X20 Second speed controller PCB X62 to X64 In principle there are two applications n Minimization of mechanical play through mutual tensioning n Distribution of torque with a rigid coupling Minimization ...

Page 422: ...eighted with the torque constants of the motors and compared with each other In addition a tensioning torque MP2900 x can be introduced at this comparison point To permit a distribution of drive torque the nominal torque of the slave axis can be multiplied with a weighting factor MP2920 x The result at the comparison point is fed to a torque balancing controller that amplifies it proportionally MP...

Page 423: ... the MP entries MP850 0 0 Axis 1 is master axis MP850 1 1 Axis 2 is slave to axis 1 MP850 2 1 Axis 3 is slave to axis 1 MP850 3 2 Axis 4 is slave to axis 2 MP860 0 0 or 1 Axis 1 Datum for synchronous control MP860 1 0 or 1 Axis 2 Datum for synchronous control MP860 2 2 Axis 3 is torque slave axis MP860 3 2 Axis 4 is torque slave axis Axis 1 Axis 2 Axis 3 Axis 4 Torque master axis Torque slave axis...

Page 424: ...to be entered is 1 7 7 7 7 If you use a position encoder in MP2930 x enter 100 for the slave axis if you do not use a position encoder enter the value 0 7 7 7 7 Enter MP2510 x I factor of speed controller 50 or if you have one an empirical value for your motor 7 7 7 7 Adjust the P and I factor of the speed controller for the master and slave axes at the same time See Commissioning on page 6 462 It...

Page 425: ...ng torque for the slave axis in MP2900 x Test the P factor of the torque controller 7 7 7 7 With the integrated oscilloscope record the actual speed value V N ACTL 7 7 7 7 Increase the P factor in MP2910 x for the slave axis up to the oscillation limit 7 7 7 7 Enter in MP2910 x for the slave axis 50 of the resulting value Discontinuity Inoml master Inoml slave Inoml master Inoml Inoml master Inoml...

Page 426: ... For the master axis adjust the P and I factor of the speed controller See Commissioning on page 6 462 7 7 7 7 If you do not reach the desired rise time approx 10 ms you can increase the P factor with the aid of a filter Here the band rejection filter is preferable to the low pass filter 7 7 7 7 To find the center frequency for the band rejection filter slowly increase the P factor to the oscillat...

Page 427: ... value MP2900 0 8 Tensioning torque between master and slave for master slave torque control entry for the slave axis Input 100 00 to 100 00 Nm MP2910 0 8 P factor of the torque controller for master slave torque control entry for the slave axis Input 0 00 to 999 99 1 Nm min MP2920 0 8 Factor for variable torque distribution for master slave torque control entry for the slave axis Input 0 000 to 1...

Page 428: ...IN recommends position encoders with distance coded reference marks With distance coded reference marks the position value can be reestablished after traverse of a short distance over any two reference marks 6 7 2 Traversing the Reference Marks The reference marks must be traversed after any interruption in power 7 7 7 7 Press the machine START button The reference marks are automatically traverse...

Page 429: ...han one reference mark the distance between the reference mark to be traversed and the scale reference point must also be entered 7 7 7 7 With Module 9225 enter the distance between the reference mark to be traversed and the scale reference point Module 9225 Compensation value for the reference mark With Module 9225 you define the distance between the reference mark to be traversed and the scale r...

Page 430: ... reference marks 7 7 7 7 With MP1350 x you select the type of reference marks Pass Over Reference Point mode of operation The NC uses W272 to report the Pass Over Reference Point operating mode to the PLC If you switch the operating mode before all reference marks are traversed the PASS OVER REFERENCE soft key prompts you traverse the remaining reference marks In W1032 the PLC receives the informa...

Page 431: ... 430 M With these encoders there is no need to traverse the reference marks The position value is only read when the control is switched on It cannot be read again When connecting a position encoder with an EnDat interface 7 7 7 7 Enter MP1350 x 5 When connecting a speed encoder with an EnDat interface 7 7 7 7 The TNC automatically attempts to communicate with the encoder When connecting a speed e...

Page 432: ... No evaluation of reference marks 1 Axis X 2 Axis Y 3 Axis Z 4 Axis 4 5 Axis 5 6 Axis 6 7 Axis 7 8 Axis 8 MP1350 0 8 Type of reference mark traverse Input 0 Linear encoder with distance coded reference marks old routine 1 Position encoder with one reference mark 2 Special type length measurement with ROD 3 Linear encoder with distance coded reference marks new routine 4 Same as 3 except that two r...

Page 433: ...e first time n An axis cannot be started for reference mark traverse until all axes are in position Servo controlled spindles n The speed for traversing the reference mark is defined in the module n The spindle must be started from a standstill to traverse the reference mark n If the spindle is started for reference mark traverse marker M4018 is set Call PS B W D K Axis spindle 0 to 8 Axes 1 to 9 ...

Page 434: ... external START key Trip dog Reference end position closed Machine traverse in direction from MP1320 Machine traverses in inverted direction from MP1320 Two successive reference marks are traversed Is the machine outside the software limit switch range Machine moves to software limit switch Machine stops No Yes Yes No Yes No Trip dog Reference end position is closed before two consecutive referenc...

Page 435: ...It is therefore necessary that there be at least two reference marks in the range of the reference end position Reference marks closed open Reference end postion trip dog Traverse direction MP1320 Pass over two consecutive reference marks Press external START key Trip dog Reference end position closed Machine stops No Yes Yes No Is the machine outside the software limit switch range Machine moves ...

Page 436: ...on from MP1320 Machine moves in inverted traverse direction from MP1320 Reference mark is passed over Is the machine outside the software limit switch range Machine moves to software limit switch Machine stops No Yes Yes No Yes No Trip dog Reference end position is closed before two successive reference marks are traversed Reference marks Closed Open Trip dog Reference end position Traverse direct...

Page 437: ...key Trip dog Reference end position closed Machine traverse in direction from MP1320 with velocity from MP1330 x to the trip dog Reference end positon Is the machine outside the software limit switch range Machine moves to software limit switch Machine stops No Yes Yes No Machine traverse in inverted direction from MP1320 and with reduced velocity from MP1331 x The first reference pulse after open...

Page 438: ...6 108 HEIDENHAIN Technical Manual TNC 426 TNC 430 ...

Page 439: ...nnermost loop TNC 426 CB TNC 430 CA The position control loop is integrated in the TNC The speed controller current controller and power supply unit are located in the servo amplifier The nominal speed command signal is sent by the TNC to the servo amplifier through an analog 10 V interface The TNC 426 CB has an analog nominal speed command interface and controls machines with up to 5 axes plus sp...

Page 440: ...m for motors with two pole pairs The TNC 430 PA controls machines with up to 6 digitally controlled NC axes 2 analog controlled axes and one digitally controlled spindle with a speed of up to 30 000 rpm for motors with two pole pairs TNC 426 M TNC 430 M The position controller speed controller current controller and the power module are located in the TNC The TNC 426 M controls machines with up to...

Page 441: ...specified in such a way that acceleration during the acceleration phase is as constant as possible This ensures maximum utilization of the drive current The machine on the other hand should be designed to fulfill the following dynamic requirements The jerk should be kept to a minimum and the jerk phase should be maximized in order to prevent the machine from oscillating The result is no constant a...

Page 442: ...0 0 35 Maximum attainable acceleration amax1 during rapid traverse Maximum attainable acceleration amax2 during machining v up to 20 000 mm min Distance smin required to attain rapid traverse velocity smin 2 vmax vmax rmax Distance s Acceleration a t Tr 2Tr 3Tr 4Tr Jerk r Velocity v smin vmax amax1 vmax rmax1 0 5 m s 70 m s 3 5 92 m s 2 amax2 vmax rmax2 0 33 m s 35 m s 3 3 40 m s 2 smin 2 vmax vma...

Page 443: ...ration The jerk is the rate of change in acceleration The greater the entered value the more the system will tend to oscillate 7 7 7 7 Limit the axis specific jerk with MP1097 x or MP1098 x The machine parameter block to be used depends on the value entered in MP1095 x If MP1095 x 0 MP1097 x is valid If MP1095 x 1 MP1098 x is valid 7 7 7 7 Use MP1087 x to limit the axis specific jerk in Manual mod...

Page 444: ...ed every 3 ms from the calculated velocity For linear interpolation s nominal position value so previous nominal position value v calculated velocity t cycle time 3 ms The nominal position value is resolved into the individual axis components depending on which axes have been programmed It may happen that the axes at first move past the target position and then oscillate onto it This overshoot beh...

Page 445: ... MP1098 x at corners For HSC filter MP1098 x at corners as of NC software 280 476 01 you can also enter for the HSC filter the permissible axis specific jerk for curvature changes e g tangential transitions from a line to an arc in MP1097 x 7 7 7 7 In MP1096 define a tolerance for contour transitions This tolerance can be overwritten by the machine user with Cycle 32 Tolerance 7 7 7 7 Select from ...

Page 446: ... Hz 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 3 7 4 3 2 1 1 4 8 5 2 1 5 9 6 4 3 2 1 6 10 1 7 11 7 5 3 2 8 4 9 12 8 2 10 13 6 3 11 2 12 14 9 5 4 Damping dB Frequency to be damped Hz 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 3 12 19 24 29 34 39 44 49 54 59 64 4 10 17 22 27 32 37 42 47 52 57 62 5 6 15 21 26 31 36 41 46 51 56 61 6 1 14 20 25 30 35 39 45 50 55 60 7 13 18 23 28 33 38 43 48 54 59 8 11 17 23 28 33 38 43 48...

Page 447: ... rapid traverse For RIGID TAPPING Cycle 17 the nominal position value filter is automatically switched off Note If you have selected the best nominal position value filter for your application please note that your input value can be overwritten by the machine user through Cycle 32 If you have switched off the nominal position value filter MP1096 0 the machine user can also switch it on using Cycl...

Page 448: ...Nominal position value filter Input 0 Single filter 1 Double filter MP1095 0 In the Program Run Full Sequence Program Run Single Block and Positioning With Manual Data Input operating modes MP1095 1 In the Manual Handwheel Jog Increment and Pass Over Reference Point operating modes MP1096 Tolerance for contour transitions Input 0 No nominal position value filter 0 001 to 3 000 mm Permissible toler...

Page 449: ...M128 the head dimensions are also included in the tolerance consideration MP1096 Cycle 32 This means that the control tries to observe the tolerance taking the head dimensions into account As a result the tolerance is reduced which leads to a reduction of the feed rate and might cause the rotary axis to jerk To switch off the consideration of the head dimensions for rotary axes with M128 7 7 7 7 E...

Page 450: ...6 120 HEIDENHAIN Technical Manual TNC 426 TNC 430 ...

Page 451: ... PLC cycle time position controller cycle time MP7600 1 Input 1 to 20 Proposed input value 7 21 ms You can choose between two types of feedback control n Feedback control with following error servo lag n Feedback control with velocity feedforward 7 7 7 7 Select the type of control in the POSITIONING WITH MANUAL DATA INPUT PROGRAM RUN SINGLE BLOCK and PROGRAM RUN FULL SEQUENCE operating modes with ...

Page 452: ... value snoml for a given axis is compared with the actual position value sactl and the resulting difference is the following error sa sa sNoml sActl sa following error sNoml nominal position value sActl actual position value The following error is multiplied by the kv factor and passed on as nominal velocity value v kv sa vnoml nominal velocity value Analog axes For stationary axes the integral fa...

Page 453: ...ed with the M function M105 7 7 7 7 In MP1815 x define a second set of kv factors and activate them with M105 M105 also influences compensation of reversal spikes during circular motion With M106 you can switch back to the original set of kv factors 7 7 7 7 Enable the M functions M105 M106 with MP7440 bit 3 Interrelation of kv factor feed rate and following error The following formula shows the in...

Page 454: ...it makes it possible to machine exact contours even at high speeds For the POSITIONING WITH MANUAL DATA INPUT PROGRAM RUN SINGLE BLOCK and PROGRAM RUN FULL SEQUENCE operating modes 7 7 7 7 Switch on the velocity feedforward control with MP1390 or MP1392 For the MANUAL and HANDWHEEL operating modes 7 7 7 7 Switch on the velocity feedforward control with MP1391 Block diagram Analog axes For stationa...

Page 455: ...rcular motion With M106 you can switch back to the original set of kv factors 7 7 7 7 Enable the M functions M105 M106 with MP7440 bit 3 MP1510 0 8 kv factor for velocity feedforward for axes 1 to 9 Input 0 100 to 1000 000 m min mm MP1515 0 8 kv factor for velocity feedforward effective after M105 for axes 1 to 9 Input 0 100 to 20 000 m min mm MP7440 Output of M functions Format xxxxx Input Bit 3 ...

Page 456: ...ity feedforward more The factor can be overwritten with FN17 SYSWRITE ID600 However the factor from MP1396 x becomes valid again at the end of a program MP7300 1 and whenever a new NC program is selected As soon as a factor between 0 001 and 0 999 has been entered in MP1396 x the kV factor from MP1516 x becomes effective The values for position monitoring are interpolated according to the factor i...

Page 457: ...through the PLC 7 7 7 7 Enter the reduced value in D596 If the value in D596 is larger than MP1010 x then MP1010 x becomes effective After the control is switched on or after an interruption of the PLC run D596 is preassigned with the value 300 000 so that MP1010 x becomes effective Rapid traverse can be limited by the user with the F MAX soft key This limitation is not effective if M4587 is set I...

Page 458: ...nput 1 Position loop resolution The encoder signals are interpolated 1024 fold Analog axes The TNC outputs a voltage per position error The 10 V analog voltage is subdivided 65536 fold with a 16 bit D A converter This results in a smallest voltage step of 0 15 mV Rapid traverse MP1010 x is attained at a certain voltage MP1050 x This results in the voltage U per position error or following error sa...

Page 459: ...the low range n Low kv factor in the upper range beyond the machining velocity range 7 7 7 7 Define the position of the characteristic kink with MP1830 x In the upper range the kv factor is multiplied by the factor from MP1820 x 7 7 7 7 Enter a multiplier in MP1820 The characteristic curve kink point must lie above the tool feed rate Calculating the following error MP1820 0 8 Multiplier for the kv...

Page 460: ...ach position function is automatically activated If M4580 has been set an external EMERGENCY STOP X42 pin 4 control is ready signal acknowledgement is not reported to the NC but rather the function is executed like M4581 If the position control loop is opened the axis release in W1024 is canceled MP1150 1 Time period for which the monitoring function is to remain off after the fast PLC input defin...

Page 461: ...tion message in W1026 7 7 7 7 With Module 9161 switch the drive on 7 7 7 7 Release the clamping 7 7 7 7 Close the position control loop with W1040 Feed rate enable To move the axis you must first enable the feed rate through the PLC Until feed rate enable is set the nominal velocity value zero is output In the status display F is highlighted Feed rate enable for all axes 7 7 7 7 Set M4563 Axis spe...

Page 462: ...he control is not active M4176 0 or if there is an M S T T2 G strobe For a transfer only of PLC axes the module can always be called For a transfer via M strobe MP7440 bit 2 must not be set For a transfer via S G strobe MP3030 must not be set Call PS B W D K Axes bit encoded CM 9145 Error recognition Warning Ensure that actual to nominal value transfer does not occur continually since the position...

Page 463: ...December 2001 The Control Loop 6 133 ...

Page 464: ...NHAIN rotary encoders The position controller provides the nominal speed value The speed controller is driven by the difference between nominal and actual speed values It provides the nominal current value as output See Commissioning on page 6 462 With Module 9164 you can read the actual speed value of the motors You can adjust the step response of the speed controller 7 7 7 7 With the position co...

Page 465: ... D K Axis 0 to 8 Axes 1 to 9 15 Spindle CM 9164 PL B W D Actual speed value in the format 0 001 rpm Error recognition The step response illustrated above is idealized In practice interfering oscillations are superimposed on the step response You can reduce these interference oscillations with the differential factor the PT2 second order time delay element the band rejection filter and the low pass...

Page 466: ...ou can damp high frequency oscillations approx 600 Hz 7 7 7 7 Use the oscilloscope to find the fundamental frequency of the TNC 7 7 7 7 Activate the 1st or 2nd order low pass filter see table If you cannot achieve satisfactory results with the low pass filter try the PT2 element MP2560 0 8 Low pass filter for axes 1 to 9 Input 0 No low pass filter 1 1st order low pass filter 2 2nd order low pass f...

Page 467: ...he low pass filter 7 7 7 7 With the oscilloscope of the TNC find the fundamental frequency of the interference oscillations and enter them in MP2550 x 7 7 7 7 Increase MP2540 x incrementally until the interfering oscillation is minimized If you set the damping too high you will limit the dynamic performance of the control loop Realistic input values 3 to 9 dB MP2540 0 8 Band rejection filter dampi...

Page 468: ...6 138 HEIDENHAIN Technical Manual TNC 426 TNC 430 MP2600 0 MP2600 optimum ...

Page 469: ...2020 x traverse distance per motor revolution MP2600 0 8 Acceleration feedforward for axes 1 to 9 Input 0 to 30 000 A rev s2 Limiting the integral factor In machines with a great deal of stiction a high integral action component can accumulate if there is a position error at standstill This can result in a jump in position when the axis begins moving In such cases you can limit the integral action...

Page 470: ...missioned as usual until the kV factor is to be determined 7 7 7 7 Enter MP2602 x 1 and MP2604 x 0 7 7 7 7 Increase the kV factor MP1510 x until you reach the oscillation limit 7 7 7 7 Starting value 7 7 7 7 Change MP2604 x until you have found the maximum kV factor MP1510 x If you cannot find a maximum kV factor use the default value in MP2604 x 7 7 7 7 Starting value 7 7 7 7 Increase MP2602 x un...

Page 471: ...hase An increased following error during the jerk phase can be minimized with MP2606 x The preceding adjustment of the IPC must have been carried out for this to function The typical entry value for MP2606 x is between 0 5 and 2 Commissioning 7 7 7 7 Enter the following test program 0 BEGIN PGM TEST MM 1 LBL 1 2 L X maximum traverse R0 FMAX 3 L X0 FMAX 4 CALL LBL1 REP 10 10 5 END PGM TEST MM 7 7 7...

Page 472: ...hrough MP2630 x This relieves the speed controller 7 7 7 7 To prevent the effect of stiction measure the current at low speed in both directions e g 10 rpm 7 7 7 7 Calculate the holding current from the mean of the measured current values and enter the result in MP2630 x Mean MP2630 0 8 Holding current for axes 1 to 9 Input 30 000 to 30 000 A Note If the ready signal RDY is missing from the speed ...

Page 473: ... the status of the drive controller with Module 9162 and you can determine if the drive controller is ready to be switched on with Module 9157 TNC 426 M TNC 430 M 7 7 7 7 To enable the drive assign 24 Vdc to connection X42 pin 33 I32 If the ready signal is missing or if there is no voltage on connection X42 33 the drive controller cannot be switched on If you disconnect the voltage for connection ...

Page 474: ... D K Status information 0 Drive controller readiness 1 Drive controller status as in Module 9162 2 Reserved 3 Reserved CM 9157 PL B W D Axis status information bit encoded Error recognition Module 9159 Drives that are switched off in 200 ms This module functions only on the TNC 426 M TNC 430 M controls Call CM 9159 PL W D Drives in bit code that are switched off in 200 ms Note From NC software 280...

Page 475: ... S xxxx 987654321 0 No drive controller enabling 1 Drive controller enabling CM 9161 Error recognition Module 9162 Status request of the drive controller Call CM 9162 PL B W D Drive is ready Bit 15 0 Axis Sxxxxxx987654321 0 Not ready 1 Ready Module 9169 Axes for which I32 does not switch off the drives This module functions only on the TNC 426 M TNC 430 M controls Call PS B W D K Axes bit encoded ...

Page 476: ...6 146 HEIDENHAIN Technical Manual TNC 426 TNC 430 ...

Page 477: ...M analog current controller for 5 axes and 1 spindle n TNC 430 M analog current controller for 6 or 9 axes and 1 spindle The phase currents I1 and I2 are servo controlled The phase current I3 is calculated from I1 and I2 The sum of all phase current values is zero The actual current values for I1 and I2 are found from the motor power stage and are provided to X51 to X59 and X61 as voltage signals ...

Page 478: ...me asynchronous motors run rough at maximum speed 7 7 7 7 In this case enter in MP2402 x a current gain greater than that in MP2400 x The current gain from MP2402 x is reached at maximum speed It is interpolated linearly between standstill and maximum speed If you enter the value zero in MP2402 the current gain from MP2400 is in effect for the entire speed range MP2400 0 8 Gain for current control...

Page 479: ...m value in 7 7 7 7 Use the emergency stop to brake the axis from rapid traverse 7 7 7 7 Increase the value entered in MP2590 x until the braking time is as short as possible and the mechanics of the axis are not overloaded If the value entered is too small i e if braking is too slow the axis brakes at the acceleration defined in MP1060 x MP2590 0 8 Braking ramp for axes 1 to 8 or the second spindl...

Page 480: ...e dialog line The values show the setting of the voltage in 0 15 mV steps Display value 10 means 10 0 15 mV 1 5 mV The displayed offset value consists of the offset values that are generated in the motor controller and in the control If the values are to be automatically compensated 7 7 7 7 Press the ENT key or the CONTINUE soft key The control outputs a corresponding countervoltage If nothing is ...

Page 481: ...compensated in voltage steps of 0 15 mV MP1220 Analog axes Automatic Cyclic Offset Adjustment As of software version only before 280 474 07 Input 0 to 65 536 s 0 No automatic adjustment 6 9 3 Offset Adjustment with Integral Factor With the integral factor you can adjust an offset automatically 7 7 7 7 Enter an integral factor in MP1080 x The speed with which the offset is eliminated depends on the...

Page 482: ... feed rate during circular movement according to the formula v feed rate during circular movement m s r radius m of the path of the tool center HEIDENHAIN recommends If the programmed feed rate is less than that calculated above then the programmed feed rate becomes effective MP1070 functions for operation with both following error and feedforward control MP1070 Radial acceleration Input 0 001 to ...

Page 483: ...See The Interpolator on page 6 113 and nominal position value filter enable the TNC to machine 3 D surfaces at high speed Prerequisite The contour must be described with short line segments To ensure that cutter compensated outside corners remain exact a spline must be inserted into the cutter midpoint path instead of a transitional arc A spline also has the advantage of reducing the jerk 7 7 7 7 ...

Page 484: ...al If you program M112 or M124 defined arcs will be inserted at the corners regardless of the feed rate see User s Manual The rounding arcs generate twice as many NC blocks and the feed rate is now only limited by the radial acceleration 7 7 7 7 In MP7680 bit 7 specify whether the rounding arcs should always be inserted or only when the acceleration from MP1060 x or MP1070 has been exceeded at the...

Page 485: ...or constant contour speed at corners Input 0 0001 to 179 9999 MP7680 Machine parameter with multiple function Format xxxxxxxxxxxxx Input Bit 7 Inserting a defined rounding arc or spline 0 Defined rounding arcs are always inserted 1 Defined rounding arcs are always inserted if the acceleration from MP1060 x or MP1070 was exceeded Bit 8 Insertion of rounding arc or cubic spline 0 Rounding arc is ins...

Page 486: ... must be sampled faster 7 7 7 7 Define in MP4131 0 the activation criterion for the input specified in MP4130 0 7 7 7 7 Enable MP4130 0 with W522 bit 0 As soon as the input is set the monitoring functions and the drives are switched off The axes are automatically stopped If the following error is greater than MP1030 x positioning window the actual value is saved as nominal value The monitoring fun...

Page 487: ... 255 no of the PLC input TNC 426 M TNC 430 M If you use I32 enter the following values up to 280 474 11 MP4130 0 159 as of 280 474 12 MP4130 0 32 as of 280 476 01 MP4130 0 32 The inputs of the PL 4xxB may not be used MP4131 0 Activation criterion for fast PLC input for switching off the monitoring functions Input 0 Activation at low level 1 Activation at high level Set Reset W522 Enabling the fast...

Page 488: ... axis affected If the second limit is exceeded the error message EXCESSIVE SERVO LAG IN AXIS appears The control is ready signal output is reset You cannot clear this message You must restart the control to correct the error 7 7 7 7 In the machine parameters given below define two range limits for position monitoring in each operating mode 7 7 7 7 Adjust the input values to the machine dynamics If...

Page 489: ...remain off after the fast PLC input from MP4130 0 has been set The monitoring functions reactivate after expiration of this time 7 7 7 7 In MP1150 2 specify the minimum time period after expiration of the time from MP1150 1 for which the monitoring functions should remain effective e g if the input changes quickly MP1710 0 8 Position monitoring for operation with following error erasable for axes ...

Page 490: ...50 Delay time for erasing the nominal velocity value with the erasable error message EXCESSIVE SERVO LAG AXIS Input 0 to 65 535 s Recommended 0 s 6 11 2 Nominal Speed Value Monitoring For the axes the nominal speed value monitoring is effective only in operation with velocity feedforward For the spindle it is effective in operation with following error as long as the position control loop is close...

Page 491: ...r of signal periods and in MP331 x the path for the number of signal periods See Encoders on page 6 8 7 7 7 7 Enter the distance per motor revolution in MP2020 x A formula can also be entered in MP2020 x See Special case Entering a formula As of NC software 280 472 01 on page 4 5 7 7 7 7 In MP2800 x enter a limit value for this position difference If you are not using a position encoder you must e...

Page 492: ...n which the control considers a position to have been reached After the position has been reached the control begins running the next block The position controller can correct a disturbance inside this window without activating the Return to the Contour function 7 7 7 7 In MP1030 x define the size of the positioning window MP1030 0 8 Positioning window Input 0 0001 to 2 0000 mm Axes in position On...

Page 493: ...nitoring Functions 6 163 Axes in motion During axis movement the NC sets the corresponding bits in W1028 Set Reset W1028 Axes in motion Bits 0 to 8 correspond to axes 1 to 9 0 Axis not in motion 1 Axis in motion NC NC ...

Page 494: ...switched off and the control displays the error message POWER FAIL The control must be turned off and on again Below 155 Vdc the control is reset Below 135 Vdc the dc link power supply switches off Module 9167 Supply voltage monitoring With this module you can switch the monitoring for supply voltage 385 Vdc on and off If you don t call the module during the first PLC run through the supply voltag...

Page 495: ...s 13 and 25 of X15 to X20 X62 to X64 and at X60 The temperature value is ascertained at least once per second The maximum permissible motor temperature is taken from the motor table As soon as the given temperature is exceeded the blinking error message MOTOR TEMPERATURE AXIS TOO HIGH appears and the drives are automatically switched off Module 9165 Sampling the current motor temperature Appropria...

Page 496: ... the power module is exceeded this signal is reset The temperature warning signal is not evaluated in the NC 7 7 7 7 Use Module 9160 or 9066 to interrogate the temperature warning and take appropriate measures Warning To avoid destroying the power module the drives must be brought immediately to a standstill after a temperature warning Data on maximum permissible temperatures are available from th...

Page 497: ...urrent of the motor 1 rated current of the motor If you enter zero the I2 t monitoring for the motor not for the power supply unit is switched off If the mean current value from the integral exceeds the I2 t limit value the I2 t early warning signal responds I2 t limit If the mean current value from the integral exceeds the 1 1 fold value of the I2 t limit value the I2 t limit responds Within 0 4 ...

Page 498: ...n the HEIDENHAIN interface PCB is not closed with SIMODRIVE inverter system n Voltage from the unit bus FR is missing with SIMODRIVE inverter system n Error in the power supply unit 5 V or Uz is missing or Uz is too large As soon as the readiness signal is reset the drive controllers are switched off Normally the error message MOVEMENT MONITORING IN AXIS A is output through the position control lo...

Page 499: ... IN Motor rated current Imag Magnetizing current For synchronous motors IqRated Motor rated current Module 9166 Momentary utilization of the drive motor The evaluation through MP2312 x or MP2313 is already calculated in the utilization of the drive motor Call PS B W D K Axis 0 to 8 and 15 Axes 1 to 9 and the spindle CM 9166 PL B W D Utilization of the drive in Error recognition Speed range nactl r...

Page 500: ...dule Formulas for calculating the torque producing current Synchronous motor Iq Torque producing current M Desired torque kM Torque constant from motor table Asynchronous motor Two distinctions must be made with asynchronous motors n Anchored speed range speed threshold rpm for field weakening Iq Torque producing current M Desired torque nN Rated speed from motor table IN Rated current from motor ...

Page 501: ...is switched off the original torque becomes effective again If the torque limit is active the standstill monitoring is inactive only the motion monitoring remains active Call PS B W D K S Axis or spindle 0 to 8 Axes 1 to 9 15 Spindle PS B W D K S Torque producing current in mA 1 Torque given in motor specifications CM 9158 Error recognition Marker Value Meaning M4203 0 Torque preset active 1 Error...

Page 502: ...e ERR IZ signal with MP2221 bit 2 0 After the monitoring function has been deactivated the control continues working until the inverter switches off With module 9066 further status information on the HEIDENHAIN inverters can be read in the PLC MP2221 Current and speed controller monitoring functions Input Bit 2 0 Do not monitor ERR IZ signal or inverter does not supply this signal 1 Monitor ERR IZ...

Page 503: ...controller cycle If MP1152 1 the input is processed by the PLC in the PLC cycle before being passed on to the NC Resetting the control is ready signal acknowledgement inputs leads to position monitoring being shut off for the time defined in MP1150 1 and to an actual to nominal value transfer After the time defined in MP1150 1 has expired position monitoring is again active for at least the time d...

Page 504: ...on diagram In the event of an error the control is ready output must trigger an emergency stop The control therefore checks this output every time that line power is switched on Flowcharts Flowchart for n TNC 426 CB PB n TNC 426 M 12 000 rpm NC software 280 476 06 Danger Hanging axes must be supported before the test in order to prevent damage to the machine in case of error Note The circuitry rec...

Page 505: ...nition of the machine control voltage on X42 4 and switch off of the control is ready signal on X41 34 by DSP t 120 ms 7 Maximum time within which the control is ready acknowledgment on X42 4 must go to zero t 380 ms If exceeded EMERGENCY STOP DEFECTIVE 8 Recognition of the acknowledgment and setting of X41 34 t 120 ms 9 Waiting for machine control voltage RELAY EXTERNAL DC VOLTAGE MISSING 10 Norm...

Page 506: ...st go to zero t 380 ms If exceeded EMERGENCY STOP DEFECTIVE 4 Recognition of the acknowledgment and setting of X41 34 t 20 ms 5 Waiting for machine control voltage RELAY EXTERNAL DC VOLTAGE MISSING 6 Recognition of the machine control voltage on X42 4 and switch off of the control is ready signal on X41 34 by DSP 1 t 120 ms 7 Maximum time within which the control is ready acknowledgment on X42 4 m...

Page 507: ...chine control voltage RELAY EXTERNAL DC VOLTAGE MISSING 14 Normal control operation Control is ready output and acknowledgment are high 15 Control voltage is switched off externally EMERGENCY STOP 16 After switching on the machine control voltage again the error message can be cleared and then the control operates normally 17 After detecting a fault the control switches off the control is ready ou...

Page 508: ...ithin which the control is ready acknowledgment on X42 4 must go to zero t 380 ms If exceeded EMERGENCY STOP DEFECTIVE 4 Recognition of the acknowledgment and setting of X41 34 t 20 ms 5 Waiting for machine control voltage RELAY EXTERNAL DC VOLTAGE MISSING 6 Normal control operation Control is ready output and acknowledgment are high 7 Control voltage is switched off externally EMERGENCY STOP 8 Af...

Page 509: ...December 2001 Monitoring Functions 6 179 ...

Page 510: ...s 4 Nominal speed value always G code at every TOOL CALL 5 Nominal speed value always no G code 6 Same as 3 but with servo controlled spindle for oriented spindle stop 7 Same as 4 but with servo controlled spindle for oriented spindle stop 8 Same as 5 but with servo controlled spindle for oriented spindle stop 6 12 1 Position Encoder of the Spindle Analog and digital spindles can be driven in a cl...

Page 511: ... inputs X1 to X6 35 to 38 Position encoder inputs X35 to X38 MP111 0 Position encoder input for the first spindle MP111 1 Position encoder input for the second spindle MP3142 Line count of the spindle position encoder Input 100 to 9 999 lines MP3143 Mounting configuration of the spindle position encoder Input 0 Position encoder immediately on the first spindle 1 Position encoder via transmission r...

Page 512: ... servo lag and distance to go are displayed between 2879 912 and 2879 912 Format 0 001 If MP3010 6 no closed loop spindle then all coordinates are read as zero During operation under open loop control M03 M04 active or M05 and open position control loop the nominal value is considered to be the actual value The following error and distance to go are considered to be zero Call PS B W D K Target add...

Page 513: ...s the limit value for a certain time the DSP error message C380 Motor spindle 1 2 not controllable appears TNC with integral spindle DSP At lower speeds high frequency spindles only have a low amount of torque If such a spindle is having its speeds controlled the tool changer may slightly twist the spindle causing the limit of current to be exceeded This leads to the above error message 7 7 7 7 In...

Page 514: ...he PLC To ensure compatibility D604 is preassigned with 99 999 999 after control switch on or after an interruption in the PLC scan Analog spindles The nominal speed value of the motor is output as an analog dc voltage of 10 V at connection X8 or X9 Digital spindles The nominal speed value is transferred to the internal speed controller TNC Maximum spindle speed TNC 426 CB TNC 430 CA 100 000 rpm T...

Page 515: ... 7 With MP3415 define the overshoot behavior for every operating mode Set MP3415 0 so that only one overshoot is visible If the nominal speed value is in the acceleration or deceleration ramp then M4001 is reset This also applies if the speed is changed with the override potentiometer If the nominal speed value is output as zero M4002 is set MP3411 0 7 Ramp gradient of the spindle with M03 and M04...

Page 516: ...T appears With M4014 you can reverse the direction of rotation in order to adjust the transmission for horizontal or vertical spindles for example The polarity of the nominal spindle speed is inverted M4019 reverses the counting direction of the spindle MP3130 Polarity of the nominal spindle speed Input 0 M03 positive M04 negative 1 M03 negative M04 positive 2 M03 and M04 positive 4 M03 and M04 ne...

Page 517: ...as a programmed speed If an impermissible speed is programmed M4004 is set and the error message WRONG RPM is displayed MP3510 0 7 Rated speed for the gear ranges 1 to 8 Input 0 to 99 999 999 rpm MP3210 0 7 Analog nominal spindle voltage at rated speed for the gear ranges 1 to 8 Input 0 to 100 000 V MP3210 0 7 Digital spindle motor revolutions at rated speed for the gear ranges 1 to 8 Input 0 to 1...

Page 518: ...ary for example for horizontal vertical spindles The programmed speed is saved by the NC in D356 and D756 7 7 7 7 Enter a speed in D756 and a gear range in W256 The speed must lie within the speed range of the gear 7 7 7 7 With M4134 activate your entries in D756 and W256 7 7 7 7 After the NC has reset M4134 change the gear and report with M4090 that the gear shift has been completed A changing no...

Page 519: ...0 001 rpm NC PLC NC PLC M4009 Counterclockwise spindle rotation for gear change PLC PLC M4010 Clockwise spindle rotation for gear change PLC PLC M4070 Strobe signal for gear code NC NC M4090 Acknowledgment of gear change completed PLC PLC M4134 Activation of a gear range and speed through the PLC PLC NC M4547 T and G strobes with TOOL CALL NC NC ...

Page 520: ...tions either in 1 steps or according to a nonlinear characteristic curve 7 7 7 7 With MP7620 bit 3 select the mode of the override Value range in W492 and W764 n 1 steps 1 to 150 n Nonlinear characteristic curve In the lowest range 0 01 steps are available Beginning with a value of 2 5 the step is 0 75 Example Two gear ranges for an analog spindle n Gear range I 1500 rpm at 6 V MP3210 0 6 MP3510 0...

Page 521: ...Input 0 to 99 999 999 rpm MP7620 Feed rate override and spindle speed override Input xxxxxxx Bit 3 Feed rate override and spindle speed override in 1 increments or according to a nonlinear characteristic curve 0 1 steps 1 Nonlinear characteristic curve Set Reset W492 Percentage for spindle override NC to PLC NC NC W764 Percentage for spindle override PLC to NC NC PLC NC PLC ...

Page 522: ...ue until power limiting takes effect can be reduced with torque limiting in order to keep the mechanics of the machine from becoming overloaded The torque can be calculated for any speed M Torque P Power n Speed 7 7 7 7 Enter the maximum power for the spindle in MP2393 x 7 7 7 7 Enter the maximum torque for the spindle in MP2397 x MP2393 Power limiting of spindle motor Input 0 No power limit 0 1 t...

Page 523: ...pindle 6 193 Oversized motor Normal sized motor Power limit n P n M Oversized motor Motor with power limit M n Motor with power limit Torque limit Motor with power and torque limit Motor with power and torque limiting ...

Page 524: ...ed is rounded off to the next standard value by the NC and given in S code as per ISO 6983 see S code table below Speeds of 0 to 9000 rpm are possible 7 7 7 7 Specify in MP3020 the speed range and the speed increment The S code for the minimum speed is saved in W1008 Example Minimum speed 1 rpm S code 20 Maximum speed 1000 rpm S code 80 Speed increment 2 MP3020 20802 W1008 20 MP3020 Speed range fo...

Page 525: ... S 11 0 355 S 52 40 S 94 5000 S 12 0 4 S 53 45 S 95 5600 S 13 0 45 S 54 50 S 96 6300 S 14 0 5 S 55 56 S 97 7100 S 15 0 56 S 56 63 S 98 8000 S 16 0 63 S 57 71 S 99 9000 S 17 0 71 S 58 80 S 18 0 8 S 59 90 S 19 0 9 S 60 100 S 20 1 S 61 112 S 21 1 12 S 62 125 S 22 1 25 S 63 140 S 23 1 4 S 64 160 S 24 1 6 S 65 180 S 25 1 8 S 66 200 S 26 2 S 67 224 S 27 2 24 S 68 250 S 28 2 5 S 69 280 S 29 2 8 S 70 315 ...

Page 526: ...or in the column Motor model TYPE UASM in the column Encoder line count STR the value 0 in the column Type of encoder SYS the value 0 and in the column Maximum temperature C T MAX the value 255 7 7 7 7 The machine parameters for current controller MP24xx and speed controller MP25xx MP 26xx are nonfunctional 7 7 7 7 The acceleration and breaking ramp MP341x must be set so that the maximum current i...

Page 527: ...e strategies are also effective during a power fail and with M05 if the brake ramp set in MP3411 and MP3412 is steeper than the brake ramp which would result from the strategies Inverters with regenerative power supplies usually do not develop problems if they are switched off The main concern here is for the mechanics of the machine Problems with inverters with braking resistors can arise if the ...

Page 528: ...le in an emergency stop Input 0 01 to 5 00 s 0 Function inactive MP2361 Time constant for braking the first spindle in an emergency stop Input 0 01 to 5 00 s 0 Function inactive MP2590 0 8 Braking ramp for axes 1 to 8 or the second spindle in an emergency stop Input 0 1 to 999 9 rpm ms 0 Function inactive MP2591 Braking ramp for the first spindle in an emergency stop Input 0 1 to 999 9 rpm ms 0 Fu...

Page 529: ...UV 150 UR 2xx 650 V Braking during power fail For the LE 426 M with spindle DSP and the LE 430 M during a power fail the SH1B signal at X6 is maintained for 3 seconds to allow the spindle to decelerate At the same time the control tries to reset the PLC outputs 7 7 7 7 If you are using an additional braking resistor e g UP 110 in connection with an inverter with regenerative power supply calculate...

Page 530: ...elta connection MP2395 Maximum power for braking the first spindle in a power failure Input 0 1 to 3000 000 kW 0 Braking power is not limited MP2395 0 Wye connection MP2395 1 Delta connection Note If after entry of a value in MP2391 x or MP2395 x the mechanics are overloaded by the braking process lower the value in MP2391 x or MP2395 x until you have found an optimum between braking time and mech...

Page 531: ...le orientation is started with an M function e g M19 you must activate the oriented spindle stop in the PLC In MP7442 enter the number of the M function e g 19 which will trigger the oriented spindle stop during the machining cycles If MP7442 0 no oriented spindle stop the error message ORIENTATION not permitted appears when a cycle which uses oriented spindle stop is called The spindle orientatio...

Page 532: ...le stop as soon as the positioning window is reached You can compensate a maladjustment resulting from mounting the rotary encoder 7 7 7 7 In MP3430 enter the offset between the nominal and actual position of the reference mark The offset is then compensated during orientation After the spindle is switched on the NC evaluates the reference mark even if the position control loop is not closed M4018...

Page 533: ... additional preset if there is a value from CYCL DEF 13 PS B W D K Speed 1 1000 rpm 0 MP3520 1 is assumed PS B W D K Direction of rotation 1 Negative direction M04 0 Direction of the shortest path 1 Positive direction M03 2 Same as 1 but angle from CYCL DEF 13 3 Same as 0 but angle from CYCL DEF 13 4 Same as 1 but angle from CYCL DEF 13 CM 9171 Error recognition Set Reset M4000 Spindle in position...

Page 534: ...e t M19 MP3412 1 MP3412 1 0 MP3440 x MP3415 1 S rpm Programmed speed Speed for orientation Target position Distance to target position t M05 M19 0 MP3412 0 MP3412 1 MP3440 x S rpm Programmed speed Speed for orientation Target position Stand still Orienting a stationary spindle ...

Page 535: ...ximity switch with M4011 The spindle can be oriented through a proximity switch 7 7 7 7 Set M4011 Then the spindle is moved in the direction from M4013 and at the speed from MP3520 0 The spindle is stopped as soon as you reset M4011 The current positioning value is shown in the status window MP3520 0 Speed activation through marker M4011 Input 0 to 99 999 999 rpm Offset compensation only analog sp...

Page 536: ... spindle ramps have differing gradients the spindle follows the slower ramp Example Speed s 1000 rpm 1 8 V MP3411 x 0 05 V ms In this example the spindle was braked 36 ms before reaching the hole depth Delay times permit an optimum adjustment of the floating tap holder You can delay the switch off 7 7 7 7 In MP7120 2 enter a spindle slow down time The delay cannot last longer than 30 ms before rea...

Page 537: ...ng tapping Input 0 to 150 MP7110 1 Maximum for feed rate override during tapping Input 0 to 150 MP7120 0 Dwell time for reversal of spindle rotational direction Input 0 to 65 535 s MP7120 2 Spindle slow down time after reaching the hole depth Input 0 to 65 535 s F 0 S 0 M03 M05 M04 M4092 M03 M4005 M04 M4006 M05 M4007 M4030 MP3411 x MP7120 0 MP3412 2 MP3412 0 MP7120 2 Dwell time from CYCL DEF 2 3 3...

Page 538: ... rate ramps cannot be synchronized 7 7 7 7 Enter the advanced switching time of the spindle in MP7120 1 The dwell time for rotational direction reversal MP7120 0 and the programmed dwell time have the same effect as the nominal speed value output MP7120 1 Advanced switching time of the spindle during tapping with coded spindle speed output Input 0 to 65 535 s 0 F 0 S M03 M05 M04 M4092 M4030 MP7120...

Page 539: ...d so that the spindle runs for about 1 3 of the tapping time at a constant speed During tapping the position of the tool axis tracks the actual position of the spindle Please note that the use of IPC and acceleration feedforward control for the tool axis makes the tool axis sensitive to fluctuations in spindle speed caused for example by gear transmission If this happens the tool axis starts to ru...

Page 540: ...x Define the acceleration and braking process of the spindle during rigid tapping 7 7 7 7 In MP3412 3 enter a multiplier for MP3411 x 7 7 7 7 With MP3415 3 define the overshoot behavior of the spindle 7 7 7 7 With MP7130 define the run in behavior of the spindle 0 F 0 S M05 M4092 M4030 M4031 M4012 Positioning window reached MP7150 Ramp from MP3412 3 Oriented stop Oriented stop Start of cycle End o...

Page 541: ... is not limited 1 Spindle speed is limited so that it runs with constant speed approx 1 3 of the time Bit 2 Spindle in position feedback control 0 Spindle operated without position feedback control 1 Spindle operated with position feedback control Bit 3 IPC and acceleration feedforward control 0 Active 1 Not active Cycle 18 With Cycle 18 the tool axis tracks the actual position of the spindle The ...

Page 542: ...P2561 7 7 7 7 If required in MP2531 0 1 enter the PT2 second order time delay element 7 7 7 7 If required enter in MP2541 and MP2551 the band rejection filter damping and the center frequency MP2501 0 1 Proportional factor of the spindle speed controller for wye and delta connection Input 0 to 100 000 000 000 As MP2511 0 1 Integral action factor of the spindle speed controller for wye and delta co...

Page 543: ...03 is reached at maximum speed The current gain is interpolated linearly between standstill and maximum speed If you enter the value zero in MP2403 then the current gain from MP2401 is effective for the entire speed range MP2401 Gain for the spindle current controller at standstill Input 0 00 to 9999 99 V A 0 Controller disable MP2403 Gain for the spindle current controller at maximum speed Input ...

Page 544: ...onnection Index 1 for delta connection You can therefore switch to the optimum setting for the speed 7 7 7 7 Activate with Module 9163 the switchover between wye and delta connections As soon as Module 9163 is called the NC disables the spindle drive and activates the motor specifications and machine parameters for the selected connection You can check this with Module 9162 After the connection ha...

Page 545: ...etween spindle 1 and spindle 2 Commissioning the second spindle 7 7 7 7 Digital second spindle In MP10 deactivate one axis 7 7 7 7 Digital second spindle Set MP110 x MP112 x and MP120 x of the deactivated axis to zero 7 7 7 7 Machine parameters MP13010 to MP13520 are available for the second spindle In their functions and input ranges these parameters are identical with MP3010 to MP3520 for the fi...

Page 546: ...achine parameter block for the second spindle Input Function and input range are identical to MP3010 to MP3520 PWM output of the second spindle Machine parameters of the second spindle X51 MP2020 0 to MP2930 0 X52 MP2020 1 to MP2930 1 X53 MP2020 2 to MP2930 2 X54 MP2020 3 to MP2930 3 X55 MP2020 4 to MP2930 4 X56 MP2020 5 to MP2930 5 X57 MP2020 6 to MP2930 6 X58 MP2020 7 to MP2930 7 X59 MP2020 8 to...

Page 547: ...ferences in the machine parameters between spindles with and without integral spindle DSP See Current Controller Only TNC 426 PB M TNC 430 PA M on page 6 213 7 7 7 7 Enter MP2xxx x 0 in the corresponding machine parameters of the axis 7 7 7 7 The position controllers must be commissioned separately for the axis and spindle If you use only one position encoder for both the spindle and the axis the ...

Page 548: ...ding bits in W1040 7 7 7 7 Begin axis operation Switching from axis to spindle 7 7 7 7 Stop the axis 7 7 7 7 Clamp the axis 7 7 7 7 Open the position control loop of the axis by resetting the corresponding bits in W1040 7 7 7 7 With Module 9155 switch the feedback control for the axis off 7 7 7 7 Switch the spindle motor from the axis back to the spindle 7 7 7 7 With Module 9161 bit 15 release the...

Page 549: ...lues CM 9146 Error recognition Module 9155 Axis switchover from closed loop to open loop With Module 9155 you can switch an axis from the closed loop to the open loop state Call PS B W D K Axes bit encoded CM 9155 Error recognition Marker Value Meaning M4203 0 Actual position values saved or reestablished 1 Error code in W1022 W1022 1 Invalid mode 2 Invalid axes 24 Module was called in a spawn job...

Page 550: ...ch an axis from the open loop to the closed loop state An automatic actual to nominal value transfer is executed Call PS B W D K Axes bit encoded CM 9156 Error recognition Marker Value Meaning M4203 0 No error 1 Error code in W1022 W1022 2 Invalid axis number 21 Missing strobe or M4176 1 24 Module was called in a spawn job or submit job ...

Page 551: ...December 2001 Spindle 6 221 ...

Page 552: ...des of the TNC by editing the machine parameters The display screen is divided into separate windows The user can select the operating functions through soft keys Also see the User s Manual Foreground mode Background mode Program Text Display window for Graphics Status Structure and PLC PLC window Status window Soft keys ...

Page 553: ...nction for specific axes n NC program block values are defined with respect to fixed positions of the machine if the user programs M92 in the NC program 7 7 7 7 In MP950 x enter the distance between the machine datum and the machine referenced position The datum can be set either only by the Datum Setting soft key or only by the soft key plus the axis keys 7 7 7 7 With MP7296 define how the datum ...

Page 554: ...or Values with respect to the scale reference point MP7295 Disabling datum setting Format xxxxxxxxx Input Bits 0 to 8 correspond to axes 1 to 9 0 Not disabled 1 Disabled MP7296 Datum setting through axis keys Input 0 Datum can be set by axis keys and soft key 1 Datum can be set only by soft key Note As of NC software 280 476 01 you can save the values for MP950 x with the actual position capture k...

Page 555: ...setting which is suggested by the control during creation of the MP list To configure the screen saver 7 7 7 7 Enter in MP7392 the time in minutes after which the screen saver should activate itself Enter 0 to disable the screen saver MP7350 Window frames MP7351 Error messages MP7352 Machine operating mode display MP7352 0 Background MP7352 1 Text for operating mode MP7352 2 Dialog MP7353 Programm...

Page 556: ...phic window and pocket calculator MP7362 0 Background of graphic window and pocket calculator MP7362 1 Background of status display and keys of the pocket calculator MP7362 2 Status symbols and symbols of the pocket calculator c in cos MP7362 3 Status values and texts of the pocket calculator os in cos MP7363 Programming graphics MP7363 0 Background MP7363 1 Resolved contour MP7363 2 Subprograms a...

Page 557: ...oreground MP7366 2 Active line MP7366 3 Title bar MP7366 4 Scroll bar field MP7366 5 Scroll bar MP7366 6 14 Reserved MP7367 Large PLC window MP7367 0 Background MP7367 1 Color 1 MP7367 2 Color 2 MP7367 3 Color 3 MP7367 4 Color 4 MP7367 5 Color 5 MP7367 6 14 Colors 6 to 14 MP7392 Screen saver Input 1 to 99 min 0 No screen saver ...

Page 558: ... 4 MP7365 5 MP7365 6 MP7365 7 0000000 0203038 0003F00 03F3F00 03F003F 03F0000 030200C 03F3F3F 0FFFFFF 030200C 0003F00 0FF00FF 00000FF 0FF0000 0202020 00000FF MP7356 0 MP7356 1 MP7356 2 00C0800 03F2C18 03F280C 0FBFBFB 00000FF 00000FF MP7357 0 MP7357 1 0000000 03F3828 0FBFBFB 0000000 MP7366 0 MP7366 1 MP7366 2 MP7366 3 MP7366 4 MP7366 5 MP7366 6 MP7366 7 MP7366 8 MP7366 9 MP7366 10 MP7366 11 MP7366 ...

Page 559: ...es n Plan view n 3 D view Projection in three planes The display in three planes can be shown in 1st angle projection as preferred in Germany or in the American style 3rd angle projection 7 7 7 7 Select the type of projection with MP7310 bit 0 Rotation of the coordinate system You can rotate the coordinate system for graphic display by 90 if for example the Y axis is defined as tool axis 7 7 7 7 S...

Page 560: ... Position of the cursors In the display in three planes you can display the position of the cursor 7 7 7 7 Switch this function on with MP7310 bit 3 MP7310 Graphic display mode Format xxxx Input Bit 0 Projection in three planes 0 German preferred projection 1 US preferred projection Bit 1 Rotation of the coordinate system in the working plane by 90 0 No rotation 1 Rotation by 90 Bit 2 BLK form aft...

Page 561: ... 01 mm or 0 01 3 0 005 mm or 0 005 4 0 001 mm or 0 001 5 0 005 mm or 0 005 6 0 0001 mm or 0 0001 MP7289 Position display step for the spindle Input 0 0 1 1 0 05 2 0 01 3 0 005 4 0 001 5 0 0005 6 0 0001 Position display of the tool axis The tool length can be offset in the position display of the tool axis If it is the displayed position value then refers to the tool point 7 7 7 7 With MP7285 selec...

Page 562: ...ing zero or always along the shortest path 7 7 7 7 Select the type of positioning with MP7682 For bit 2 0 Programming with M126 For bit 2 1 You need not program with M126 MP810 0 8 Display mode for rotary axes and PLC auxiliary axes in axes 1 to 9 Input 0 0000 to 99 999 9999 0 Display 99 999 9999 1 Modulo value for display MP812 Activate software limit switches for tilting axes with modulo display...

Page 563: ... of axis coordinates format 0 001 mm Call SEE MODULE 9041 Module 9041 Reading of axis coordinates format 0 0001 mm Call PS K B W D Target address Dxxxx PS K B W D Type of coordinate 0 Actual values 1 Nominal values 2 Actual values in the reference system 3 Servo lag 4 Distance to go 5 Deflection measuring touch probe 6 Actual values in the shifted reference system datum shift 7 Reference values wi...

Page 564: ...rride percentage for free rotation n B518 Defining the free rotation function n B519 Traverse direction for free rotation n M4133 Starting and stopping the free rotation function If you set M4133 the NC takes the information from B518 and B519 and resets M4133 Free rotation with Module 9223 If a program has been started the module may be called only in conjunction with an M S T Q strobe Module 922...

Page 565: ...on function 0 Cancel the function 8 Free rotation for axis 4 16 Free rotation for axis 5 PLC PLC B519 Traverse direction for free rotation 0 Axis 4 and axis 5 8 Axis 4 axis 5 16 Axis 4 axis 5 24 Axis 4 and axis 5 PLC PLC W754 function for feed rate override for free rotation PLC PLC W566 568 Feed rate for free rotation Axis 4 to axis 5 PLC PLC ...

Page 566: ...rding to a nonlinear characteristic curve 7 7 7 7 With MP7620 bit 3 select the mode of the override Value range in W494 and W766 n 1 steps 1 to 150 n Nonlinear characteristic curve 0 to 15 000 In the lowest range 0 01 steps are available Beginning with a value of 2 5 the step is 0 75 In the manual modes of operation the axis feed rate is shown instead of the contouring feed rate You can choose bet...

Page 567: ...e and spindle speed override in 1 increments or according to a nonlinear characteristic curve 0 1 steps 1 Nonlinear characteristic curve Bit 4 Non functional Bit 5 Reserved Bit 6 Non functional Feed rate for rotary axes The TNC interprets the programmed feed rate for a rotary axis in degrees per minute The contour feed rate depends on the distance of the tool center from the center of the rotary a...

Page 568: ...output for the spindle The programmed spindle speed continues to be displayed At the same time M03 M04 or M05 are highlighted The nominal speed value is zero Other M functions are shown in the PLC window Set Reset M4005 Status display and nominal speed value output for M03 PLC PLC M4006 Status display and nominal speed value output for M04 PLC PLC M4007 Status display M05 and spindle stop PLC PLC ...

Page 569: ... delete them Module 9088 Displaying the M functions Call PS B W D K Number of the M function to be displayed PS B W D K Mode 1 Delete all M functions in the status window 0 Delete M function 1 Display M function CM 9088 Error recognition Marker Value Meaning M4203 0 M function displayed or deleted 1 Error code in W1022 W1022 1 Invalid M function number 2 Invalid mode number ...

Page 570: ...ntrol in operation The control in operation symbol can be set only if it is not already being displayed by the NC since the NC has priority over the PLC If the symbol is being displayed by the NC it cannot be erased M4176 is not influenced by the display of the control in operation symbol through the PLC Call PS B W D K Command code 0 Erase the control in operation symbol 1 Display the control in ...

Page 571: ...am is selected and M02 M30 and END PGM occur 2 Erase the status display and tool data when a program is selected 3 Erase the status display and tool data when a program is selected and in the event of M02 M30 END PGM 4 Erase the status display and Q parameters when a program is selected 5 Erase the status display and Q parameters when a program is selected and in the event of M02 M30 END PGM 6 Era...

Page 572: ...tive 2 Directory external screen active 3 MP editor active 4 PLC editor active 3 Machine mode in background 0 None main operating mode active 1 MOD active 2 Directory external screen active 3 Tool table selected as of 280 472 xx 4 Pocket table selected as of 280 472 xx 4 Displayed screen window Bit encoded Bits 0 to 7 Editing screen Bit 0 1 Editing screen is displayed Bit 1 1 Window mode active Bi...

Page 573: ...INPUT 0 to 8 Axes 1 to 9 9 Handwheel axis 1 None or more than one Axes 1 to 9 10 Handwheel axis bit encoded Axis 1 to 9 Handwheel interpolation factor 11 12 13 14 15 X key Y key Z key IV key V key 0 to 10 16 Input format of the MDI file 0 H conversational NC PGM 1 I file ISO NC PGM 17 Display format 0 MM 1 INCHES 18 Working plane Bit 0 1 Tilting is active Bit 1 1 Tilting is selected for manual ope...

Page 574: ...ble editor not active 1001 Pallet table only in a spawn job or submit job 0 Active line in the pallet table 1 Pallet table not active 1002 Status of pallet processing 1 Main program is not a pallet table 0 Processing was not started 1 NC program is selected but not started 2 NC program was started 3 Pallet change macro was started 4 Macro from the PALEPILOG entry in the NCMAKRO SYS was started 5 P...

Page 575: ...P7281 Depiction of the NC program Input 0 All blocks completely 1 Current block completely others line by line 2 All blocks line by line complete block when editing Checking the NC program during editing The control checks an NC program while editing it The duration depends on the number of lines to be checked Errors which occur after the defined line number are not recognized during editing 7 7 7...

Page 576: ...rror from FN14 Bit 5 Tool management Bit 6 Programming error Bit 7 Program selection preparation Bit 8 Pallet administration Bit 9 Emergency stop PL B W D Help number 1 No help number PL B W D Block number in the NC program PL B W D Additional information In the tool management error class Tool number Canceling an NC Program An NC macro can be called automatically if an NC program was cancelled by...

Page 577: ... mode and use PGM MGT to activate the NC program or pallet table to be processed No current error messages are allowed 7 7 7 7 Press the AUTOSTART soft key 7 7 7 7 Enter the date and time at which the machine is to be switched on 7 7 7 7 Set M4586 for the PLC to enable the autostart function If the PLC does not enable the function the error message Autostart not enabled appears 7 7 7 7 Activate th...

Page 578: ...ert the logo with the HEIDENHAIN conversion tool Bmp2Logo from BMP format to VEC format The tool also creates a SYS file 7 7 7 7 The two files must be given the names LOGO SYS and LOGO VEC 7 7 7 7 On the TNC create a new directory named PLC LOGO 7 7 7 7 Move LOGO VEC to the PLC LOGO directory 7 7 7 7 Move LOGO SYS to the main directory PLC Note Your logo must exist in 16 color bitmap format The lo...

Page 579: ...ar during shutdown via soft key do not appear Call CM 9189 Error recognition Resetting the control Module 9279 Control reset Module 9279 carries out a control reset This means the control is shut down and then restarted the PLC cannot be run or only the control is shut down the PLC can still be run In either case no message is shown on the monitor to say that the control is being shut down Call PS...

Page 580: ...hown optionally or additionally 7 7 7 7 Configure the window display in the PLC program with Modules 9080 to 9083 9080 Clear small PLC window 9081 Interrogate status of the small PLC window 9082 Display a string in the small PLC window 9083 Display a bar diagram in the small PLC window Modules 9080 9082 9083 must be called in a submit job Modules 9080 9082 and 9083 are also in effect if the select...

Page 581: ...CM 9080 Error recognition Module 9081 Interrogating the status of the small PLC window With this module you can ascertain whether a small PLC window is being displayed Call CM 9081 PL B W D Status of the small PLC window Bit 0 1 A small window is in the selected screen background or foreground Bit 1 1 Small PLC window in the foreground Marker Value Meaning M4203 0 No error 1 Call was not in a subm...

Page 582: ...e character in the text except string end Is replaced by the ASCII character The character size is oriented to the size of the screen window or by the current operating mode and cannot be influenced Color two is the background color of the PLC window It cannot be used as foreground color If the specified color number is zero the text is shown in the same color as the character last shown If the fi...

Page 583: ...W D S String number or string 0 to 7 CM 9082 Error recognition Marker Value Meaning M4203 0 No error 1 Call was not in a submit or spawn job or line less than zero or greater than 1 or column less than 0 or greater than 37 or incorrect string number or no end of the string or the last characters of the string can no longer be displayed in the screen window ...

Page 584: ...fine the maximum length 150 the length is limited to 150 If the current length is 150 the length is limited to the maximum length Color zero uses the background color of the currently selected graphic MP736x 1 Color two is the background color of the PLC window It can be used for example for margin or scale graduation if they are not to be shown The color must be selected with MP735x according to ...

Page 585: ... special command charsize See Special commands on page 6 260 The specified position refers to the lower left corner of the first character The content of the PLC window is defined in a screen mask an ASCII file containing format instructions and special commands 7 7 7 7 In Module 9210 enter the name of the screen mask in order to activate the PLC window Mode 1 Mode 2 SMALL 17 lines 39 columns 0 y1...

Page 586: ...lay as a floating point Total number of digits including decimal point and algebraic sign 3 decimal places Always display the algebraic sign Note Integer variables in the TNC have a length of 32 bits Variable names Meaning B0 to B4095 PLC bytes integer W0 to W4094 PLC words integer D0 to D4092 PLC double words integer 0 1 M0 to M4999 PLC markers integer 0 1 I0 to I383 PLC inputs integer 0 1 O0 to ...

Page 587: ...3 Double Calibrated center of TT TT PNT1 3 Double Calibrated touch point 0 of TT TT PNT2 3 Double Calibrated touch point 1 of TT TT PNT3 3 Double Calibrated touch point 2 of TT TT PNT4 3 Double Calibrated touch point 3 of TT Settings for RS 232 RS232 FEBAUD String Baud rate FE on RS 232 RS232 EXT1BAUD String Baud rate EXT1 on RS 232 RS232 EXT1BAUD String Baud rate EXT2 on RS 232 RS232 LSV2BAUD Str...

Page 588: ...ACHINE LIMIT3MI 5 Double Neg limit switch group 3 MACHINE PRESET1 5 Double Preset values 1 MACHINE PRESET2 5 Double Preset values 2 MACHINE PRESET3 5 Double Preset values 3 MACHINE POSINC 5 Double MACHINE DRVOFFSET 5 Double MACHINE HANDW_FACTOR 5 Double Handwheel interp factor Settings for transformation of the machine reference system MATRANS PRESX1_ABC 3 Double MATRANS PRESY1_ABC 3 Double MATRAN...

Page 589: ... DISPLAY SCREEN Int DISPLAY FORMAT String MM INCH conversion Settings for the oscilloscope OSC AXIS1 String OSC TIMEBASE String OSC MODE String OSC TRGCHAN String OSC TRGTHRES Double OSC SLOPE String OSC PRETRIG String OSC FEED Double Miscellaneous MISC MDI String MISC OUTPRECISION String MISC TEACHINAXIS Int ...

Page 590: ...n the format string The current contents of the variable are displayed and can be changed i For B W D M S Define the field length in the format string A value can be entered in the empty field c For B W D M S TIME Define the field length in the format string otherwise the subsequent text may be overwritten if the field length varies due to a change in the numerical value The field content is updat...

Page 591: ...COLOUR f or COLOR f Sets the foreground color Value range for f 1 to 14 Default setting Color 11 The colors are defined in MP7367 See Color Setting on page 6 225 CURSOR ON OFF Switches the inversion highlighting on and off Default setting OFF CHARSIZE SMALL MEDIUM LARGE AUTO Defines the character size Split screen SMALL Large PLC window MEDIUM AUTO Character size depends on the window size Default...

Page 592: ...CE l Alternative to n Error number before the error text Position in the error queue is displayed n Alternative to l l has priority Error number before the error text Line number of the PET table is displayed s Three digit status field with the following information C CE possible S Message causes a stop E Message causes an EMERGENCY STOP F Resets the feed rate enabling 0 to 2 Priority REFRESH n Ti...

Page 593: ...re than once the previously opened table is closed At the end of the mask the table is automatically closed tableread line column Reads field contents from the table that has been opened with FILE With the c switch you can show the field contents of a table and update them cyclically Example CHARSIZE SMALL LINESTYLE SOLID FILE TNC P_PLATZ P COLOR 1 s tableread 0 P NR s tableread 2 P NR Mathematica...

Page 594: ...isplayable The C command printf requires a format that defines the length of the numerical field 7 7 7 7 Save this format in the mask file Otherwise the length of the input field depends on the coincidental content of the associated variable For the input function this format instruction is converted internally into a form suitable for the C command scanf printf flags digits1 digits2 1 conversion_...

Page 595: ...input field If the input value is syntactically incorrect or exceeds the numerical range of the assigned variable the error message ENTRY VALUE INCORRECT appears NOENT Redisplays the original content of the field and sets the highlight on the next input field If the input value begins with the algebraic sign or the sign is switched x If the field was already edited the last character of the entry ...

Page 596: ...B W D Status error 0 Mask opened mask erased 1 PLC window not yet ready again 1 Error If a faulty mask file was activated an error message appears in the PLC window Error message Meaning COMMAND LIMITER MISSING End of command not found UNKNOWN PARAMETER TOKEN Unknown code word UNKNOWN COMMAND Unknown command STRING FORMAT ERROR Impermissible format instruction STRING NOT CLOSED String end missing ...

Page 597: ...creen mask is being activated 3 Screen mask could not be activated 1 Horizontal size 0 No PLC window displayed 0 Number of pixels 2 Vertical size 0 No PLC window displayed 0 Number of pixels 3 Displayed page Displayed page of the screen mask 4 Current field 0 No cursor or the cursor is not located in a field identified with s xxx e xxx or i xxx 0 Return of the value xxx of a field identified with ...

Page 598: ...23 5A Z 91 D1 Ñ 24 5B 92 Æ D2 Ò 25 5C 93 ô D3 Ó 26 5D 94 ö D4 Ô 27 5E 95 ò D5 Õ 28 5F _ 96 Û D6 Ö 29 60 97 ù D7 Œ 2A 61 a 98 Ÿ D8 Ø 2B 62 b 99 Ö D9 Ù 2C 63 c 9A Ü DA Ú 2D 64 d 9B 9F DB Û 2E 65 e A0 Á DC Ü 2F 66 f A1 DD Ÿ 30 0 67 g A2 Ó DE SPACE 31 1 68 h A3 Ú DF ß 32 2 69 i A4 ñ E0 à 33 3 6A j A5 Ñ E1 á 34 4 6B k A6 O E2 â 35 5 6C l A7 A E3 ã 36 6 6D m A8 AD E4 ä 37 7 6E n AE E5 å 38 8 6F o AF E6 ...

Page 599: ...A z BA F1 ñ 44 D 7B BB F2 ò 45 E 7C BC F3 ó 46 F 7D BD F4 ô 47 G 7E BE F5 õ 48 H 7F BF F6 ö 49 I 80 C0 À F7 œ 4A J 81 ü C1 Á F8 ø 4B K 82 C2  F9 ù 4C L 83 C3 à FA ú 4D M 84 Ä C4 Ä FB û 4E N 85 À C5 Å FC ü 4F O 86 Å C6 Æ FD ÿ 50 P 87 Ç C7 Ç FE SPACE 51 Q 88 Ê C8 È FF SPACE 52 R 89 Ë C9 É 53 S 8A È CA Ê Nr Character Nr Character Nr Character Nr Character ...

Page 600: ... D0 24 5A Z 90 É D1 Ñ 25 5B 91 D2 Ò 26 5C 92 Æ D3 Ó 27 5D 93 ô D4 Ô 28 5E 94 ö D5 Õ 29 5F _ 95 ò D6 Ö 2A 60 96 Û D7 Œ 2B 61 a 97 ù D8 Ø 2C 62 b 98 Ÿ D9 Ù 2D 63 c 99 Ö DA Ú 2E 64 d 9A Ü DB Û 2F 65 e 9B 9F DC Ü 30 0 66 f A0 Á DD Ÿ 31 1 67 g A1 DE 32 2 68 h A2 Ó DF ß 33 3 69 i A3 Ú E0 à 34 4 6A j A4 ñ E1 á 35 5 6B k A5 Ñ E2 â 36 6 6C l A6 O E3 ã 37 7 6D m A7 A E4 ä 38 8 6E n A8 AD E5 å 39 9 6F o AE E...

Page 601: ...ï 43 C 79 y B8 F0 44 D 7A z B9 F1 ñ 45 E 7B BA F2 ò 46 F 7C BB F3 ó 47 G 7D BC BE F4 ô 48 H 7E BF F5 õ 49 I 7F C0 À F6 ö 4A J 80 Ç C1 Á F7 œ 4B K 81 ü C2  F8 ø 4C L 82 C3 à F9 ù 4D M 83 C4 Ä FA ú 4E N 84 Ä C5 Å FB û 4F O 85 À C6 Æ FC ü 50 P 86 Å C7 Ç FD ÿ 51 Q 87 Ç C8 È FE 52 R 88 Ê C9 É FF Nr Character Nr Character Nr Character Nr Character ...

Page 602: ... 67 G 20 SPACE 38 8 50 P 68 H 21 39 9 51 Q 69 I 22 3A 52 R 6A J 23 3B 53 S 6B K 24 3C 54 T 6C L 25 3D 55 U 6D M 26 3E 56 V 6E N 27 3F 57 W 6F O 28 40 58 X 70 P 29 41 A 59 Y 71 Q 2A 42 B 5A Z 72 R 2B 43 C 5B 73 S 2C 44 D 5C 74 T 2D 45 E 5D 75 u 2E 46 F 5E 76 v 2F 47 G 5F _ 77 w 30 0 48 H 60 78 x 31 1 49 I 61 a 79 y 32 2 4A J 62 b 7A z 33 3 4B K 63 c 7B FF 34 4 4C L 64 D ...

Page 603: ...orks like the screen management key Display delete PLC soft key row 7 7 7 7 In the system file PLC PLCSOFTK SYS enter the names and path of the required soft key files With the sequence of your entries you specify the soft key number Line 0 soft key number 0 etc One soft key level can consist of up to four soft key rows i e 32 soft keys per level 7 7 7 7 When calling the module indicate the row to...

Page 604: ...elete soft key level KF Address of soft key selection PS B W D K Soft key row 0 to 3 Soft key row to be displayed PS B W D K Soft key mode 0 Soft key row for displayed PLC window 1 Soft key row in current operating mode 2 Append soft key row to NC soft keys as of 280 472 xx CM 9200 Error recognition Marker Value Meaning M4203 0 No error 1 Error code in W1022 W1022 1 Incorrect transfer parameters e...

Page 605: ...g mode 2 Append soft key to NC soft key CM 9201 Error recognition Select deselect PLC soft keys and PLC windows Module 9202 Select deselect PLC soft keys and PLC windows With this Module 9202 you activate the display with PLC windows or the PLC soft key display This module works like the screen management key Call PS B W D K Display mode 0 PLC soft key window deselected 1 Small PLC soft key window...

Page 606: ...667 7 7 7 7 Create an HLP file With machine commands 7 7 7 7 Define at the beginning of the line a numerical value in the format xxxx If the user moves the cursor to a line with a numerical value this number is displayed in W270 In the PLC program you can interrogate W270 and execute the command If the cursor is moved to a line without a valid numerical value the value 2 is entered in W270 If no H...

Page 607: ... cause and correction of the error To make such information available for PLC error messages as well you must save the texts in files 7 7 7 7 Create two files Texts under the heading Cause of Error Texts under the heading Corrective Action 7 7 7 7 Define the names of the files in the system file OEM SYS with the commands PLCERRREASON cause of error PLCERRFIX corrective action 7 7 7 7 Save the file...

Page 608: ...SEQUENCE 7 7 7 7 Activate the pop up window with Module 9215 The user can make his selections by using the cursor keys and the ENTER key or the hot keys The module returns the line number of the selected menu item Line 1 number 0 7 7 7 7 Transfer the selection list to the module in a file You separate the individual entries with LF If you transfer the file names without paths the TNC looks for the...

Page 609: ...W D K Mode Bit 0 Bit 1 Character size 00 Automatic 01 Small character 10 Medium character 11 Large character Bit 2 Frame 0 With frame 1 Without frame Bit 3 Heading 0 Display heading 1 Do not display heading Bit 4 Positioning error 0 No hot keys 1 Hot keys 0 to 9 and A to Z before menu items Bit 5 Vertical Horizontal 0 Vertical arrangement 1 Horizontal arrangement bit 4 0 CM 9215 PL B W D Selected ...

Page 610: ...f block E end of block M functions Meaning Effectiveness M00 Program STOP Spindle STOP Coolant OFF E M01 Optional program STOP E M02 Program STOP Spindle STOP Coolant OFF possible clearing of the status displaya go to block 1 E M03 Spindle ON clockwise A M04 Spindle ON counterclockwise A M05 Spindle STOP E M06 Tool change Program STOPb Spindle STOP E M07 A M08 Coolant ON A M09 Coolant OFF E M10 E ...

Page 611: ...has expired A M102 Reset M101 E M103 Reduce feed rate during plunging to factor F A M104 Reactivate most recently defined datum A M105 Machine with second kV factor A M106 Machine with first kV factor A M107 Suppress error message for replacement tools A M108 Reset M107 E M109 Constant contouring speed on the tool cutting edge increasing and decreasing the feed rate A M110 Constant contouring spee...

Page 612: ...s A M139 A M140 Retraction from the contour in the positive tool axis direction A M141 Suppress touch probe monitoring A M142 Delete modal program information A M143 Delete basic rotation A M144 Compensating the machine s kinematic configuration for ACTUAL NOMINAL positions at end of block A M145 Reset M144 E M146 Save the current geometry information in a temporary file tool oriented pallet machi...

Page 613: ...run M4072 is reset by the NC The M functions M00 to M99 can also be transferred decoded to the markers M1900 to M1999 7 7 7 7 Activate this function with M4571 Note M functions greater than 99 are not transferred to the PLC They have a fixed meaning for the NC to activate certain functions Set Reset W260 Code for M functions NC NC M4072 Strobe signal for M functions NC NC M4092 Acknowledgment of M...

Page 614: ...gated M function is then set until the module is called again even if the NC program has finished Call PS B W D K Number of the M function 90 to 199 CM 9061 PL B W D Status 0 M function was not active 1 M function was active Error recognition Program stop with M functions In the PROGRAM RUN SINGLE BLOCK and the PROGRAM RUN FULL SEQUENCE operating modes the next NC block is not run until you have r...

Page 615: ...fective modally as a cycle call i e in each subsequent positioning block the fixed cycle last programmed is called M89 is cancelled by M99 or by a CYCL CALL block If M89 is not defined as a modal cycle call it is transferred to the PLC as a normal M function at the beginning of the block Reduced feed rate of tool axis with M103 With M103 F you can reduce the contouring feed rate for motion in the ...

Page 616: ...it 4 Reduced feed rate in the tool axis with M103 0 Function is not in effect 1 Function is effective Bit 5 Reserved Bit 6 Automatic activation of M134 0 M134 must be activated in the NC program 1 M134 is automatically activated when an NC program is selected Error messages during cycle call Before execution of a fixed cycle the spindle must be started with M3 or M4 If this is not the case the err...

Page 617: ...ions that call an NC macro are not sent to the PLC To synchronize the current machine status and the look ahead calculation with an NC macro call See NCMACRO SYS on page 7 44 For behavior during a block scan See Instructions in MGROUPS SYS on page 6 297 With FN17 SYSWRITE ID420 NR0 IDX0 0 all coordinate transformations e g cycles 7 8 10 11 19 performed in the NC macro become globally effective Wit...

Page 618: ... the large PLC window The PLC error message table PET consists of the following columns to which you can assign special attributes n NR Line number in the table The modules select the PLC error message by assigning the line number n ERROR With the HELP key you can display information on the error messages See Help on page 6 276 There are three ways to specify the error text Direct entry of the err...

Page 619: ...e of which up to eight can be from the string memory Blinking error message Is displayed without entry in the queue Error number 1 Blinking error message EMERGENCY STOP PLC is displayed even if no PET table was defined Error number not equal to 1 and no PET table selected Blinking error message PLC NO ERROR TABLE SELECTED Call PS B W D K Line no PET table 0 to 999 Line number 1 Blinking error mess...

Page 620: ... 3 Number of error messages in the PET table CM 9087 PL B W D Status error code For code 1 to 999 0 No error message with the number or message deleted 1 Line number does not exist Bit 0 PLC error message is displayed Bit 1 PLC error message in queue For code 2 0 Number of the displayed error 1 No error in the PET table For code 3 0 Number of errors in the PET table Error recognition Marker Value ...

Page 621: ...age 6 346 Pocket milling Cycles 4 and 5 7 7 7 7 In MP7430 enter the overlap factor for roughing out a rectangular or circular pocket Infeed MP7430 cutter radius MP7430 Overlap factor for pocket milling Input 0 001 to 1 414 Cycles for milling pockets with combined contours Cycles 6 14 15 16 7 7 7 7 With MP7420 specify Bit 0 The milling direction for channel milling Bit 1 The sequence for rough out ...

Page 622: ...t slightly MP7420 bit 2 0 The control clears the pocket separately because the paths of the tool center do not intersect Material will remain at inside corners MP7420 bit 2 1 The control clears the pockets together because the programmed contours intersect No material will remain at inside corners ...

Page 623: ...t depth Bit 4 Position after completion of the cycle 0 Tool moves to the same position as before the cycle was called 1 Tool moves only in the tool axis to the clearance height Scaling factor Cycle 11 7 7 7 7 In MP4710 enter the effective range of the scaling factor MP7410 Scaling cycle in two or three axes Input 0 Scaling cycle is effective in all three principal axes 1 Scaling cycle is effective...

Page 624: ...If you want these positioning commands to be calculated in the block scan 7 7 7 7 In MP951 x enter the absolute position with respect to the machine datum 7 7 7 7 Activate the calculation for the specific axes with MP7450 With flexible tool pocket coding in the central tool file See Tool Changer on page 6 400 the change of pocket number in the tool file must be prevented during block scan if the T...

Page 625: ...ve Bit 3 Interruption of block scan for STOP or M06 0 Interruption 1 No interruption Bit 4 Inclusion of programmed dwell time during the block scan 0 Include the dwell time 1 Do not include the dwell time Bit 5 Start of calculation for block scan 0 Start from block with cursor 1 Start from beginning of program Note The tool data cannot be correctly offset in the block scan if you change them in th...

Page 626: ...TUS the PLC shifted the datum or switched traverse ranges or spindles As of NC software 280 476 03 After RESTORE MACHINE STATUS the control checks whether the status set by the PLC agrees with the status calculated by the NC No error message appears if this is the case if for example another traverse range is selected in a tool change macro but the original traverse range is set at the end of the ...

Page 627: ...r S or G code to the PLC during block scan 1 Transfer S or G code to the PLC after block scan Bit 3 0 Transfer FN19 outputs to the PLC during block scan 1 Transfer last FN19 outputs to the PLC after block scan Instructions in MGROUPS SYS GROUP You divide M functions into groups After a block scan the last programmed M function in a group is transferred to the PLC Example GROUP M3 M4 M5 SPECIAL You...

Page 628: ...O the output sequence of the S T Q strobes after a block scan is specified in the MGROUPS SYS file HEIDENHAIN recommends that you avoid using these instructions NCMACRO TC M With an M function or during a TOOL CALL you can also call an NC program instead of a T strobe See Tool Changer on page 6 400 and See Calling an NC macro with an M function on page 6 287 The instruction NCMACRO prevents NC mac...

Page 629: ...December 2001 Display and Operation 6 299 ...

Page 630: ... MP7224 0 to disable soft keys of specific file types Disabling file types for editing Protected files cannot be edited or changed 7 7 7 7 Choose with MP7224 1 the files that you want to protect Protected files are displayed in the file overview with the color defined in MP7354 1 or MP7355 1 MP7224 0 Disabling soft keys for file types Format xxxxxxxx Input Bit 0 HEIDENHAIN programs H Bit 1 ISO pro...

Page 631: ...t the same time total number of users and files opened by the PLC and the NC 7 7 7 7 With Module 9290 transfer the name of the file to be selected Module 9290 Selecting a file In the PROGRAM RUN SINGLE BLOCK or PROGRAM RUN FULL SEQUENCE mode you can select a file Call PS B W D K S String number or file CM 9290 Error recognition Marker Value Meaning M4203 0 No error 1 Error code in W1022 W1022 2 In...

Page 632: ...you can use the PLC to read from and write to the current datum table See Tool Table Pocket Table on page 6 400 With FN17 and FN18 you can read and overwrite the values in the datum table OEM cycles MP7226 1 Size of the datum table Input 0 to 255 lines Reference for values in the datum table The values from the datum table can be interpreted with respect to the workpiece datum or to the machine da...

Page 633: ...ol oriented machining Field names The following types of fields are used in the pallet table n Mandatory fields Values must be entered n Optional fields Values can be entered They have a fixed predefined meaning for the NC n Freely definable fields You can display additional fields The names and meaning are defined as desired The entries are for information or you can interrogate and change them t...

Page 634: ...ed Optional fields Definition of the datum For pallet entries the values are referenced to the machine datum MP960 x For NC programs the values are referenced to the pallet datum Only the fields X Y and Z are used in the standard format SP X SP Y SP Z Tool oriented Optional fields Safe positions with FN18 SYSREAD these positions can be read in NC macros CTID Tool oriented If due to a tool change a...

Page 635: ...ed Line 1 A fixture is defined and a clearance height is specified The NC macro for changing the fixture is active Line 2 The fixture holds an unmachined part to be machined with NC program PART1 H workpiece oriented machining Line 3 The fixture holds a second unmachined part to be machined with NC program PART2 H tool oriented machining The active datum is offset from the pallet datum by the give...

Page 636: ...t table 0 Active pallet table cannot be edited 1 The active pallet can be edited in the PROGRAM RUN FULL SEQUENCE and PROGRAM RUN SINGLE BLOCK modes Bit 6 Display of pallet table and NC program 0 Both simultaneously in a split screen 1 Pallet table or NC program individually Module 9090 Selection of a line in the pallet table With this module you set the cursor on a particular line of the pallet t...

Page 637: ...tting in the datum table or pallet table NC macro for changing the tool during tool oriented machining A special tool change macro is required for tool oriented pallet machining This is defined through the keyword TCTOOLMODE in NCMACRO SYS This specific NC macro is called for tool oriented machining instead of the standard tool change macro If this specific NC macro is not defined in NCMACRO SYS a...

Page 638: ...e entry PALETT It can only be activated if the control is in the full sequence or single block mode a pallet table is selected and no macro or NC program is running Call PS B W D K Pallet number PS B W D K Line number CM 9280 Error recognition NC macro at the end of an NC program 7 7 7 7 In NCMACRO SYS use the entry PALEPILOG to define the complete path and name of the NC macro that is to be calle...

Page 639: ...EIDENHAIN programs or ISO programs are selected the error message NC PROGRAM NOT FOUND appears MP7226 0 Size of the pallet table Input 0 to 255 lines Module 9090 Assignment of a pallet table Call only in a submit job or spawn job Call PS B W D K Line number in pallet table CM 9090 PL B W D Error condition As of 280 470 01 0 Files were selected 1 Call was not in a submit or spawn job 2 Call during ...

Page 640: ...ype and change the format by using the soft key EDIT FORMAT If you have selected a prototype the structure commands of the individual columns are displayed n NAME Heading of the column Maximum 8 characters no longer than WIDTH Do not use any blanks n TYPE N Numerical input with in hexadecimal and in binary format C alphanumerical input n WIDTH Width of the column For TYPE N includes algebraic sign...

Page 641: ...nd not in the buffered mode If an error occurs the result is undefined The module provides the contents as a string Call PS D File handle from Module 9240 PS B W D K Line 0 to 65 535 PS B W D K S String number column name 0 to 15 PS B W D K S String number result 0 to 15 CM 9245 Error recognition Note The following modules must be called in a submit job or spawn job When entering the column names ...

Page 642: ...d not in the buffered mode If an error occurs the result is undefined The module provides the contents as an integer value Call PS D File handle from Module 9240 PS B W D K Line 0 to 65 535 PS B W D K S String number column name 0 to 15 CM 9255 PL B W D Result Error recognition Marker Value Meaning M4203 0 Field was read 1 Error code in W1022 W1022 See Module 9245 ...

Page 643: ...ring number column name 0 to 15 PS B W D K S String number contents to be written 0 to 15 CM 9246 Error recognition Marker Value Meaning M4203 0 Field was written to 1 Error code in W1022 W1022 1 Line does not exist in table 2 Incorrect file handle or table was opened in buffered mode 3 Impermissible string numbers 6 Table is write protected 7 Not a numerical field Module 9256 11 The transferred v...

Page 644: ...mn name and line number is overwritten This module can be used only for an integer Values with decimal places are written without the decimal point Call PS D File handle from Module 9240 PS B W D K Line 0 to 65 535 PS B W D K S String number column name 0 to 15 PS B W D K Numerical value to be written CM 9256 Error recognition Marker Value Meaning M4203 0 Field was written to 1 Error code in W1022...

Page 645: ... search for several suitable field entries Permissible SQL commands Example Search in a pallet table for the line with the NC program 1 H and the set datum X 10 String contents WHERE PAL PGM LIKE PGM AND NAME LIKE 1 H AND X 10 Call PS D File handle from Module 9240 PS B W D K Starting line 0 to 65 535 PS B W D K S String number of condition or string with condition 0 to 7 CM 9247 PL B W D Line tha...

Page 646: ...ill be shown to its end If you release all lines and columns for editing you can choose Whether lines can be deleted and inserted Whether the original table should be edited directly If you edit in the original table directly you cannot cancel the changes with Module 9251 If you do not edit directly in the original table and the PLC program is recompiled while the PLC editor is open the editor wil...

Page 647: ...e selected Bit 1 1 Edit in the original file if all lines and columns are selected Bit 2 0 Shown as a table Bit 2 1 Shown as a formula CM 9250 Error recognition Marker Value Meaning M4203 0 Editor was opened 1 Error code in W1022 W1022 1 First and last line do not define a meaningful range or incorrect value for mode was transferred 3 Impermissible string number 7 The module could not read from th...

Page 648: ... of the PLC editor on a defined line and column The line is defined relative to the starting line of Module 9250 The designated column must be defined in Module 9250 Call PS B W D K S String with column name PS B W D K Line CM 9252 Error recognition Marker Value Meaning M4203 0 Editor was opened 1 Error code in W1022 W1022 3 Incorrect value was transferred for mode 6 Changes could not be saved in ...

Page 649: ...ed EM in the submit job or spawn job all files opened for this process are closed After the file is opened Module 9240 always transfers a file handle The file handle is a serial number that can be used to select this file again in other modules To append data to an existing file set bit 0 1 reading and writing and bit 2 0 record oriented Call PS B W D K Mode Bit 0 0 Read only Bit 0 1 Read and writ...

Page 650: ...e end of the file the cursor is positioned to the beginning or end of the file respectively The addressing of the new position is relative to the beginning or end of the file or to the current position You can interrogate the current position by transferring the position value zero relative to the current position Call only in a submit job or spawn job Call PS D File handle Number from Module 9240...

Page 651: ... result is saved in a string The module reads up to the line break LF maximum 126 characters Call PS D File handle Number from Module 9240 PS B W D K String number with result 0 to 7 CM 9243 PL B W D Number of read bytes 0 Line has been read 0 File end has been reached 1 Error code in W1022 Error recognition Marker Value Meaning W1022 2 Incorrect file handle 3 Incorrect string number 7 File system...

Page 652: ... specified in the transfer string is overwritten If file is opened in record oriented mode n Processing time is longer n The data are saved immediately to the hard disk n Exactly one line is overwritten If there is a difference in length the following data is displaced by the difference Call PS D File handle Number from Module 9240 PS B W D K S String number source data 0 to 7 CM 9244 PL B W D Num...

Page 653: ...hould be the first available user parameter 7 7 7 7 Enter the input value 7230 01 in MP7330 0 If the user selects a user parameter a message appears on the screen You can specify this message 7 7 7 7 In the system file OEM SYS enter the name of the PLC dialog message file with the command PLCDIALOG 7 7 7 7 In MP7340 x enter the line number of the PLC dialog message to be displayed MP7330 0 15 Spec...

Page 654: ... PROGRAMMING AND EDITING and TEST RUN modes are operable You can select whether the PLC should be active MP7210 Programming station Input 0 Controlling and programming 1 Programming station with PLC active 2 Programming station with PLC inactive Code number Function 95148 Select the machine parameter list 807667 Select the PLC mode 857282 Reset the operating times 75368 Automatic offset adjustment...

Page 655: ...l languages 7 7 7 7 Save your dialog messages in permanently defined directories in the PLC partition These directories are PLC LANGUAGE CZECH DANISH DUTCH ENGLISH FINNISH GERMAN ITALIAN POLISH PORTUGUE SPANISH SWEDISH HUNGARIA RUSSIAN 7 7 7 7 With MP7230 1 3 switch to the desired language You can store PLC dialog message files PLC error message files and help files with identical file names in th...

Page 656: ...haracter Input 0 Decimal comma 1 Decimal period 6 13 27 Memory Test 7 7 7 7 With MP7690 you specify the memory that is to be tested during switch on The message MEMORY TEST is displayed for the duration of the test MP7690 MEMORY TEST during switch on Format xxx Input Bit 0 Test the RAM Bit 1 Test the EPROM Bit 2 Test the hard disk 0 MEMORY TEST during switch on 1 No MEMORY TEST during switch on 6 ...

Page 657: ...positioning blocks RR RL must not be entered in succession To avoid erroneous entries 7 7 7 7 Enter MP7246 1 to disable the input of paraxial positioning blocks MP7246 Disabling paraxial positioning blocks Input 0 Paraxial positioning block enabled 1 Paraxial positioning block disabled 6 13 30 Power Interrupted Message After the machine supply voltage is switched off the TNC displays the error mes...

Page 658: ...very minute during the run time When the control is switched off no more than one minute is lost The NC measures the time for TNCTIME MACHINETIME and PROGTIME For the operating times PLCTIME0 to PLCTIME7 7 7 7 7 Start with Module 9190 7 7 7 7 Stop with Module 9191 Except for TNCTIME all operating times are saved during a hard disk backup with the program TNCBACK See NC Software Exchange on page 2 ...

Page 659: ...t 2 Program run operating time 0 Do not reset 1 Reset MP7238 0 7 Dialog messages for PLC operating times 1 to 8 Input 0 to 4095 Dialog no from the file PLCDIALOG OEM SYS Module 9190 Starting the operating times You start one or more operating times Call PS B W D K PLC operating time Bits 0 to 7 represent PLC operating times 1 to 8 CM 9190 Error recognition Module 9191 Stopping the operating times ...

Page 660: ...e operating times You overwrite the current value of the operating time The old value is lost irretrievably The time for control on TNCTIME cannot be overwritten Transfer all values greater than 2 147 483 648 approx 69 years as negative numbers Call PS B W D K Number of the operating time 2 MACHINETIME 1 PROGTIME 0 to 7 PLCTIME0 to PLCTIME7 PS B W D K New time s CM 9193 Error recognition Marker Va...

Page 661: ... B W D K Number of the alarm markers CM 9194 Error recognition Module 9195 System time The TNC operates with UNIX system time The system time contains the number of seconds accumulated since 0 00 hours on January 1 1970 When the TNC is shipped it is calibrated for Universal Time also known as Greenwich Mean Time In MP7235 enter the time difference between the local time and Universal Time so that ...

Page 662: ...number 0 to 7 PS B W D K Format 0 DD MM YYYY hh mm ss 1 D MM YYYY h mm ss 2 D MM YYYY h mm 3 D MM YY h mm 4 YYYY MM DD hh mm ss 5 YYYY MM DD hh mm 6 YYYY MM DD h mm 7 YY MM DD h mm 8 DD MM YYYY 9 D MM YYYY 10 D MM YY 11 YYYY MM DD 12 YY MM DD 13 hh mm ss 14 h mm ss 15 h mm CM 9055 Error recognition MP7235 Time difference to Universal Time Greenwich Mean Time Input 23 to 23 hours 0 Universal Time G...

Page 663: ... message ERR Error message P PLC error message with the line number in the PLC error text file N NC error message with number KEY Key strokes STIBa ON Control in operation on OFF Control in operation off BLINK Control in operation symbol blinking INFO MAIN START Control model and NC software INFO MAIN FILE DEL Faulty files on the hard disk to be erased when started up INFO MAIN HDD Hard disk desig...

Page 664: ... area PLCFMASK Mask for file management in the PLC area EASYDIR Paths for standard file management TCHPATH Datum table for manual measurement SIMTAB Freely definable table in program test RUNTAB Freely definable table in program run KINTAB Active kinematic table PGMEND Information about the program end in program run Byte 0 1 00 01 Emergency stop 00 02 Positioning error 00 03 Programmed stop 00 04...

Page 665: ...TWARE 280476 10 Error 09 18 29 Mon Oct 09 2000 N 1 Power interruption Key 0x01AE CE 09 41 37 Mon Oct 09 2000 Error 09 41 40 Mon Oct 09 2000 P88 88 MPs being read Key 0x01F0 NC Start 09 41 46 Mon Oct 09 2000 Error 09 41 46 Mon Oct 09 2000 P93 93 Feed rate override Poti 0 Key 0x01F0 NC Start 09 41 48 Mon Oct 09 2000 Stib ON 09 41 57 Mon Oct 09 2000 Error 09 41 57 Mon Oct 09 2000 P93 93 Feed rate ove...

Page 666: ...entry PS B W D K S Log identifier 1 No entry PS B W D K Priority 0 Information 1 Warning 2 Error CM 9275 Error recognition Note Do not use Modules 9275 and 9276 in the PLC program as shipped Instead use it only for debugging Otherwise the processing times could be increased and the hard disk could be written to unnecessarily so that the log can no longer fulfill its function of recording keystroke...

Page 667: ...uble word PS B W D K Address of the first operand PS B W D K Number of operands PS B W D K S Log identifier 1 No entry PS B W D K Priority 0 Information 1 Warning 2 Error CM 9276 Error recognition Marker Value Meaning M4203 0 Entry was written 1 Error code in W1022 W1022 1 Invalid priority 2 Invalid identifier for operand name 3 Invalid first operand address 4 Sum of first operand address and numb...

Page 668: ...d soft keys n Module 9180 Simulation of NC keys n Module 9181 Disabling of individual keys n Module 9182 Re enabling of individual keys n Module 9183 Disabling groups of NC keys n Module 9184 Re enabling of groups of NC keys n Module 9186 Calling a soft key function n Module 9187 Status of a soft key function call With MP4020 bit 9 specify whether a simulated key should only be transmitted to the ...

Page 669: ...was not yet simulated max 16 entries in the keystroke queue are possible 1 For error see W1022 Error recognition Module 9181 Disable individual NC keys With this module you can disable individual NC keys If you press a disabled key marker M4577 is set Call PS B W D K Key code CM 9181 PL B W D Error status 0 NC key disabled 1 For error see W1022 Error recognition Marker Value Meaning M4203 0 NC key...

Page 670: ... Up Down n 3 Cursor ENT NOENT DEL END GOTO n 4 Numbers algebraic signs decimal point actual position capture n 5 Operating modes n 6 Block opening keys Call PS B W D K Key group code CM 9183 PL B W D Error status 0 Group of NC keys disabled 1 Transferred value maximum value Error recognition Marker Value Meaning M4203 0 Disabling was cancelled 1 Error code in W1022 W1022 1 Transferred parameter ma...

Page 671: ... interrogate this condition with Module 9187 For a soft key function to be simulated it must be displayed either in the foreground or background operating mode Otherwise the module has no effect Module 9187 reports the error Call PS B W D K Number of the soft key function 0 INTERNAL STOP 1 M output 2 S output 3 PROBE FUNCTION 4 PASS OVER REFERENCE MARK 5 RESTORE POSITION 6 INCREMENTAL JOG CM 9186 ...

Page 672: ... because soft key is not available or operating mode is incorrect Codes for keystroke simulation Code Key Group Code Key Group 00 No key 3B ASCII 08 BACKSPACE ASCII 3C ASCII 0A RET ASCII 3D ASCII 20 SPACE ASCII 3E ASCII 21 ASCII 3F ASCII 22 ASCII 41 A ASCII 23 ASCII 42 B ASCII 24 ASCII 43 C ASCII 25 ASCII 44 D ASCII 26 ASCII 45 E ASCII 28 ASCII 46 F ASCII 29 ASCII 47 G ASCII 2A ASCII 48 H ASCII 2B...

Page 673: ...ey 1DA CT Block opening 19E FNEXT UP Soft key 1DB CC Block opening 1A0 C UP Cursor 1DC RND Block opening 1A1 C DOWN Cursor 1DD CHF Block opening 1A2 C LEFT Cursor 1DE FK Block opening 1A3 C RIGHT Cursor 1DF TOUCH PROBE Block opening 1A8 ENTER Cursor 1E0 STOP Block opening 1A9 NO ENTER Cursor 1E1 APPR DEP Block opening 1AB DEL Cursor 1EA DIA 1AC END BLOCK Cursor 1EB FIG 1AD GOTO Cursor 1EC Screen s...

Page 674: ...that the axis will move until there is an NC STOP MP7680 Machine parameter with multiple function Format xxxxxxxxxxxxx Input Bit 0 Memory function for axis direction keys with M4562 0 Not saved 1 Saved if M4562 is set Set Reset W1046 Manual traverse in positive direction Bits 0 to 8 correspond to axes 1 to 9 0 Do not move axis 1 Move axis PLC PLC Set Reset W1048 Manual traverse in negative directi...

Page 675: ...December 2001 Keystroke Simulation 6 345 ...

Page 676: ...be data MP6010 Selection of the touch probe Input 0 Touch probe with cable transmission 1 Touch probe with infrared transmission MP6200 Selection of triggering or measuring touch probe only with digitizing with measuring touch probe option Input 0 Triggering touch probe e g TS 220 1 Measuring touch probe Module 9135 Switch on 3 D touch probe With Module 9135 you can switch on or retrigger certain ...

Page 677: ... is oriented so that it is always deflected in the same direction F1 rapid traverse during probing from the NC program MP6150 for triggering touch probe MP6361 for measuring touch probe F2 probing feed rate MP6120 for triggering touch probe MP6360 for measuring touch probe If the maximum measuring range MP6130 is exceeded the error message TOUCH POINT INACCESSIBLE appears In the MANUAL and ELECTRO...

Page 678: ...e calibrated data of the touch probe If MP7411 1 you can use soft keys to take the effective length and effective radius over into the tool table 7 7 7 7 In the operating modes MANUAL and ELECTRONIC HANDWHEEL enter the tool number in the menu for touch probe calibration The TNC can save the calibration data for up to three touch probes at once 7 7 7 7 Set MP7490 bit 2 7 7 7 7 Use the traverse rang...

Page 679: ...ter a minimum angle difference for orienting with the defined M function MP6120 Probing feed rate triggering touch probe Input 1 to 3000 mm min MP6360 Probing feed rate measuring touch probe Input 1 to 3000 mm min MP6130 Maximum measuring range Input 0 001 to 99 999 9999 mm MP6140 Setup clearance over measuring point Input 0 001 to 99 999 9999 mm MP6150 Rapid traverse in probing cycle triggering t...

Page 680: ...11 Tool data in the touch probe block Format xx Input Bit 0 0 Use the calibrated data of the touch probe 1 Use the current tool data from the last TOOL CALL Bit 1 0 Only one set of touch probe calibration data 1 Use the tool table to manage more than one set of touch probe calibration data MP7490 Functions for traverse ranges Format xxxx Input Bit 2 Calibration data touch probe for workpiece measu...

Page 681: ...he tool 7 7 7 7 In MP6185 enter the distance of the probing point below the ring s top surface If you probe from opposite orientations during calibration the control stores the spindle orientation position during calibration calculation of center offset for X and Y You can probe at any spindle angle at a later date and the control will consider the current spindle angle and compensate for the cent...

Page 682: ...n Since the TNC uses the actual position of the spindle as its reference when compensating the eccentricity it would be necessary to recalibrate the touch probe for each new tilt in position 7 7 7 7 In D760 enter the current offset with respect to the initial position 7 7 7 7 Calibrate the touch probe in the initial position The TNC compensates the entered offset when compensating the eccentricity...

Page 683: ... the PLC n M4065 All workpiece dimensions are OK n M4066 Workpiece must be remachined n M4067 Workpiece to be scrapped When probing from the NC program you can repeat measurements as desired in order to increase measurement precision 7 7 7 7 In MP6170 enter the number of measurements to be performed per probing process 7 7 7 7 In MP6171 enter a value by which the measurement result may differ The ...

Page 684: ... the language specific paths on the PLC partition See Conversational Language on page 6 325 File names of the individual print masks n Calibration for length triggering touch probe TSLCAL A n Calibration for radius triggering touch probe TSRCAL A n Basic rotation ROT_2PTS A n Point measuring DAT_SURF A n Corner as datum DAT_CORN A n Circle center as datum DAT_CC A n Basic rotation over 2 holes ROT...

Page 685: ...robe TS RINGRAD Double Calibration ring radius for triggering touch probe TM RAD Double Probe radius 1 of measuring touch probe TM RAD2 Double Probe radius 2 of measuring touch probe TM LEN Double Calibrated probe length of measuring touch probe TM OFF1 Double Calibrated center offset in ref axis of meas touch probe TM OFF2 Double Calibrated center offset in minor axis of meas touch probe TM CORST...

Page 686: ...probing Name Format type Description GE_HA 2 Double Straight line axis section of reference axis GE_NA 2 Double Straight line axis section of minor axis GE_WI 2 Double Straight line angle Calculated radii from circle probing Name Format type Description RAD 8 Double 8 radii Calculated center points from circle probing Name Format type Description MP_HA 8 Double Reference axis of center points MP_N...

Page 687: ...rint masks for the manual touch probe cycles for the touch probe cycles for probing from the NC program you only need one print mask The individual text blocks are distinguished through language code words The text block that is defined in MP7230 0 is always output Otherwise the syntax of the print masks is identical Conversational language Language code word English L_ENGLISH German L_GERMAN Czec...

Page 688: ... 6 4LF Q32 Maximum dimension for center in 2nd axis 6 4LF Q33 Minimum dimension for center in 2nd axis 6 4LF Q34 Maximum dimension for hole 6 4LF Q275 Maximum dimension for hole 6 4LF Q276 Actual values Center in 1st axis 6 4LF Q151 Center in 2nd axis 6 4LF Q152 Diameter 6 4LF Q153 Deviations Center in 1st axis 6 4LF Q161 Center in 2nd axis 6 4LF Q162 Diameter 6 4LF Q163 Further measuring results ...

Page 689: ...ebenachse 6 4LF Q33 Kleinstmaß Mitte Nebenachse 6 4LF Q34 Größtmaß Bohrung 6 4LF Q275 Kleinstmaß 6 4LF Q276 Istwerte Mitte Hauptachse 6 4LF Q151 Mitte Nebenachse 6 4LF Q152 Durchmesser 6 4LF Q153 Abweichungen Mitte Hauptachse 6 4LF Q161 Mitte Nebenachse 6 4LF Q162 Durchmesser 6 4LF Q163 Weitere Meßergebnisse Meßhöhe 6 4LF Q261 Meßprotokoll Ende ...

Page 690: ... In MP6210 enter the probing rate during scanning of the model number of oscillations in normal direction per second MP6210 depends on the dynamic behavior of the machine The kv factor affects the dynamic behavior operation with following error The higher the kv factor the greater the number of oscillations Together with the probe point interval PP INT MP6210 determines the maximum scanning feed r...

Page 691: ...e corner 7 7 7 7 With MP6260 select whether an M90 is appended to every NC block in the transmitted digitized data See Contouring Behavior on page 6 152 7 7 7 7 With MP6270 specify the number of decimal places to which the coordinates are output MP6210 Number of oscillations in normal direction per second Input 0 to 65 535 1 s MP6230 Feed rate in normal direction Input 0 to 1000 mm min MP6240 Maxi...

Page 692: ...zes a 3 D model in meanders successive back and forth lines in the predefined range The contour lines cycle digitizes a 3 D model level by level in contour lines within a predefined range This level by level digitizing is used mainly for surfaces with steep edges Y X Z Y X Z ...

Page 693: ... on the values that are entered for these parameters see the User s Manual either the travel of the probing stroke or the probe point interval is limited The travel determines the contour of the corners The smaller the travel the more exact the resolution of the corner If too small a travel is defined it may prevent the probe from getting clear at acute sharp inside corners minimum travel 0 1 mm O...

Page 694: ...e touch probe is not clear of the surface 6 it will retract in the positive direction of the probe axis e g Z If the stylus is still deflected after it reaches the clearance height See Scanning cycles on page 6 361 Range cycle the scanning sequence is aborted and an error message is displayed Optimizing the scanning sequence Preparation 7 7 7 7 Set up a flat workpiece with vertical side and smooth...

Page 695: ...TCH PROBE 5 2 Z X Y Z 10 RANGE INCLUDING THE 8 TCH PROBE 5 3 X 100 Y 100 Z 10 PROGRAM NAME FOR 9 TCH PROBE 5 4 HEIGHT 25 THE SURFACE DATA FILE AND FOR THE CLEARANCE HEIGHT ABSOLUTE DIMENSION 10 TCH PROBE 6 0 MEANDER MEANDER TYPE SCANNING IN 11 TCH PROBE 6 1 DIRECTION X X DIRECTION PLUS 12 TCH PROBE 6 2 TRAVEL 0 5 PP INT 1 L SPAC 1 THE POINT AND LINE SPACING AND THE TRAVEL 13 END PGM OPTIDIGI MM To...

Page 696: ...surface If not then increase MP6230 e g by 10 mm min Return to the PROGRAM RUN FULL SEQUENCE mode select the OPTIDIGI program and press the machine START button If so then reduce MP6230 again e g by 10 mm min 7 7 7 7 Repeat the optimization process for the Y axis Also switch the NC to the scanning direction Y The optimization process is oriented to the worst axis The feed rate must not be increase...

Page 697: ...ct whether a measuring or triggering touch probe is used The counting direction of the encoder signals in the probe must match the counting direction of the encoder signals of the axes The axis specific parameters are defined in MP210 7 7 7 7 Select the POSITIONING WITH MANUAL DATA INPUT mode of operation 7 7 7 7 Press the PNT soft key and position the machine by touching the stylus The machine mu...

Page 698: ...bing cycle 7 7 7 7 In MP6350 enter a feed rate for positioning to the MIN point and probing the contour 7 7 7 7 With MP6362 select whether the scanning feed rate is automatically reduced if the ball tip deviates from the path During scanning of contour lines the probe sometimes ends the contour line at a point located near but not exactly at the starting point 7 7 7 7 In MP6390 define a target win...

Page 699: ...o 4 000 mm MP6350 Feed rate for positioning to the MIN point and approaching the contour measuring touch probe Input 1 to 3000 mm min MP6360 Probing feed rate measuring touch probe Input 1 to 3000 mm min MP6361 Rapid traverse in probing cycle measuring touch probe Input 10 to 20 000 mm min MP6362 Feed rate reduction if the stylus of the measuring touch probe is deflected to the side Input 0 Feed r...

Page 700: ...he traverse range switching function to activate the current data with M4574 M4575 7 7 7 7 Set MP7490 bit 3 to save three separate sets of calibration data MP7490 Functions for traverse ranges Format xxxx Input Bit 3 Calibration data touch probe for tool measurement 0 One set of calibration data for all traverse ranges 1 Every traverse range has its own set of calibration data Standard measuring c...

Page 701: ... with rotating spindle 1 Tool measurement with stationary spindle Oriented Spindle Stop Spindle orientation must be active for individual tooth measurement otherwise the tool radius measurement is subject to error 7 7 7 7 Define with MP6500 bit 3 whether the tool is measured with or without spindle orientation 7 7 7 7 With MP6560 specify whether the spindle is to be oriented directly via NC or thr...

Page 702: ... 7 In the L OFFS field of the tool table enter an additional tool specific offset MP6530 Distance from the tool end to the top of the probe contact during tool radius measurement for 3 traverse ranges Input 0 001 to 99 9999 mm MP6530 0 Traverse range 1 MP6530 1 Traverse range 2 MP6530 2 Traverse range 3 Safety zone After a cycle for tool measurement starts the tool automatically moves at the feed ...

Page 703: ...8 Probing routine 0 Probe contact is probed from several directions 1 Probe contact is probed from one direction Bit 9 Automatic measurement of the direction of the probe contact basic rotation bit 8 1 0 Basic rotation is not measured 1 Basic rotation of the probe element is automatically measured Bit 10 Probing routine bit 8 1 0 Pre positioning to starting point in all three principal axes 1 Pre ...

Page 704: ...This is automatically calculated by the TNC MP6570 and MP6572 then are without function The probing feed rate is calculated from the revolutions per minute and the measuring tolerance defined in MP6510 0 7 7 7 7 In MP6510 0 enter the maximum permissible measuring error the so called measuring tolerance v measuring tolerance n v Probing feed rate m min Measuring tolerance Measuring tolerance mm fro...

Page 705: ...ng spindle accuracy the TNC attempts to maintain the tolerance from MP6510 1 If this also cannot be maintained the error message Tolerance in MP6510 too small appears 7 7 7 7 Enter the first maximum measuring error in MP6510 0 7 7 7 7 Enter the second maximum measuring error in MP6510 1 MP6500 Tool measurement with TT 130 Format xxxxxxxxxxxxx Input Bit 4 0 Automatically determine speed 1 Always us...

Page 706: ...itored 7 7 7 7 In MP6586 enter the reference coordinate at which the axis should be located during the tool measuring cycles If during activated monitoring the nominal position does not match the position from MP6586 an error message is displayed MP6585 Monitoring the position of the rotary and additional linear axes during the tool measurement cycles As of software version 280 476 01 Format xxxxx...

Page 707: ...ment is to be entered in the tool table MP6500 Tool measurement with TT 130 Format xxxxxxxxxxxx Input Bit 5 NC stop during tool checking 0 The NC program is not stopped when the breaking tolerance is exceeded 1 If the breakage tolerance is exceeded the NC program is stopped and the error message tool broken is displayed Bit 6 NC stop during tool measurement 0 The NC program is not stopped when the...

Page 708: ...eded The tool is locked The markers M4050 M4051 M4052 M4053 M4055 and M4056 function as in the standard cycles You must enable the cycles for tool measurement with M4055 For spindle orientation directly by the NC MP6560 1 you must reset M4012 Set Reset M4060 Cycle for tool measurement started NC NC M4061 0 Measure the tool 1 Check the tool NC NC M4062 0 Wear tolerance not exceeded 1 Wear tolerance...

Page 709: ...December 2001 Touch Probe 6 379 ...

Page 710: ...n at the handwheel and produce an unintentional axis movement In this case 7 7 7 7 Enter a threshold sensitivity in MP7660 With W1062 you can disable the handwheel pulses for specific axes if more than one handwheel is used in connection with the HRA 110 handwheel adapter If the marker M4576 is set all axes are disabled If it is reset W1062 applies If only one handwheel is used a selectable axis c...

Page 711: ...ough PLC Module 9036 MP7650 Counting direction for handwheel As of software version only before 280 474 07 Input 0 Negative counting direction 1 Positive counting direction MP7650 Handwheel counting direction for each axis Format xxxxxxxxx Input Bits 0 to 8 correspond to axes 1 to 9 0 Negative counting direction 1 Positive counting direction MP7660 Threshold sensitivity for electronic handwheel In...

Page 712: ...Handwheel interpolation key Z 0 to 10 3 Handwheel interpolation key IV MP410 3 0 to 10 4 Handwheel interpolation key V MP410 4 0 to 10 5 Handwheel interpolation of all axes 0 to 10 6 Select the handwheel axis not for HRA 110 0 to 8 Axes 1 to 9 10 See Incremental Jog Positioning 11 Handwheel interpolation of axis 1 0 to 10 12 Handwheel interpolation of axis 2 0 to 10 13 Handwheel interpolation of a...

Page 713: ...MP7640 6 HR 410 7 7 7 7 In MP7645 specify whether the keys on the handwheel are to be evaluated by the NC or PLC Evaluation of the keys by the NC MP7645 0 0 With the exception of the function keys A B and C all keys are evaluated by the NC 7 7 7 7 With MP7670 x select the interpolation factors for low medium and high speed 7 7 7 7 With MP7671 x define the values for low medium and high speed The s...

Page 714: ...g MP7645 0 Assignment of the handwheel keypad for HR 410 Input 0 Evaluation of the keys by NC including LEDs 1 Evaluation of the keys by PLC MP7645 1 7 Have no function MP7670 Interpolation factor for handwheel Input 0 to 10 MP7670 0 Interpolation factor for low speed MP7670 1 Interpolation factor for medium speed only HR 410 MP7670 2 Interpolation factor for high speed only HR 410 MP7671 Handwhee...

Page 715: ...n by axis selection switch switch S2 see MP7645 0 Selection permanently defined in MP7645 1 MP7645 Initializing parameter for handwheel MP7645 0 Assignment of a third handwheel via axis selector switch S2 when MP7645 2 0 Input 0 Switch position 1 at the left stop 3rd handwheel axis Z Position 2 3rd handwheel axis IV Position 3 3rd handwheel axis V 1 Switch position 1 at the left stop 3rd handwheel...

Page 716: ...mple If switch S1 is in position 3 input I162 is logically 0 and the inputs I160 I161 I163 to I167 are logically 1 Step switch 1 Step switch for choosing the interpolation factor Step switch 2 Axis selection switch Switch position PLC input 1 at the left stop I160 2 I161 3 I162 4 I163 5 I164 6 I165 7 I166 8 at the right stop I167 Switch position PLC input 1 at the left stop I168 2 I169 3 I170 4 I1...

Page 717: ... the first PL the third to the second etc The PLs are permanently assigned to specific inputs and outputs If a PL is dropped the assignment of the inputs and outputs to the PLs also changes To avoid having to change your PLC you can assign a logical PL no of the PL according to the assignment of I O in the PLC program to the physical PL no of the PL as seen by the LE Logic unit PLC input output un...

Page 718: ...hysical PL LE PL 2 I192 to I255 O64 to O94 PL 1 I64 to I127 O32 to O62 PL 3 I256 to I319 O128 to O158 PL 4 I320 to I383 O160 to O190 LE PL 3 I192 to I255 O64 to O94 PL 1 I64 to I127 O32 to O62 PL 4 I256 to I319 O128 to O158 CAUTION PLC program must be changed or MP4030 0 0 1st physical PL 1st logical PL MP4030 1 2 2nd physical PL 3rd logical PL MP4030 2 3 3rd physical PL 4th logical PL LE PL 3 I25...

Page 719: ... PL is a PL 410 B CM 9007 PL B W D K Diagnostic information 0 Not available 1 Available 0 to 4 Number of PLs Error recognition 6 17 1 24 Vdc Switching Input Outputs The current conditions of the switching inputs and outputs are available for you in PLC addresses See Mounting and Electrical Installation on page 3 5 For the current states of the inputs outputs of the PLC 7 7 7 7 Read all inputs with...

Page 720: ...ctually connected The program can be called only in the cyclic PLC program Call PS B W D K Number of the PL 0 First PLC input output unit 1 Second PLC input output unit 2 Third PLC input output unit 3 Fourth PLC input output unit CM 9002 Error recognition Note As of NC software 280 476 03 before the PLC program is converted the PLC outputs are reset As of NC software 280 476 03 the memories of the...

Page 721: ...le 9005 overwrites the outputs of the PLC input output unit with the values from the PLC addresses See Mounting and Electrical Installation on page 3 5 The outputs are set or reset immediately at the time of module execution and remain in their state until they are set or reset again by this module or Module 9009 The module does not recognize whether a PLC input output unit is actually connected T...

Page 722: ...es of PLC inputs With this module you set upon falling or rising edges of the PLC inputs specified end markers or bits in the specified byte range Changes in the inputs are recognized only if a change also occurs in the PLC addresses see Module 9002 Ensure that the specified edge markers or edge bytes are in an unoccupied area The edge bytes are written beginning with the least significant bit Sup...

Page 723: ...dc input 10 to 10 at a resolution of 10 mV 100 to 100 at a resolution of 100 mV Value range Pt 100 input 0 to 200 at a resolution of 0 5 C 0 to 1000 at a resolution of 0 1 C The module can be called only in the cyclic PLC program Call PS B W D K Number of analog input 0 to 7 Analog inputs X15 to X22 on first unit 8 to 15 Analog inputs X15 to X22 on second unit 16 to 23 Analog inputs X15 to X22 on ...

Page 724: ...t 100 inputs 0 Accept values at a change rate of 1 K s 1 Accept results immediately 6 17 3 Analog Outputs You can drive analog outputs 1 to 13 at sockets X8 and X9 See Mounting and Electrical Installation on page 3 5 Module 9130 Output of an analog voltage With this module you place an analog voltage on an analog output The voltage is output with a slight delay after the end of the PLC scan Call t...

Page 725: ...280 470 xx In the ELECTRONIC HANDWHEEL mode you can enable the incremental jog function with M4572 The interpolation factor message is displayed in addition to the jog increment message 7 7 7 7 Activate the incremental jog positioning with W1050 W1052 and set the corresponding bit Activation of incremental jog positioning is linked with the axis direction keys Set Reset M4579 INCREMENT OFF ON soft...

Page 726: ...ition Number of the status information Function Value 0 to 6 See Handwheel 10 Jog increment limiting 0 0001 to 50 mm Jog increment limiting 1 2 50 Cancellation of the jog increment limitation and activation of the jog increment entered last 2 Cancellation of the jog increment limitation and activation of the minimum from jog increment entered last and last limitation 11 to 19 See Handwheel Marker ...

Page 727: ...397 Module 9035 Reading status information Call PS B W D K 26 CM 9035 PL B W D Jog increment Error recognition Marker Value Meaning M4203 0 No error 1 Error code in W1022 W1022 1 Status information invalid 20 Call was not in a submit or spawn job ...

Page 728: ...ext grid point ELECTRONIC HANDWHEEL operating mode For the current handwheel axis the corresponding bit is reset in W1026 axis in position As soon as you select another handwheel axis axis in position is set for the previous axis The Hirth axis can be positioned with the handwheel 7 7 7 7 Check the actual position with the Hirth grid and derive from it a PLC positioning to the next grid point Cont...

Page 729: ...e system Example Actual value display for X axis without datum shift 50 Shift value in D528 20 M4132 is set i e datum shift is active New actual value display X 70 the old datum receives the value 20 Module 9230 Datum shift With this module you transfer the axis and the amount by which the datum is to be shifted M4132 is set when Module 9230 is called After execution of the datum shift the NC rese...

Page 730: ...ble in the PROGRAM RUN mode of operation 7 7 7 7 Ensure that the tool table and pocket table are neither locked nor protected with MP7224 See Files on page 6 300 7 7 7 7 Press the TOOL TABLE soft key From the tool table you can call the pocket table see the User s Manual 7 7 7 7 Ensure that the POCKET TABLE soft key is not hidden by MP7263 bit 0 7 7 7 7 Press the POCKET TABLE soft key The current ...

Page 731: ...67 x specify the fields of the pocket table that are to be displayed and the sequence in which they appear Note The complete width of the tool table cannot exceed 250 characters Wider tables cannot be transmitted through the data interface For the width of the individual columns see MP7266 x Left side of the tool table Right side of the tool table Example pocket table ...

Page 732: ... and pocket tables and overwrite them If an input field is open in the editor at the time the modules are called this field is closed automatically The status display shows the current tool data MP7260 Number of tools in the tool table Input 0 to 30 000 MP7261 0 3 Number of pockets in the tool magazine 1 to 4 Input 0 to 254 MP7263 Hiding showing the POCKET TABLE soft key Format x Input Bit 0 0 POC...

Page 733: ... offset radius TT ROFFS 11 MP7266 20 Breakage tolerance for tool length LBREAK 6 MP7266 21 Breakage tolerance for tool radius RBREAK 6 MP7266 22 Tooth length LCUTS 11 MP7266 23 Plunge angle ANGLE 7 MP7266 24a Tool type MILL cutter DRILL drill TYPE 5 MP7266 25a Tool material TMAT 16 MP7266 26a Cutting data table CDT 16 MP7266 27b PLC value PLC VAL 11 MP7266 28c Center misalignment in reference axis...

Page 734: ...0 Tool number T MP7267 1 Special tool ST MP7267 2 Fixed pocket F MP7267 3 Locked pocket L MP7267 4 PLC status PLC MP7267 5 Tool name TNAME MP7267 6 Comment on the tool DOC Note The TNAME tool name column contains the name of the tool from the tool table and therefore cannot be edited For indexed tools the name of the tool is entered with the index 0 ...

Page 735: ... W D K Element value PS B W D K Element number T file 0 Tool length L 1 Tool radius R 2 Reserved 3 Replacement tool RT 1 not defined 4 Reserved 5 TIME 1 6 TIME 2 7 CURRENT TIME 8 Tool radius 2 R2 9 Oversize for tool length DL 10 Oversize for tool radius DR 11 Oversize for tool radius 2 DR2 12 Tool locked TL 0 No 1 Yes 13 Number of the tool teeth CUT 14 Wear tolerance for tool length LTOL 15 Wear t...

Page 736: ... tool is entered 1 Special tool ST 0 No 1 Yes 2 Fixed pocket F 0 No 1 Yes 3 Pocket locked L 0 No 1 Yes 4 PLC status PLC PS B W D K Line number for beginning of search CM 9092 PL B W D Line number in case of error 1 PL B W D Error number 0 No error Element was found 1 Call was not in a submit or spawn job 2 File type does not exist 3 No file of the entered type was found with M status 4 Line number...

Page 737: ...ed by the number of decimal places that can be entered The module must be called in a submit job or spawn job Call PS B W D K File type see Module 9092 PS B W D K Line number PS B W D K Element number see Module 9092 CM 9093 PS B W D Element value PL B W D Error number 0 No error 1 Call was not in a submit job 2 File type does not exist 3 No file of the entered type was found with M status 4 Line ...

Page 738: ...alizes the geometry The module must be called in a submit job or spawn job Call PS B W D K File type see Module 9092 PS B W D K Line number PS B W D K Element number see Module 9092 PS B W D K Element value CM 9094 PL B W D Error number 0 No error Element was written 1 Call was not in a submit or spawn job 2 File type does not exist 3 No file of the entered type was found with M status 4 Line numb...

Page 739: ...er pocket number PS B W D K Mode Bit 0 Delete entries in pocket table 0 Pocket table remains unchanged 1 Tool number in pocket table is deleted Bit 1 Tool or pocket number 0 Transferred value tool number 1 Transferred value pocket number CM 9096 Error recognition Marker Value Meaning M4203 0 The line was deleted 1 Error code in W1022 W1022 2 Invalid pocket or tool number 21 Module was not called i...

Page 740: ...is running appears As soon as the pocket table has been released the tool change is output from the NC to the PLC Call PS B W D K Lock release pocket table 0 Release the pocket table 1 Lock the pocket table CM 9300 PL B W D Error 0 Pocket table locked released 1 Pocket table could not be locked 2 Pocket table could not be released 3 Transfer parameter invalid 4 Module was not called in a submit jo...

Page 741: ...61 1 then tool magazine 3 etc 7 7 7 7 Enter the number of pockets in tool magazines 1 to 4 in MP7261 0 to MP7261 3 The current tool magazine number is saved in W268 Module 9302 searches for an open pocket in a tool magazine and Module 9306 switches tools between the tool magazines Module 9301 determines the number of the entry in the pocket table The number of the entry depends on the tool magazin...

Page 742: ...l magazine Module 9302 searches for a free pocket in a tool magazine Call PS B W D K Tool magazine number PS B W D K Pocket at which the search is to be started CM 9302 PL B W D Number of the free pocket 1 No vacant pocket available Error recognition Marker Value Meaning M4203 0 Number of the entry was found 1 Error code in W1022 W1022 1 Invalid tool magazine number 2 Invalid pocket number 20 Modu...

Page 743: ...data remain unchanged The module must be called at standstill or during a strobe output Call PS B W D K Original tool magazine PS B W D K Original pocket PS B W D K New tool magazine PS B W D K New pocket CM 9306 Error recognition Marker Value Meaning M4203 0 Pocket has been exchanged 1 Error code in W1022 W1022 1 Invalid pocket number 2 Invalid tool magazine number 20 Module was not called in a s...

Page 744: ... 7 7 Lock the pockets to be kept free with the L field 7 7 7 7 With M4541 block the variable tool pocket coding for special tools As soon as M4541 is set all special tools are returned to their original pocket in spite of the variable tool pocket coding function With the F field fixed pocket you can define this function selectively for individual tools Set Reset M4541 Special tool in original pock...

Page 745: ... tool with M128 you must program a retraction with M140 in the tool change macro After the tool change the tool moves with an approach logic to the pre compensated position and then returns to the contour To synchronize the current machine status and the look ahead calculation with an NC macro call See NCMACRO SYS on page 7 44 No radius compensation is given in NC blocks with normal vectors One de...

Page 746: ...ol age counter is stopped The tool age counter does not run in the MANUAL OPERATION ELECTRONIC HANDWHEEL and POSITIONING WITH MDI operating modes The user can reset the current tool age by entering zero MP7680 Machine parameter with multiple function Format xxxxxxxxxxxxx Input Bit 6 Tool length in blocks with normal vectors 0 Without R2 from tool table south pole 1 With R2 from tool table center o...

Page 747: ...since these modules will need it 7 7 7 7 With Module 9091 you can determine the line number of a tool in the tool table MP7262 Maximum tool index number for indexed tools Input 0 to 9 Module 9091 Finding the line number of a tool in the tool table Call PS B W D K Tool number PS B W D K Tool index number CM 9091 PL B W D Line number Error recognition Set Reset W266 Index number of a programmed inde...

Page 748: ...Tool diameter mm Milling cutter F fz S F Feed rate mm min fz Feed rate per tooth mm z Number of teeth Drill F fu S fu Feed rate per revolution mm Tool table 7 7 7 7 In the CDT column of the tool table enter the name of the cutting data table that is to be used for that tool 7 7 7 7 In the TYP column define the type of tool DRILL drilling tool TAP tapping tool MILL milling cutter 7 7 7 7 Enter the ...

Page 749: ...ndard data during the next software update 7 7 7 7 In the system file TNC SYS use the code word PCDT to enter the path in which your cutting data tables are saved Material tables The workpiece materials used are defined in the table WMAT TAB the tool materials in the table TMAT TAB Standard tables are in the root directory of the TNC TNC You can arbitrarily expand and change all tables If you chan...

Page 750: ...pindle speed manually this value is taken into account in the calculation of the feed rate You cannot however enter F for calculation of S If you enter the feed rate manually the entered value applies until you program another feed rate With the F AUTO soft key you can again activate the feed rate from the TOOL CALL block Principle 6 21 3 Automatic Tool Recognition Automatic tool identification is...

Page 751: ...tion the tool changer to the follow up tool Calling an NC program with TOOL CALL With the NC block TOOL CALL you can call an NC program of your own definition 7 7 7 7 With the command TC path name file name in the PLC NCMACRO SYS file define the name of the NC program to be called To synchronize the current machine status and the look ahead calculation with an NC macro call See NCMACRO SYS on page...

Page 752: ...values remain only locally effective 0 BEGIN PGM TCALL MM 1 M112 T4 INSERT ROUNDING TO POSITION CONTINUOUSLY 2 FN18 SYSREAD Q1 ID60 NR1 IDXO TOOL NUMBER 3 FN18 SYSREAD Q2 ID60 NR2 IDXO TOOL AXIS 4 FN18 SYSREAD Q3 ID60 NR3 IDXO SPEED 5 FN18 SYSREAD Q4 ID60 NR4 IDXO OVERSIZE IN TOOL LENGTH DL 6 FN18 SYSREAD Q5 ID60 NR5 IDXO OVERSIZE IN TOOL RADIUS DR 7 FN19 PLC Q 0 INFO FOR PLC FOR PRE POSITIONING T...

Page 753: ... is set by the output of the T strobe and reset by output of the G strobe If there is no output of either the T or G strobe M4547 is not set If the tool number zero is processed the NC sets marker M4521 The marker is not reset until there is a TOOL CALL for another tool MP7480 Output of the tool or pocket number MP7480 0 With a TOOL CALL block Input 0 No output 1 Tool number output only when tool ...

Page 754: ...et M4542 the assignment of tool and pocket numbers in the pocket table does not change although variable pocket coding was selected You set this marker for example during a block scan except if MP7681 bit 1 1 7 7 7 7 In MP7261 enter the number of tools with pocket number The maximum input value is the number of the pockets in the tool magazine In the tool table you can define more tools than can b...

Page 755: ...ool follows a manual tool M N Normal tool follows a special tool S N See M4540 NC NC M4522 Tool programmed with pocket number if MP7480 0 3 or 4 and TOOL CALL NC NC M4523 Tool programmed without pocket number is effective if MP7480 0 3 or 4 and TOOL CALL NC NC M4524 Special tool called TOOL CALL NC NC M4525 TOOL CALL after expiration of tool life 1 TOOL CALL after expiration of tool life NC NC M45...

Page 756: ...ble Normal n M Tool for which no pocket number is defined in the tool table You must change the tool manually Manual n S Special tool definition in the tool table There are nine possible combinations in the tool change sequence For some sequences it is necessary during TOOL CALL to output two pocket or tool numbers in sequence You can recognize this with M4520 and M4540 You must evaluate and ackno...

Page 757: ...7 N N Normal tool follows a normal tool The pocket number and the tool number of the called tool are transferred M4073 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 W264 M4541 W262 M4524 M4523 M4522 M4540 M4520 M4093 Pocket No new N Tool No new N ...

Page 758: ...ce in which the pocket numbers are transferred depending on whether single or double changing arm S N Single changing arm M4540 0 First the pocket number of the old tool and the tool number zero are transferred Zero means clear the spindle 7 7 7 7 Clear the spindle and acknowledge with M4093 Then the pocket and tool numbers of the new tool are transferred 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 W264 M4541...

Page 759: ...e new tool are transferred 7 7 7 7 Acknowledge with M4093 Then the pocket tool number of the old tool and the tool number zero are transferred Zero means clear the spindle 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 W264 M4541 W262 M4524 M4523 M4522 M4540 M4520 M4093 M4073 Pocket No N Tool No N Pocket No S Tool No Ø ...

Page 760: ... M4073 will follow Regardless of marker M4540 the pocket number 1 and tool number zero are transferred first Zero means clear the spindle Pocket number 1 means no pocket in the tool magazine 7 7 7 7 Acknowledge with M4093 Then the pocket number and tool number of the new called tool are transferred 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 W264 M4541 W262 M4524 M4523 M4522 M4540 M4520 M4093 M4073 Pocket No ...

Page 761: ...Changer 6 431 M M Manual tool follows a manual tool Pocket number 1 means no pocket in the tool magazine 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 W264 M4541 W262 M4524 M4523 M4522 M4540 M4520 M4093 M4073 Pocket No 1 Tool No new M ...

Page 762: ...ill follow Regardless of marker M4540 the pocket number of the old tool and tool number zero are transferred first Zero means clear the spindle 7 7 7 7 Acknowledge with M4093 Then the pocket number 1 and tool number of the new called tool are transferred Pocket number 1 means no pocket in the tool magazine 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 W264 M4541 W262 M4524 M4523 M4522 M4540 M4520 M4093 M4073 Po...

Page 763: ...ow Regardless of marker M4540 the pocket number of the old tool and tool number zero are transferred first Zero means clear the spindle 7 7 7 7 Acknowledge with M4093 Then the pocket number 1 and tool number of the new called tool are transferred Pocket number 1 means no pocket in the tool magazine 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 W264 M4541 W262 M4524 M4523 M4522 M4540 M4520 M4093 M4073 Pocket No ...

Page 764: ... tool should be returned to the original pocket in spite of variable pocket coding No M4541 0 The same logic program applies for single and double changer arms Yes M4541 1 Single and double changer arms have different sequences of pocket number transfer 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 W264 M4541 W262 M4524 M4523 M4522 M4540 M4520 M4093 M4073 Pocket No new S Tool No new S ...

Page 765: ...he tool number zero are transferred Zero means clear the spindle 7 7 7 7 Acknowledge with M4093 Then the pocket number and tool number of the new tool are transferred 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 M4541 W262 M4524 M4523 M4522 M4540 M4520 M4093 M4073 W264 Pocket No old S Tool No Ø Pocket No new S Tool No new S ...

Page 766: ... of the new tool are transferred 7 7 7 7 Acknowledge with M4093 Then the pocket tool number of the old tool and the tool number zero are transferred Zero means clear the spindle 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 W264 M4541 W262 M4524 M4523 M4522 M4540 M4520 M4093 M4073 Tool No new S Pocket No old S Tool No Ø Pocket No new S ...

Page 767: ...a different sequence of pocket number transfer for single and double arm changers M4540 N S Single changing arm M4540 0 First the pocket number of the old tool and the tool number zero are transferred Zero means clear the spindle 7 7 7 7 Acknowledge with M4093 Then the pocket number and tool number of the new tool are transferred 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 W264 M4541 W262 M4524 M4523 M4522 M4...

Page 768: ...ers of the new tool are transferred 7 7 7 7 Acknowledge with M4093 Then the pocket tool number of the old tool and the tool number zero are transferred Zero means clear the spindle 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 W264 M4541 W262 M4524 M4523 M4522 M4540 M4520 M4093 M4073 Pocket No S Tool No S Pocket No N Tool No Ø ...

Page 769: ...Regardless of markers M4540 and M4541 the pocket number 1 and tool number zero are transferred first Tool number zero means clear the spindle Pocket number 1 means no pocket in the tool magazine 7 7 7 7 Acknowledge with M4093 Then the pocket number and tool number of the new called tool are transferred 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 W264 M4541 W262 M4524 M4523 M4522 M4540 M4520 M4093 M4073 Pocket...

Page 770: ...ISTREG The pocket number at the tool change position of the tool magazine n GRE1 Pocket number of tool in changing arm facing tool magazine n GRE2 Pocket number of the tool in the arm facing the spindle n SPIREG Pocket number of the tool in the spindle Set Reset W262 Tool pocket number NC NC W264 Tool number NC NC M4073 Strobe signal T code P code with TOOL CALL NC NC M4074 Strobe signal T code P ...

Page 771: ... block MP7480 1 4 Output of the pocket number and tool number for every TOOL DEF block Module Meaning TOOL DEF Search for tool and load in GRE1 TOOL CALL Automatic tool change STANDBY Search for tool and load in GRE1 STANDBY BACK Return tool from GRE1 to the magazine MANUAL TOOL IN Manual tool follows a normal or special tool MANUAL TOOL OUT Normal or special tool follows a manual tool MANUAL IN O...

Page 772: ... load in GRE1 P 1 GRE1 0 GRE1 assigned yes yes yes yes Tool already in spindle Tool already in GRE1 Feedback is immediate so that the NC PGM can continue TOOL DEF feedback Message CANNOT PREPARE MANUAL TOOL P SPIREG P GRE1 Modul STANDBY BACK End STANDBY Modul No No yes Manual tool No GRE1 empty ...

Page 773: ...e follows P 1 S N Wzg TOOL CALL feedback Module CHANGE S N tool out M tool in No M4520 0 M4520 1 Yes M tool Another TOOL CALL strobe follows M tool IN Module M tool OUT Module MAN OUT IN Module No No Yes M tool M tool out M tool in Mtool out S N tool in Tool already in spindle T 0 GRE1 0 P GRE1 No Tool already in changing arm Module STANDBY yes Yes Fetch tool to GRE 1 S N tool out S N tool in Yes ...

Page 774: ...dule Return tool from GRE1 to the tool magazine GRE1 ISTREG No yes Pocket in magazine found COMPARE GRE WITH ISTREG Module Bring GRE 1 to magazine and load GRE 1 with zero Return tool to magazine End No yes Pocket in magazine found COMPARE P CODE WITH ISTREG Module Load ISTREG to GRE1 LOAD tool from magazine to GRE 1 P ISTREG End ...

Page 775: ... out Move GRE 2 to spindle and load SPIREG to GRE 2 Swap over GRE 1 and GRE 2 registers M4573 1 No OK key pressed yes Load T Code to SPIREG No End yes Strobe set again Bring old tool to magazine As GRE 1 is already zero this routine has software relevance only STANDBY BACK Module STANDBY BACK Module TOOL CALL feedback Turn changing arm load SPIREG with GRE 1 set GRE 1 to zero and return arm Prompt...

Page 776: ...in the tool magazine for the current tool The called tool is inserted automatically No Fetch tool to GRE 1 Tool in GRE1 Prompt user to unload tool and press OK key Yes GRE1 0 No Load zero in SPIREG spindle empty Yes M4573 1 No No Unload GRE1 TOOL CALL strobe set again GRE1 empty Yes GRE1 P Move axes to manual change position End OK key pressed Yes STANDBY BACK Module TOOL CALL feedback CHANGE Modu...

Page 777: ...ual tool The user is prompted to remove the tool from the spindle manually and insert the new tool since there is not room for the tools in the tool magazine Prompt user to unload old and load new tool No Load T code to SPIREG Move axis to manual change position End OK key pressed Yes Press OK key ...

Page 778: ...ut Store old tool in magazine Turn changing arm and load new tool No M4573 1 COMPARE P CODE WITH ISTREG Module GRE 1 to magazine load GRE 1 with zero End TOOL CALL strobe set again Yes Magazine in position Position tool magazine Another TOOL CALL strobe follows Yes Wait Turn changing arm load SPIREG with GRE 1 set GRE 1 to zero retract arm M4520 1 TOOL CALL feedback Yes P ISTREG Move GRE2 to spind...

Page 779: ...ITH ISTREG The tool magazine is positioned in the shortest direction to the desired pocket number COMPUTE THE SHORTEST PATH IN M3042 Module Transfer P code to data stack No Yes P ISTREG Yes M3042 1 No End Index magazine forward Index magazine reverse ...

Page 780: ...G program module The tool magazine is positioned in the shortest direction to the pocket number that is located in GRE1 COMPUTE THE SHORTEST PATH IN M3042 Module Transfer GRE 1 to data stack No Yes GRE1 ISTREG Yes M3042 1 No Index magazine forward End Index magazine reverse ...

Page 781: ...The direction is saved in M3042 M3042 0 Backward M3042 1 Forward No Magazine forward Yes Fetch search pocket from data stack to NOMREG ABSREG _ MEGREG No ABSREG _ MEGREG M3042 0 Yes End Magazine reverse No Yes Yes M3042 0 backward M3042 1 forward Save absolute value from ISTREG NOMREG difference to ABSREG Divide number of mag pockets by two and save to MAGREG NOMREG ISTREG NOMREG ISTREG No M3042 1...

Page 782: ...oltage is output MP3012 Feed rate from output of an analog voltage of 10 V MP3011 1 Input 0 to 300 000 mm min Voltage from the PLC MP3011 2 The voltage that you have defined with Module 9130 is output Definition of the voltage through M functions MP3011 3 The voltage to be output is defined through M functions M200 to M204 7 7 7 7 Set MP3011 3 otherwise the above mentioned M functions will not be ...

Page 783: ...linearly between the kink points The first kink point must start with the input value zero For the following kink points of the curve the input values must rise steadily The TNC detects the beginning of a new curve from the input value zero Example MP3013 x Characteristic curve kink points velocity for output of the analog voltage with M202 Input 10 to 300 000 mm min MP3014 x Characteristic curve ...

Page 784: ... V 0 to 9 999 V TIME 0 to 1 999 sec Duration of effect M204 V TIME is effective until a new voltage is output with M200 to M204 6 22 2 Graphic Simulation without TOOL CALL Graphic simulation is also available on machines that operate without tool definition e g water jet and laser cutting machines 7 7 7 7 In MP7315 specify the tool radius for the graphic simulation 7 7 7 7 In MP7316 define the pen...

Page 785: ...should not be interrupted 7 7 7 7 With MP7440 bit 2 and MP3030 bit 0 specify whether the program run should be interrupted If you deselect the program stop you must not perform the following functions during output PLC positioning Datum shift Oriented spindle stop Limit switch range switchover MP3030 Behavior of the spindle Input Bit 0 0 Axis stop for TOOL CALL S 1 No axis stop for TOOL CALL S MP7...

Page 786: ...6 456 HEIDENHAIN Technical Manual TNC 426 TNC 430 ...

Page 787: ...I2 Signal 2 of the position encoder SAVED The signal last recorded is saved PLC The PLC operands B W D I O T C are recorded Enter the operands in the input field next to the PLC Acceleration Nominal value of the acceleration m s2 Jerk Nominal value of the jerk m s3 Pos Diff Difference between position and speed encoder mm Current Accel Current acceleration value m s2 Calculated from position encod...

Page 788: ...o be issued as a step or ramp If you select ramp output then the programmed feed rate kV factors and acceleration values that you have specified with machine parameters go into effect If you select step output a step will be output as nominal velocity value when you press the axis direction buttons in the MANUAL operating mode During output the position control loop is opened Feed rate 7 7 7 7 Ent...

Page 789: ...en the triggering threshold of the selected channel is exceeded Trigger threshold 7 7 7 7 Enter the trigger threshold in the following dimensions Velocity mm min Position mm Shaft speed mm min Following error µm Analog voltage mV Current A Acceleration m s2 Jerk m s3 Slope 7 7 7 7 Select whether the rising edge positive slope or falling edge negative slope of the signal acts as trigger Pre Trigger...

Page 790: ...second cursor by pressing the CURSOR 1 2 soft key The oscilloscope displays the amplitude and time of this cursor The time s of the second cursor is shown with respect to the time point of the first cursor With this function you can measure the acceleration time of an axis for example Meaning of the soft keys Meaning of the soft keys You select one of the four channels and a new soft key row with ...

Page 791: ...ecall these data with the PC program PLCdesign Select the memory area to be displayed A new soft key row with the following soft keys appears Move the signal to the left Move the signal to the right Decrease the horizontal resolution Increase the horizontal resolution Return to oscilloscope display Back to setup menu Start recording The recording is ended either with a trigger condition or with th...

Page 792: ...ne use the PLC development software PLCdesign 7 7 7 7 Ensure that the instruction PLCMAIN in the system file OEM SYS refers to the current PLC program 6 24 2 Digital Axes Digital and analog axes are defined with MP120 The TNC must be adjusted in sequence for the n Current controller n Speed controller n Position controller The signals that you need are recorded with the integral oscilloscope NC so...

Page 793: ...r modules These tables are then taken into account by the TNC If at any time you want to use the HEIDENHAIN standard tables again you must erase the above mentioned tables in the PLC partition If the PLC partition does not contain a MOTOR MOT table the control searches the PLC partition for the MOTOR ASN and MOTOR SN lists If these are not available either the HEIDENHAIN standard table is used Mea...

Page 794: ...hronous motor LSM linear motor n Designation of motor NAME n Operating mode MODE n Rated current I N in A n Rated voltage U N in V n Rated speed N N in rpm n Rated frequency F N in Hz n No load voltage U0 in V n No load current I0 in A n Stator resistance cold R1 in mΩ n Rotor resistance cold R2 in mΩ n Stator leakage reactance XStr1 in mΩ n Rotor leakage reactance XStr2 in mΩ n Magnetizing reacta...

Page 795: ...z Spindle with integral DSP 5000 Hz Spindle without integral DSP Value from MP2180 0 8 n X1 Stator leakage reactance mΩ n X2 Rotor leakage reactance mΩ n fN Rated frequency Hz A negative result means that there is no series reactor MP2100 0 8 Type of power module for axes 1 to 9 Input Name of the selected power module entered by the TNC MP2101 Model of power module for the spindle Input Name of th...

Page 796: ...8 Field angle offset on synchronous motors for axes 1 to 9 Input 0 to 60 Logic unit up to Id Nr xxx xxx 3x The HEIDENHAIN and SIEMENS current controllers differ in their characteristics The maximum speed for synchronous motors attainable with the TNC lies 15 below the value given in the SIEMENS data sheets Please take this into account when you choose motors By entering a field angle offset you ca...

Page 797: ...RIVE inverters The HEIDENHAIN TNC 426 PB M and TNC 430 PA M controls work with a PWM frequency of 5 kHz SIEMENS power modules are normally driven with a PWM frequency of 3 2 kHz spindle and 4 kHz axes The rated current values IN are defined for these frequencies If power modules are operated with a higher PWM frequency 5 kHz high temperatures can be caused in these modules in some cases This appli...

Page 798: ...The percent reduction of the rated current can be calculated with the following formula n X1 Reduction factor of the current in at a PWM frequency of 8 kHz n X2 PWM threshold frequency in kHz at which the electrical power reduction begins n fPWM PWM frequency in kHz set in MP2180 0 8 This results in the reference value for I2 t monitoring Example for a 50 A power module n Axis power module with 50...

Page 799: ...ules or 7 7 7 7 Reduce the reference value for the I2 t monitoring X R 100 100 40 8 kHz 4 kHz 8 kHz 4 kHz 40 è ø æ ö 0 XB 1 0 100 1 00 X R 100 100 40 8 kHz 4 kHz 8 kHz 3 2 kHz 40 è ø æ ö 10 XB 1 10 100 0 90 INnew IN 100 XR MP230x XB Note A reduction of the rated current of the power module can cause a reduction of the rated torque and the rated power of the motor if equal values for rated current ...

Page 800: ...rakes The spindle rotates with rated speed for the duration of approx 2 s During this period the field angle at the reference mark or datum is determined and automatically saved in a file on the hard disk 7 7 7 7 Press the END soft key The control carries out a reset Then the assignment of the field angle is available If an encoder with EnDat interface is used the field angle is assigned to the ze...

Page 801: ...rence marks MP1410 x 0 5 Position monitoring in operation with velocity feedforward control erasable MP1420 x 2 Position monitoring in operation with velocity feedforward control EMERGENCY STOP MP1510 x 1 kv factor for velocity feedforward control MP1710 x 50 Position monitoring in operation with following error erasable MP1720 x 50 Position monitoring in operation with following error EMERGENCY S...

Page 802: ... D Status 1 Commissioning not active or as yet no axis is selected Bits 0 to 5 correspond to selected axes 1 to 6 Bit 15 Spindle selected Bit 16 Circuit type of the spindle 0 Wye connection 1 Delta connection MP2512 x 0 Limiting the integral factor of the speed controller MP2520 x 0 Differential factor of the shaft speed controller MP2530 x 0 PT2 element of the speed controller MP2540 x 0 Band rej...

Page 803: ... file with the PLCPWM command is compiled 7 7 7 7 Switch on the machine control voltage 7 7 7 7 In the OSCILLOSCOPE mode press the SELECT AXIS soft key to select the axis to be optimized 7 7 7 7 Press the START STEP soft key This sends a step function to the current controller and measures the step response Height and length of the step function are calculated by the TNC automatically from the ent...

Page 804: ... 7 7 7 When the current gain is properly adjusted press the STORE MP2400 x soft key to transfer the optimized value directly into the machine parameter 7 7 7 7 Press the END key to exit the I CONTROL mode again MP2400 too large MP2400 optimum Max 600 µs ...

Page 805: ...C stop is inactive M4560 1 Axis direction buttons active Axes are clamped 7 7 7 7 In the MANUAL mode use the oscilloscope function to select a step function approx 500 mm min that will not overdrive the speed controller i e that does not limit I NOMINAL Display the nominal velocity value V NOM RPM the actual speed value V ACT RPM and the nominal current value I NOMINAL 7 7 7 7 Activate the step fu...

Page 806: ...6 476 HEIDENHAIN Technical Manual TNC 426 TNC 430 7 7 7 7 Input value for MP2500 x determined value 0 6 MP2500 too small MP2500 too large ...

Page 807: ...December 2001 Commissioning 6 477 7 7 7 7 Compensate high frequency interference oscillations 400 Hz with MP2530 x or MP2560 x MP2530 optimum MP2530 too small ...

Page 808: ... values 3 to 9 dB MP2530 too large Warning You can use MP2520 x to compensate low frequency oscillation 100 Hz on axes with mechanical problems However HEIDENHAIN recommends that you avoid using MP2520 x if possible Do not use for axes with belt drive Note The compensation dampens the control loop Try first to remove the mechanical causes of the disturbing oscillations To reduce the occurrence of ...

Page 809: ...oning 6 479 7 7 7 7 Increase MP2510 x I factor until you see one overshoot followed by a slight undershoot and the settling time toff is as small as possible realistic value 3 ms to 15 ms MP2510 optimum toff MP2510 too small ...

Page 810: ...peed This can be seen from a continuous readjustment of the current controller see I NOMINAL on the oscilloscope and a fluctuation of the utilization display and it is usually audible This mostly happens with spindle asynchronous motors MP2510 too large I NOMINAL Readjustment of the speed ...

Page 811: ...December 2001 Commissioning 6 481 7 7 7 7 Increase MP2402 x until the motor begins to run smoothly Empirical value MP2402 x approx 2 3 MP2400 x MP2403 x optimum ...

Page 812: ...he nominal current value I NOMINAL during acceleration 7 7 7 7 From the step response of the speed controller you determine the maximum possible acceleration a Acceleration m s2 Fmax Maximum machining feed rate MP1010 x mm min tan Rise time s 7 7 7 7 Enter the maximum possible acceleration in MP1060 x Check the counting direction 7 7 7 7 On the oscilloscope set TRIGGER to FREE RUN 7 7 7 7 To start...

Page 813: ...n control loop is closed W1038 W1040 and all inputs outputs are properly operated 7 7 7 7 Optimize the position control loop in the following 12 steps If the position controller still oscillates after optimization check the I factor may be too high 1 Check the traversing direction see flowchart 7 7 7 7 In MP1340 x enter the sequence in which the reference points are to be traversed ...

Page 814: ...positive and negative direction until they almost reach the EMERGENCY STOP limit switches Write down the displayed positions with algebraic sign 7 7 7 7 Enter the noted values in MP91x x and MP92x x 7 7 7 7 Press the MOD key and select the ACTL display 3 In MP1390 or MP1392 select the type of control For control with velocity feedforward 7 7 7 7 Enter the temporary input values Machine parameter T...

Page 815: ...MAX CALL LBL1 REP 100 100 7 7 7 7 Display the actual speed act speed with the integrated oscilloscope and if necessary also show the following error lag 7 7 7 7 Start the test program with feed rate override 100 7 7 7 7 In MP1090 0 increase the jerk until the overshoot just disappears MP1090 optimum MP1090 too large ...

Page 816: ...the resulting jerk value from MP1090 0 to the axis specific parameters MP1097 x and MP1098 x 7 7 7 7 Increase the kv factor until the oscillation limit is reached 7 7 7 7 Calculate MP1510 MP1510 x determined value 0 6 MP1090 too small Oscillation limit has been reached ...

Page 817: ...maximum machining feed rate in MP1092 In this case define a higher jerk for high feed rates MP1092 to increase acceleration at these feed rates To select the nominal position value filter 7 7 7 7 Run a test program of short line segments 7 7 7 7 Use the oscilloscope to record the following error for each axis 7 7 7 7 Determine for each axis the oscillations on the following error If you cannot fin...

Page 818: ...er MP1099 0 Double filter MP1099 1 Damping dB Frequency to be damped Hz 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 3 10 3 2 2 1 4 12 7 5 4 2 5 13 8 6 3 2 6 14 9 5 4 2 7 15 10 7 3 8 16 6 4 3 2 9 17 11 8 5 10 18 11 19 12 4 3 12 9 7 Damping dB Frequency to be damped Hz 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 3 7 4 3 2 1 1 4 8 5 2 1 5 9 6 4 3 2 1 6 10 1 7 11 7 5 3 2 8 4 9 12 8 2 10 13 6 3 11 2 12 14 9 5 4 ...

Page 819: ...33 38 43 48 54 59 8 11 17 23 28 33 38 43 48 53 58 9 10 16 22 27 32 37 42 47 52 57 10 9 16 21 26 31 36 41 46 51 56 11 7 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 12 6 14 19 24 29 34 39 44 49 54 Note If you have selected the best nominal position value filter for your application please note that your input value can be overwritten by the machine user through Cycle 32 If you have switched off the nominal position ...

Page 820: ...he internal oscilloscope 7 7 7 7 Start the test program with feed rate override 100 7 7 7 7 Increase the value in MP1810 x up to the oscillation limit 7 7 7 7 Calculate MP1810 x MP1810 x determined value 0 6 For axes that are interpolated with each other the kv factors must be equal The axis with the smallest kv factor defines the input value for all axes You can save a number of different kv fact...

Page 821: ... R0 FMAX L X0 R0 FMAX CALL LBL1 REP 100 100 7 7 7 7 Start the test program 7 7 7 7 Display the actual feed rate actl speed with the internal oscilloscope If no oscillations are recognizable no kink point is required If oscillations are visible you must reduce MP1820 x until the oscillations have disappeared MP1820 optimum MP1820 too small ...

Page 822: ...6 492 HEIDENHAIN Technical Manual TNC 426 TNC 430 4 Switch on the nominal position value filter 7 7 7 7 In MP1096 enter a defined tolerance e g 0 02 mm MP1820 too large ...

Page 823: ...rameters MP750 t V ACTL Keep in mind the units for t and V ACTL MP752 approx 20 ms determined in test Note To ensure that the monitoring functions become effective at the right moment you must enter meaningful values MP Temporary input value Meaning MP1030 x 0 01 mm Positioning window MP1110 x 2 MP1030 x Standstill monitoring MP1140 x 0 03 1000 rpm Movement monitoring MP2800 x 0 5 mm Motion monito...

Page 824: ... 20 MP1513 x 0 7 7 7 7 With the integrated oscilloscope display the following error in the Y axis Y SDIFF 7 7 7 7 Start the program and adjust the feed rate override so that the following error caused by static friction becomes visible 7 7 7 7 Increase the feed rate until the following error is no longer measurable 7 7 7 7 From the current contouring feed rate calculate the feed rate specific to t...

Page 825: ...ror is no longer measurable If the machine oscillates at a standstill 7 7 7 7 Decrease MP1512 x 8 Limit the integral factor of the shaft speed controller Very high static friction can cause an axis to jerk loose and jump around the target position 7 7 7 7 Increase MP2512 x until the axis remains stationary ...

Page 826: ...F50 CALL LBL 1 10 7 7 7 7 Use the integrated oscilloscope to record the actual shaft speed ACTUAL RPM and the nominal current value I NOMINAL 7 7 7 7 Start the program 7 7 7 7 With the feed rate override knob adjust the motor speed to 10 rpm MP2020 x 7 7 7 7 Determine the current I NOMINAL in both directions of rotation 7 7 7 7 Calculate MP2630 x MP2630 x I NOML1 I NOML2 2 ...

Page 827: ...cord the actual shaft speed ACTUAL RPM and the nominal current value I NOMINAL 7 7 7 7 Start the test program 7 7 7 7 With the feed rate override knob adjust the motor speed to 10 rpm MP2020 x 7 7 7 7 Determine the current I NOMINAL in both directions of rotation 7 7 7 7 Calculate MP2610 x 7 7 7 7 Change the test program so that the motor rotates at its rated speed 7 7 7 7 Restart the test program...

Page 828: ...the motor cannot be driven at the rated speed 7 7 7 7 Measure I NOMINAL at maximum speed rapid traverse and calculate the current at rated speed as follows Inmax Current at rapid traverse nmax Shaft speed at rapid traverse MP2620 x I NOML1 I NOML2 2 MP2620 x Inmax MP2610 x rated rpm nmax MP2610 x ...

Page 829: ... 7 7 7 Start the test program 7 7 7 7 Adjust the speed with the feed rate override knob so that I NOMINAL is not limited 7 7 7 7 Measure the gradient of the acceleration ramp in the part in which I INT RPM remains constant 7 7 7 7 Calculate MP2600 x I INT RPM Integral action component of the nominal current value t Acceleration time in which I INT RPM remains constant V ACT RPM Change of actual rp...

Page 830: ...70 0 7 MP1060 x MP1060 x represents the smallest acceleration in the working plane 7 7 7 7 At mid range feed rate approx 500 mm min check the parameter MP2610 At the optimum setting the reversal peaks are at a minimum At feed rates greater than approx 6000 rpm the reversal peaks might point inward as a result of overcompensation 7 7 7 7 In this case increase MP2612 x until the reversal peaks no lo...

Page 831: ...December 2001 Commissioning 6 501 ...

Page 832: ...d establish a nominal value connection to the logic unit MP Temporary input value Meaning MP1030 x 0 01 Positioning window MP1090 x 1 Maximum permissible jerk on the tool path MP1092 Maximum rapid traverse Feed rate threshold from which MP1090 1 becomes effective MP1110 x 2 0 Standstill monitoring MP1140 x 10 Movement monitoring MP1410 x 0 5 Position monitoring in operation with velocity feedforwa...

Page 833: ... nominal speed for rapid traverse Connect an oscilloscope to the tachometer of the motor Test the step response on the tachometer during the step output 7 7 7 7 Adjust the proportional P component and the integral action I component of the speed controller at the servo amplifier Determining the acceleration After adjusting the servo amplifier you can determine from the step response the maximum po...

Page 834: ... counting traversing direction see flowchart Note For analog axes you must adjust the servo amplifier before you optimize the position controller Press END Change MP1040 or MP210 NO YES Change machine parameters Change MP210 MP1040 MP1320 Power on YES TRAVERSE REFERENCE POINTS with axis direction keys Press CE to clear POWER INTERRUPTED message Switch on control voltage Power off Change MP1320 Tra...

Page 835: ... velocity feedforward control same procedure as for digital axes 4 Perform an offset adjustment On the TNC See The Control Loop on page 6 109 5 Activate monitoring functions 7 7 7 7 Enter the following temporary input values when you begin See Digital Axes on page 6 462 6 Compensate the backlash Same procedure as for digital axes 7 Compensate the static stick slip friction Same procedure as for di...

Page 836: ...oller 7 7 7 7 Activate a spindle speed from the highest gear range 7 7 7 7 With the integrated oscilloscope record the nominal velocity value V NOM RPM the actual speed value V ACT RPM and the nominal current value I NOMINAL 7 7 7 7 Output a step by activating the spindle on function M03 M04 7 7 7 7 Choose the height of the step function for a very low speed so as not to overload the speed control...

Page 837: ...December 2001 Commissioning 6 507 You can modify the machine parameters 7 7 7 7 In the setup menu press the MP EDIT soft key 7 7 7 7 Calculate MP2501 MP2501 MP2501 0 6 ...

Page 838: ...ot followed by a slight undershoot 7 7 7 7 Output the step with maximum shaft speed I NOMINAL is within the limitation during acceleration I NOMINAL must not oscillate after reaching the maximum speed If I NOMINAL oscillates Reduce MP2501 and MP2511 evenly until the overshoots are minimized I NOMINAL oscillating ...

Page 839: ...09 Optimize the acceleration 7 7 7 7 Optimize the acceleration individually for each gear range 7 7 7 7 Choose a ramp gradient at which the motor almost reaches the electrical current limit and set it with MP3411 x Only one overshoot ...

Page 840: ...ating mode Adapt the nominal value trace to the actual trace Checking the direction of rotation You can check the direction of rotation of the spindle when M03 is output If the spindle does not rotate in clockwise direction 7 7 7 7 Modify MP3130 Position controller The position control loop of the spindle is closed only during the spindle orientation 7 7 7 7 Close the position control loop of the ...

Page 841: ... integrated oscilloscope record V ACT RPM and activate a shaft speed greater than the rated speed If V ACT RPM pumps only at high shaft speeds increase MP2403 until the spindle runs quietly If V ACT RPM oscillates even at low shaft speeds the problem lies with resonance oscillations You can compensate these oscillations in the same way as for the axes i e with the differential factor low pass filt...

Page 842: ... started 7 7 7 7 Press the I CONTROL soft key 7 7 7 7 In the MANUAL mode of operation acknowledge the Power Interrupted message The PLC program defined in the OEM SYS file with the PLCPWM command is compiled 7 7 7 7 In the OSCILLOSCOPE mode press the SELECT AXIS soft key to select the spindle 7 7 7 7 With the STAR DELTA soft key select either the wye or delta connection 7 7 7 7 With the I FACTOR P...

Page 843: ...December 2001 Commissioning 6 513 7 7 7 7 With the soft key increase the P factor MP2421 x to the oscillation limit MP2421 too small MP2421 too large ...

Page 844: ...421 X soft key 7 7 7 7 With the I FACTOR P FACTOR soft key select the I factor 7 7 7 7 With the soft key increase the I factor MP2431 x until you see one overshoot but no undershoot 7 7 7 7 Confirm this value with the STORE MP2431 X soft key 7 7 7 7 Switch off the machine to exit the I CONTROL mode 7 7 7 7 Press END MP2421 at the oscillation limit MP2431 optimum ...

Page 845: ...roller Same procedure as for TNC 426 digital spindle Acceleration Same procedure as for TNC 426 digital spindle Direction of rotation Same procedure as for TNC 426 digital spindle Position controller Same procedure as for TNC 426 digital spindle ...

Page 846: ...6 516 HEIDENHAIN Technical Manual TNC 426 TNC 430 ...

Page 847: ...Same procedure as for analog axes Acceleration Same procedure as for digital spindle You measure the signals directly at the servo amplifier with an external oscilloscope Direction of rotation Same procedure as for digital spindle Position controller Same procedure as for digital spindle ...

Page 848: ...6 518 HEIDENHAIN Technical Manual TNC 426 TNC 430 ...

Page 849: ...SCI S DIFF OSCI V N SOLL s s 0 v Dt D V x MP1089 MP1095 MP1096 MP1097 MP1098 MP1099 MP2020 MP2630 MP2500 MP2560 MP2561 MP1521 MP1396 Velocity feedforward control Friction compensation Speed controllers Position nominal value Current controller Nominal current value Actual current Power stage Actual position Actual rpm Machine slide OSCI V NOML Nominal velocity value OSCI I NOML OSCI I ACTL OSCI V ...

Page 850: ...r 7 22 7 3 3 Data Transfer NC Program NC SYSWRITE 7 23 7 3 4 Data Transfer NC NC Program SYSREAD 7 27 7 3 5 Data Transfer of Machine Parameters PLC 7 35 7 3 6 Interrogate PLC Operands in the NC Program WAIT FOR 7 38 7 4 Hard Disk Organization 7 39 7 4 1 Partitions 7 39 7 4 2 Description of the System Files SYS 7 41 7 5 Program Creation 7 46 7 5 1 ASCII Editor 7 46 7 5 2 Program Format 7 46 7 5 3 P...

Page 851: ...ents 7 164 7 12 Constants Field KF 7 169 7 13 Program Structures 7 170 7 13 1 IF ELSE ENDI structure 7 171 7 13 2 REPEAT UNTIL structure 7 171 7 13 3 WHILE ENDW structure 7 172 7 14 Linking Files 7 174 7 15 PLC Modules 7 177 7 15 1 Markers Bytes Words and Double Words 7 177 7 15 2 Number Conversion 7 180 ...

Page 852: ...e the TNC begins a new PLC scan i e every 21 ms the inputs are reread and the outputs are reset The PLC cycle time can be set with MP7600 1 and ascertained with Module 9196 For a PLC cycle time of 21 ms a PLC scan must not take more than 10 ms Module 9196 Finding the PLC cycle time The PLC cycle time is determined in ms Call CM 9196 PL D PLC cycle time in ms MP7600 1 PLC cycle time MP7600 1 Positi...

Page 853: ...f the sequential program must not exceed 300 10 5 ms If it is higher the TNC outputs the blinking error message PLC time out Processing time current The time taken for the latest PLC scan in Code length Length of the translated sequential program in KB Maximum value 512 KB PGM in exec mem Name of the last compiled PLC program program in executive memory After switch on the TNC automatically compil...

Page 854: ...editing Check logical states M I O T C display contents B W D See The Table Function on page 7 11 Display TRACE function or logic diagram See The TRACE Function on page 7 7 Compile PLC program See COMPILE Function on page 7 13 Process monitor See Process monitor on page 7 165 Activate the integrated oscilloscope See Integrated Oscilloscope on page 6 457 Display list of machine parameters Exit PLC ...

Page 855: ...C when you press the FILE TYPE soft key With the MORE FUNCTIONS soft key you select the following functions Soft key Function Show all files Show only PLC programs PLC Show only ASCII files A Show only help files HLP Show only system files SYS Show only compensation value tables COM Show only tables with compensation value assignments CMA Show only tables with PLC error messages PET Back to previo...

Page 856: ...NC displays n The statement list STL of the selected PLC program n The content of the operand and accumulator in hexadecimal or decimal code for each program line selectable via soft key The TNC identifies every cyclically executed command with an asterisk With the arrow keys or the GOTO function you can select the program section that you would like to see on the screen The PLC program to be sele...

Page 857: ...s Counters for a logic diagram Show logic diagram Search for text in statement list TRACE IN CODE Show operand or accumulator contents in hexadecimal or decimal Start and stop the dynamic display of the operand contents accumulator contents and logic diagram with STOP DISPLAY and START DISPLAY Start trace End trace Back to previous menu ...

Page 858: ...ger event The following are possible trigger conditions n 1 Record if operand is logical 1 trigger on positive edge n 0 Record if operand is logical 0 trigger on negative edge If you do not need a trigger condition answer the dialog prompt with NO ENT If you enter no trigger condition for any of the operands the TNC records the states of the operands continuously The memory holds the most recent 1...

Page 859: ... Press the STOP TRACE soft key or the TNC terminates recording automatically as soon as the trigger event occurs The PCTR indicator blinks in the status window as long as the TNC is recording logical states As soon as recording ends you can use the arrow keys to select the desired area in the TRACE buffer Example of a logic diagram ...

Page 860: ... show their states dynamically on the screen To select a certain operand use the cursor keys or the GOTO key Press the END key to return to the main menu Soft keys in the table function first soft key row Soft key Function Set the selected operands Reset the selected operands Show list of markers Show list of inputs Show list of outputs Show list of counters Show list of timers Back to previous me...

Page 861: ...rds Show list of double words Show contents of operands in hexadecimal or decimal List of strings only the first 70 characters Overwriting is not possible Save states of selectable operand areas in an ASCII file Areas of more than one operand can be saved e g M0 to M100 W100 to W118 Display saved ASCII file with states of operands Back to previous menu ...

Page 862: ...mory The name of the compiled program then appears in the main menu next to PGM IN EXEC MEM To compile a PLC program 7 7 7 7 Press the COMPILE soft key The TNC displays an overview of existing PLC programs 7 7 7 7 With the cursor keys select the PLC program to be compiled 7 7 7 7 Press the SELECT soft key If the TNC displays error messages See Error Messages on page 10 3 ...

Page 863: ... I255 second PL I256 to I319 third PL I320 to I383 fourth PL Output O O0 to O30 LE O32 to O62 first PL O64 to O94 second PL O128 to O158 third PL O160 to O190 fourth PL Counter C Set counter C0 to C31 Counter contents C48 to C79 Counter pulse release C96 to C127 Timers T Timer start T0 to T47 Timer is running T48 to T95 and T96 to T303 Byte Word Double word B W D B0 to B4095 8 bits B0 to B127 free...

Page 864: ...s from 0 to 4092 is accessible The address parameter indicates the high byte of the word address W and the highest byte of the double word address Markers timers and counters are addressed with the corresponding code letters M T or C followed by the operand number e g M500 T7 C18 Double word Word Byte Memory Word address Double word address D0 W0 B0 8 bits High byte Highest byte B1 8 bits Low byte...

Page 865: ...ach additional scan The TNC reserves the timer with the duration defined in MP4110 x and sets the markers T48 to T95 timer is running until the defined duration has expired You can also set and start the timers T0 to T47 with Module 9006 Timers T96 to T303 can be started only through Module 9006 Example Start of timer 1 Cycle time in MP4110 1 9 PLC cycles Start timer Timer running Machine paramete...

Page 866: ...0 24 T25 T73 MP4110 25 T26 T74 MP4110 26 T27 T75 MP4110 27 T28 T76 MP4110 28 T29 T77 MP4110 29 T30 T78 MP4110 30 T31 T79 MP4110 31 T32 T80 MP4110 32 T33 T81 MP4110 33 T34 T82 MP4110 34 T35 T83 MP4110 35 T36 T84 MP4110 36 T37 T85 MP4110 37 T38 T86 MP4110 38 T39 T87 MP4110 39 T40 T88 MP4110 40 T41 T89 MP4110 41 T42 T90 MP4110 42 T43 T91 MP4110 43 T44 T92 MP4110 44 T45 T93 MP4110 45 T46 T94 MP4110 46...

Page 867: ...regardless of whether the module is called before or after setting T0 to T47 n One of the timers from T48 to T96 is set immediately after the module is called T0 to T47 are not set n Unit of measure milliseconds ms n The TNC rounds the actual cycle time to whole number PLC cycle times n Cancel cycle time Reset timers T48 to T303 Call PS B W D K Timer no Input value 0 to 303 PS B W D K Cycle time I...

Page 868: ...counter Example Logic diagram for counter C1 Preset value in MP4120 1 10 PLC cycles Set counter Counter is running Counter is starting Machine parameter C0 C48 C96 MP4120 0 C1 C49 C97 MP4120 1 C2 C50 C98 MP4120 2 C3 C51 C99 MP4120 3 C4 C52 C100 MP4120 4 C5 C53 C101 MP4120 5 C6 C54 C102 MP4120 6 C7 C55 C103 MP4120 7 C8 C56 C104 MP4120 8 C9 C57 C105 MP4120 9 C10 C58 C106 MP4120 10 C11 C59 C107 MP412...

Page 869: ... MP4120 20 C21 C69 C117 MP4120 21 C22 C70 C118 MP4120 22 C23 C71 C119 MP4120 23 C24 C72 C120 MP4120 24 C25 C73 C121 MP4120 25 C26 C74 C122 MP4120 26 C27 C75 C123 MP4120 27 C28 C76 C124 MP4120 28 C29 C77 C125 MP4120 29 C30 C78 C126 MP4120 30 C31 C79 C127 MP4120 31 Set counter Counter is running Counter is starting Machine parameter ...

Page 870: ...rker M4590 MP4130 3 Fast PLC input sets marker M4591 MP4130 4 Fast PLC input sets marker M4592 MP4130 5 Fast PLC input sets marker M4593 MP4131 2 5 Condition for activating fast PLC inputs Input 0 Activate at LOW level 1 Activate at HIGH level Set Reset W522 Activate the high speed PLC inputs Bit 2 Fast PLC input defined in MP4130 2 Bit 3 Fast PLC input defined in MP4130 3 Bit 4 Fast PLC input def...

Page 871: ...the two values transferred During transfer the marker M4075 is set by the NC Transfer is acknowledged by the PLC by setting the marker M4095 7 3 2 Data Transfer PLC NC Program Q Parameter Data transfer from the PLC to the NC program goes through Q parameters Q100 to Q107 i e from the PLC you can overwrite Q parameters Q100 to Q107 7 7 7 7 In double word D528 enter the numerical value to be transfe...

Page 872: ... System data item Spindle switchover 20 13 0 Spindle 1 1 Spindle 2 Data from the tool table 50 1 Tool no Tool length L 2 Tool no Tool radius R 3 Tool no Tool radius R2 4 Tool no Oversize in tool length DL 5 Tool no Oversize in tool radius DR 6 Tool no Oversize in tool radius DR2 7 Tool no Tool locked TL 0 not locked 1 locked 8 Tool no Number of the replacement tool RT 9 Tool no Maximum tool age TI...

Page 873: ... Positive software limit switches in axes 1 to 9 4 Number of axes whose software limit switches are to be overwritten Number of the first of several consecutive Q parameters 1st Q Neg limit switch in 1st axis 2nd Q Pos limit switch in 1st axis 3rd Q Neg limit switch in 2nd axis etc 5 Limit switch monitoring 1 off 0 on Tilting axes 290 1 Tilting axis geometry description TS touch trigger probe 350 ...

Page 874: ...ng position 4 in axis Z Measuring touch probe 350 30 Effective length 31 Effective radius 1 32 Effective radius 2 33 Diameter of calibration ring 34 1 Center offset reference axis 2 Center offset minor axis 35 1 Compensation factor in axis 1 2 Compensation factor in axis 2 3 Compensation factor in axis 3 36 1 Power ratio in axis 1 2 Power ratio in axis 2 3 Power ratio in axis 3 Coordinate transfor...

Page 875: ...dinate system e g rotated shifted 2 Transformation of the active coordinate system e g rotated shifted into the manual mode coordinate system 5 5 Ask if due to a tilt motion an axis is shown in an untilted coordinate system on top of another axis The number of the first of two sequential Q parameters must be given It contains the axis to be asked 0 X 1 Y 2 Z The second Q parameter should return th...

Page 876: ...ber ID System data number NR System data index IDX System data item Program information 10 1 mm 0 inch 1 2 Overlap factor for pocket milling 3 Number of the active fixed cycle 4 Number of the last DEF active OEM cycle Machine state 20 1 Tool number 2 Prepared tool number 3 Active tool number 0 X 6 U 1 Y 7 V 2 Z 8 W 4 Programmed spindle speed 5 Active spindle status 1 Spindle status undefined 0 M3 ...

Page 877: ...versize in tool length DL 5 Tool no Oversize in tool radius DR 6 Tool no Oversize in tool radius DR2 7 Tool no Tool locked TL 0 not locked 1 locked 8 Tool no Number of the replacement tool RT 9 Tool no Maximum tool age TIME1 10 Tool no Maximum tool age TIME2 11 Tool no Current tool age CUR TIME 12 Tool no PLC status 13 Tool no Maximum tooth length LCUTS 14 Tool no Maximum plunge angle ANGLE 15 Too...

Page 878: ... Tool number Pocket number P Values programmed in TOOL CALL 60 1 Tool number T 2 Active tool number 0 X 6 U 1 Y 7 V 2 Z 8 W 3 Spindle speed S 4 Oversize in tool length DL 5 Oversize in tool radius DR 6 Automatic TOOL CALL 0 yes 1 no 7 Oversize in tool radius DR2 Position programmed in TOOL CALL 70 1 1 Valid position 2 1 Position in X axis 2 Position in Y axis 3 Position in Z axis 3 Feed rate 1 no ...

Page 879: ...e of misalignment between the spindle and the tilted coordinate system 214 8 Tolerance programmed in Cycle 32 or MP1096 220 2 1 to 9 Current datum shift of the axes 1 to 9 3 1 to 9 Difference between reference point and datum point 4 1 to 9 Current PLC datum shift of the axes 1 to 9 Traverse range 230 2 1 to 9 Negative software limit switches in axes 1 to 9 3 1 to 9 Positive software limit switche...

Page 880: ...irection of the center offset with respect to spindle 0 TT touch probe for tool measurement 350 20 1 Center of axis 1 2 Center of axis 2 3 Center of axis 3 21 Effective radius 22 1 Probing position 1 in axis X 2 Probing position 1 in axis Y 3 Probing position 1 in axis Z 23 1 Probing position 2 in axis X 2 Probing position 2 in axis Y 3 Probing position 2 in axis Z 24 1 Probing position 3 in axis ...

Page 881: ...ouch probe cycle or last touch point from cycle 0 for the axes 1 to 9 without probe length compensation but with probe radius compensation workpiece coordinate system 2 1 to 9 Last datum of a manual touch probe cycle or last touch point from cycle 0 for the axes 1 to 9 without probe length or radius compensation machine coordinate system 3 Measurement result of touch probe cycles 0 and 1 without p...

Page 882: ...ed machining Touch probe cycles 990 1 Approach behavior 0 Standard behavior 1 Effective radius safety clearance zero 2 10 0 0 Execution not in block scan 1 0 Execution in block scan 1 0 Invalid index 16 0 0 Execution not in Automatic operating mode 1 0 Execution in Automatic operating mode 1 0 Invalid index Coordinate transformation 3 No of the 1st of 9 consecutive Q parameters for axes X Y Z A B ...

Page 883: ...la must be entered 1010 MP number MP index 0 MP does not exist 1 MP exists PLC data 2000 10 Marker no PLC markers 20 Input no PLC input 30 Output no PLC output 40 Counter no PLC counter 50 Timer no PLC timer 60 Byte no PLC byte 70 Word no PLC word 80 Double word no PLC double word Group name Group number ID System data number NR System data index IDX System data item ...

Page 884: ...C D780 Value from MP4210 3 NC NC D784 Value from MP4210 4 NC NC D788 Value from MP4210 5 NC NC D792 Value from MP4210 6 NC NC D796 Value from MP4210 7 NC NC D800 Value from MP4210 8 NC NC D804 Value from MP4210 9 NC NC D808 Value from MP4210 10 NC NC D812 Value from MP4210 11 NC NC D816 Value from MP4210 12 NC NC D820 Value from MP4210 13 NC NC D824 Value from MP4210 14 NC NC D828 Value from MP421...

Page 885: ...D956 Value from MP4210 47 NC NC W960 Value from MP4220 0 NC NC W962 Value from MP4220 1 NC NC W964 Value from MP4220 2 NC NC W966 Value from MP4220 3 NC NC W968 Value from MP4220 4 NC NC W976 Value from MP4310 0 NC NC W978 Value from MP4310 1 NC NC W980 Value from MP4310 2 NC NC W982 Value from MP4310 3 NC NC W984 Value from MP4310 4 NC NC W986 Value from MP4310 5 NC NC W988 Value from MP4310 6 NC...

Page 886: ...e you can read the value of the given machine parameter from the active machine parameter file The input value is transferred as a natural number with the decimal point shifted by the number of possible decimal places Only the value from the editable machine parameter file is read not any value modified in the run time memory by PLC Module 9031 For non indexed machine parameters zero must be trans...

Page 887: ...d with a constant Permitted PLC operands M B W D T C I O If you enter no condition the interruption will continue until the operand 0 Examples FN20 WAIT FOR I10 1 Continue the NC program if PLC input I10 is set FN20 WAIT FOR I10 Continue the NC program if PLC input I10 equals zero FN20 WAIT FOR B3000 255 Continue the NC program if the content of B3000 is greater than 255 Operator Function Equal or...

Page 888: ...imarily with the PLC partition SYS partition System specific files such as system files NC dialogs HEIDENHAIN cycles etc The SYS partition is not visible and cannot be selected Size of the partitions As of NC software 280 476 06 hard disks with more than 3 25 GB are supported In a hard disk with 3 25 GB the partitions are divided as follows If the hard disk has more than 3 25 GB the SYS partition ...

Page 889: ...ectory otherwise an error message appears System files SYS MP_NAME MP only for default setting Compensation value tables CMA and COM PLC programs PLC main program and modules Directory for PLC dialogs and error messages created automatically PLC dialogs and error messages A Help files HLP Machine parameter files MP NC macros Directory for OEM cycles created automatically by CycleDesign Pictures fo...

Page 890: ...ly enters it in the OEM SYS file Example entry PLCMAIN PLC PLC_PGM MAIN_430 PLC PLCPWM Path for PLC program for commissioning of digital axes Example entry PLCPWM PLC IB_PGM IB430 PLC PLCERRTAB mandatory entry for PLC error messages Path for PLC error message table If you compile a PLC program the TNC automatically enters it in the OEM SYS file Example entry PLCERRTAB PLC PLC_PGM ERR_TAB PET PLCER...

Page 891: ... or checksum LSV2TIME2 Timeout during transmission of DLE 0 DLE 1 or NAK until reception of a valid character KINEMATIC Path for the tilting axis geometry description assignment table Example input KINEMATIC PLC KINELIST TAB REMOTE LOCKSOFTKEYVISIBLE Display External access ON OFF soft key REMOTE PLCPASSWORDNEEDED Access to the PLC partition using the LSV2 protocol only with the password from PLCP...

Page 892: ...K S String with code word PS B W D K String number for result 0 to 3 CM 9271 Error recognition Marker Value Meaning M4203 0 Interface was released 1 Error See W1022 W1022 3 Not a valid string for code word or result 12 String for code word is too long 20 Module was not called in a spawn job or submit job 30 Code word was not found Marker Value Meaning M4203 0 Interface was released 1 Error See W10...

Page 893: ...can be turned off with FN17 SYSWRITE ID230 NR5 At the end of an NC macro the limit switch monitoring is always switched on As of NC software 280 476 03 PGM CALL including NC macros and CYCL CALL for cycles greater than 68 are calculated automatically with the look ahead function and run without exact stop At the beginning and end of the called program or cycle it can happen that a missing synchron...

Page 894: ...h future HEIDENHAIN code words your code words should begin with the character P or with the name of the company Call PS B W D K S Code word CM 9291 Error recognition TNC SYS In the TNC partition TMAT Path for list of tool materials WMAT Path for list of workpiece materials PCDT Path for cutting data tables Marker Value Meaning M4203 0 NC macro was executed 1 Error code in W1022 W1022 2 NCMACRO SY...

Page 895: ...ration part and the operand part The operation describes the function to be executed It says how the operand is to be processed by the TNC The operand shows what is to be operated with It consists of the operand abbreviation and a parameter address With the PLC commands you can combine gate delete and load register and memory contents both with bit and word processing For word processing you can a...

Page 896: ...machine in the PLC program and indicate such malfunctions on the screen with plain language error messages Module 9019 Size of the processing stack To debug functions you can use Module 9019 to interrogate the contents of the processing stack The function answers with the number of bytes that lie on the processing stack of the PLC at the moment If the processing stack is empty the TNC returns the ...

Page 897: ...ed file in the Program Run mode RUNDATUM Selected datum table in the Program Run mode SIMPGM Selected file in the Test Run mode SIMDATUM Selected datum table in the Program Test mode SIMTOOL Selected tool table in the Program Test mode RUNBRKPGM Target file in the block scan in the Program Run mode SIMBRKPGM Target file in the block scan in the Program Test mode MDIPGM Selected file in the Positio...

Page 898: ...word range of the TNC 415 MP4020 PLC Compatibility with TNC 415 TNC 425 Format xxxxx Input Bit 0 Convert axis words W1024 and following to markers Bit 1 Convert new markers 4000 and following to old markers 2000 and following Bit 2 Convert configuration bits from MP4310 into markers M2192 to M2239 and M3200 to M3263 Bit 3 Error markers are available Bit 4 Remanent markers in the range M1000 to M19...

Page 899: ...shows the statements lists STL as they are needed by the TNC The compiler automatically generates these statement lists This juxtaposition of source code and statements list is very helpful for understanding the program Abbreviations were defined for the symbolic label numbers and symbolic operands contained in the source code These abbreviations clearly identify the functions and thereby make the...

Page 900: ...tor_Temp_2 255 K255 17 define Motor_Temp_3 255 K255 18 define Motor_Temp_4 255 K255 19 define Motor_Temp_5 255 K255 20 define Motor_Temp_S 255 21 22 23 ifdef TNC410M or TNC410MA or TNC410PA K0 24 define NC_Type_Digital 0 25 endif 26 27 ifdef TNC426M or TNC426PB or TNC430M or TNC430PA 28 define NC_Type_Digital 0 29 endif 30 31 ifdef TNC410 or TNC410M or TNC410M or TNC410MA or TNC410CA or TNC410PA K...

Page 901: ... c WG_motor_temp_3 W WG_motor_temp 4 W4074 54 c WG_motor_temp_4 W WG_motor_temp 6 W4076 55 c WG_motor_temp_5 W WG_motor_temp 8 W4078 56 c WG_motor_temp_S W WG_motor_temp 10 57 58 59 Error Marker 60 61 62 Type M4800 63 PN_error_mod_9167 M4800 M4801 64 PN_error_mod_9002 M4801 M4802 65 PN_error_mod_9005 M4802 M4803 66 PN_error_mod_9161 M4803 M4804 67 PN_error_Submit_Queue_Full M4804 M4805 68 PN_error...

Page 902: ...1 PN_M4005_S_M03_analog_volt_status M4005 M4006 12 PN_M4006_S_M04_analog_volt_status M4006 M4007 13 PN_M4007_S_M05_0V_status M4007 M4012 14 PN_M4012_S_close_loop_open M4012 15 16 17 Strobe signal from NC to PLC 18 19 M4070 20 NP_M4070_strobe_G_code M4070 M4071 21 NP_M4071_strobe_S_code M4071 M4072 22 NP_M4072_strobe_M_function M4072 23 24 25 Quit NC strobe signal 26 27 M4090 28 PN_M4090_quit_G_cod...

Page 903: ...054_reference_endswitch W1054 94 95 Data for strobe signal 96 D756 97 PN_D756_S_nominal_rpm_PLC D756 W260 98 NP_W260_M_code W260 W256 99 NP_W256_G_code_spindle W256 100 W302 101 NP_W302_Number_PLC_Soft_Key W302 W274 102 NP_W274_Button_Key_Code W274 28 if IO_Belegung IO_MB410 29 define g GLB_IOMB Def 1 2 3 PLC input declaration 4 5 6 type I0 7 I_Ref_Endswitch_1_axis I0 I1 8 I_Ref_Endswitch_2_axis I...

Page 904: ...N initialization 45 46 USES M_Funct Src 47 EXTERN M_Function 48 49 USES Ref_Endl Src 50 EXTERN reference_endswitch 51 52 USES DircBut Src 53 EXTERN Manuel_button_funcktion 54 55 USES Axis Src 56 EXTERN NC_Axis 57 58 USES Spindle Src 59 EXTERN spindle_function 60 61 USES Gear Src 62 EXTERN Gear_Changing 63 64 USES HelpDiag Src 65 EXTERN Axis_Supervision 66 67 Uses Softkeys Src 68 Extern PLC_Soft_ke...

Page 905: ...99 16 LN MG_one_marker 31 S M3999 17 S MG_one_marker 18 33 L M3998 19 L MG_zero_marker 34 R M3998 20 R MG_zero_marker 21 36 L M3999 22 L MG_one_marker 37 S M4572 23 S NP_M4572_enable_jog_mode_Posit 38 R M992 24 R MG_1_clamp_mode_activ 39 R M993 25 R MG_2_clamp_mode_activ 40 R M994 26 R MG_3_clamp_mode_activ 41 S M995 27 S MG_4_clamp_mode_activ 42 S M996 28 S MG_5_clamp_mode_activ 29 44 L M4300 30 ...

Page 906: ...15 PLW 101 PLW 116 A 102 A 117 PLW 103 PLW 118 104 119 K0 105 K 0 120 S M3982 X 106 S MG_active_PWM_axis X 121 INCX 107 INCX 122 LX 108 LX 123 K5 109 K 5 124 UNTILT 110 UNTILT 111 126 Spindle Bit fr 112 Spindle Bit from Bit 5 into Bit 15 copieren 127 LB M3982 113 LB MG_active_PWM_axis 128 W4082 114 WG_Active_PWM_Axis 129 L M3987 115 L MG_active_PWM_axis_S 130 IFT 116 IFT 131 L W4082 117 L WG_Activ...

Page 907: ..._____________________________ KL_BYTE_TYPE 142 K0 KL_DWORD_TYPE 144 K2 KL_INDEX_0 146 K0 KF 160 KL_INDEX_1 147 K1 KL_INDEX_2 148 K2 KL_INDEX_3 149 K3 KL_INDEX_4 150 K4 KL_INDEX_5 151 K5 KL_OFF_POWER_FAIL 12 K0 PS 48 KL_ON_POWER_FAIL 13 K1 PS 46 KL_WORD_TYPE 143 K1 KF 161 ________________________________Static Symbols _______________________________ BL_CASE 9 B4066 88 CASE 92 BL_MPS_READ_IDENTIFY 8...

Page 908: ...M_function 8 208 K3994 9 41 K MG_spi_Pos_M19_R_M0X 9 209 K4805 20 42 K PN_error_not_used_M_function 20 210 K4805 1 43 K PN_error_not_used_M_function 1 211 K4805 2 44 K PN_error_not_used_M_function 2 212 K4805 3 45 K PN_error_not_used_M_function 3 213 K4805 4 46 K PN_error_not_used_M_function 4 214 K4805 5 47 K PN_error_not_used_M_function 5 215 K4805 6 48 K PN_error_not_used_M_function 6 216 K4805...

Page 909: ...993 28 AN MG_T_I_N_supervision 240 M4560 29 PN_M4560_NC_STOP_0_activ 30 242 L I148 31 L I_rapid_button 243 M4561 32 PN_M4561_rapide 33 245 L I3 34 L I_feed_enable 246 M4563 35 PN_M4563_feed_enable 36 248 L I146 37 L I_NC_Start 249 M4564 38 PN_M4564_NC_start 250 M4562 39 PN_M4562_axis_button_latch 40 252 L M4150 41 L NP_M4150_manuel_mode 253 O M4151 42 O NP_M4151_electronic_handwhell 254 O M4155 43...

Page 910: ...ML_XYZ45_PLUS 12 M3200 LB 288 LB 293 ________________________________ Local Labels ________________________________ INPUT_KEYBOARD 49 45 JOG_DIRECTION_BU 73 46 1 2 3 Axis control 5 4 3 2 1 4 5 6 GLOBAL NC_Axis 7 W4062 8 define s WL_current_rpm_control W W4060 9 define s WL_old_current_rpm_control W 10 B4052 11 define s BL_Axis_Step B 5 W2048 12 define WL_Axis_Mask W 13 M3975 14 define s ML_servo_e...

Page 911: ...BS K 15 338 W4062 68 WL_current_rpm_control 339 ELSE 69 ELSE 340 L W4062 70 L WL_current_rpm_control 341 BC K15 71 BC K 15 342 W4062 72 WL_current_rpm_control 343 ENDI 73 ENDI 74 345 L W4062 75 L WL_current_rpm_control 346 W4060 76 WL_old_current_rpm_control 347 IFT 77 IFT 348 L W4062 78 L WL_current_rpm_control 349 W4060 79 WL_old_current_rpm_control 350 A W4082 80 A WG_Active_PWM_Axis 351 W4084 ...

Page 912: ...6 426 LBL CLOSE_LOOP_CLOSE 157 LBL close_loop_close 427 LN M992 X 158 LN MG_1_clamp_mode_activ X 428 IFT 159 IFT 429 L W1038 160 L PN_W1038_closed_loop_open_active 430 AN W2048 161 AN WL_Axis_Mask 431 W1038 162 PN_W1038_closed_loop_open_active 432 ENDI 163 ENDI 164 434 L W1040 165 L PN_W1040_closed_loop_open 435 AN W2048 166 AN WL_Axis_Mask 436 W1040 167 PN_W1040_closed_loop_open 168 438 L W1044 1...

Page 913: ...3975 238 L ML_1_servo_enable_axis 508 O0 239 O_1_axis_enable 509 L M3976 240 L ML_2_servo_enable_axis 510 O1 241 O_2_axis_enable 511 L M3977 242 L ML_3_servo_enable_axis 512 O2 243 O_3_axis_enable 513 L M3978 244 L ML_4_servo_enable_axis 514 O3 245 O_4_axis_enable 515 L M3979 246 L ML_5_servo_enable_axis 516 O4 247 O_5_axis_enable 248 518 L M3970 249 L ML_clamping_1_axis 519 O7 250 O_1_clamping 52...

Page 914: ...31 AN M3969 13 AN ML_spi_pos_start 532 CMT M19_START_SPI_PO 14 CMT M19_start_spi_pos 533 S M3969 15 S ML_spi_pos_start 16 535 LN M3994 17 LN MG_spi_Pos_M19_R_M0X 536 A M4000 18 A NP_M4000_S_in_position 537 R M3969 19 R ML_spi_pos_start 20 539 L M3997 21 L MG_spindle_on_M03 540 S M4005 22 S PN_M4005_S_M03_analog_volt_status 541 R M4006 23 R PN_M4006_S_M04_analog_volt_status 24 543 L M3996 25 L MG_s...

Page 915: ...S_M_func_delay 590 AN T55 72 AN TR_M_func_delay 591 AN M4805 73 AN PN_error_not_used_M_function 592 M4092 74 PN_M4092_quit_M_function 593 EM 75 EM 76 K0 77 define KL_angle_spindle_pos K 0 K100000 78 define KL_RPM_spindle_pos K 100000 K0 79 define KL_direction_spindle_pos K 0 80 596 LBL M19_START_SPI_PO 81 LBL M19_start_spi_pos 597 PS K0 82 PS KL_angle_spindle_pos 598 PS K100000 83 PS KL_RPM_spindl...

Page 916: ...90 46 XO I_gear_range_2 637 AN M4070 47 AN NP_M4070_strobe_G_code 638 AN M4134 48 AN PN_M4134_strobe_G_step_rpm 639 AN M3990 49 AN MG_gear_change_activ 640 O 50 O 641 AN T20 51 AN TS_gear_timeout 642 AN T68 52 AN TR_gear_timout 643 53 644 M4815 54 PN_Error_gear_switching 55 646 L M4815 56 L PN_Error_gear_switching 647 AN M4070 57 AN NP_M4070_strobe_G_code 648 AN M3990 58 AN MG_gear_change_activ 64...

Page 917: ...13 L W256 123 L NP_W256_G_code_spindle 714 B127 124 BL_G_code 125 716 L D756 126 L PN_D756_S_nominal_rpm_PLC 717 D120 127 DL_N_programmed 718 EM 128 EM 129 720 LBL END 04 130 LBL end 04 721 PS M3998 131 PS MG_zero_marker 722 LBL RESET 132 LBL reset 723 L M3999 133 L MG_one_marker 724 R M3990 134 R MG_gear_change_activ 725 R M3991 135 R MG_spindle_on_gear 726 R M4010 136 R PN_M4010_S_swing_right 72...

Page 918: ... PN_error_servo_activ 39 764 L K0 40 L K 0 765 X 41 X 766 REPEAT 42 REPEAT 767 L M3982 43 L MG_active_PWM_axis 768 IFT 44 IFT 769 PS KF AXIS_BIT_CODE 45 PS KF Axis_Bit_Code X 770 CM 9165 46 CM 9165 771 PLW 47 PLW 772 W4068 X 48 WG_motor_temp X 773 S M4812 49 S PN_error_motor_temp 50 775 L M4203 51 L NP_M4203_error_Modul_9xxx 776 S M4810 52 S PN_error_modul_9xxx_Supervision 53 778 PS KF AXIS_BIT_CO...

Page 919: ... 19 CM 9085 20 ENDI 21 17 18 GLOBAL PLC_Soft_keys 19 808 LBL PLC_SOFT_KEYS 20 LBL PLC_Soft_keys 809 L W302 21 L NP_W302_Number_PLC_Soft_Key 810 K0 22 K 0 811 IFT 23 IFT 812 CASE W302 24 CASE NP_W302_Number_PLC_Soft_Key 813 CM EMPTY_SK 25 CM Empty_SK 814 CM OFF_SK 26 CM Off_SK 815 CM ON_SK 27 CM On_SK 816 CM MASKE1_SK 28 CM Maske1_SK 817 CM MASKE2_SK 29 CM Maske2_SK 818 CM DELMASKE_SK 30 CM DelMask...

Page 920: ...L_9200 872 CM 9085 75 CM 9085 873 ENDI 75 ENDI 874 EM 76 EM 77 876 KFIELD SOFT_KEY_ROW 78 KFIELD Soft_key_row 877 K0 79 KL_Empty 878 K1 80 KL_soft_key_Off 879 K2 81 KL_soft_key_On 880 K0 82 KL_Empty 881 K3 83 KL_Mask_1_On 882 K4 84 KL_Mask_2_On 883 K5 85 KL_Mask_Off 884 K0 86 KL_Empty 885 ENDK 87 ENDK 88 887 LBL MASKE1_SK 89 LBL Maske1_SK 888 PS K1 BIG PLC WIND 90 PS K 1 Big PLC Window open 889 CM...

Page 921: ...1 CM 9202 Macro 122 M_Modul_Error_display KG_Error_Modul_9202 122 939 L M4203 122 L NP_M4203_error_Modul_9xxx 940 IFT 122 IFT 941 PS K18 122 PS KG_ERROR_MODUL_9202 942 CM 9085 122 CM 9085 943 ENDI 122 ENDI 123 945 PS K 1 NR STRING B 124 PS K 1 Nr String buffer clear 946 CM 9210 125 CM 9210 947 PLW STATUS ERROR 126 PLW Status Error 948 K1 FEHLER 127 K 1 error Macro 128 M_Error_display KG_Error_Modu...

Page 922: ...________ MANUEL_BUTTON_FU DIRCBUT SRC 26 MAIN_PGM SRC 93 ________________________________ Global Labels _______________________________ M_FUNCTION M_FUNCT SRC 8 MAIN_PGM SRC 86 ________________________________ Global Labels _______________________________ NC_AXIS AXIS SRC 28 MAIN_PGM SRC 94 ________________________________ Global Labels _______________________________ PLC_SOFT_KEYS SOFTKEYS SRC 20...

Page 923: ...3987 INITI472 SRC L 129 MG_GEAR_CHANGE_ACTIV GLB_TCMB DEF 15 M3990 GEAR SRC AN 639 AN 648 S 657 R 724 MG_SPINDLE_ON_GEAR GLB_TCMB DEF 14 M3991 GEAR SRC S 709 R 725 MG_SPINDLE_RPM_ZERO GLB_TCMB DEF 13 M3992 not used MG_T_I_N_SUPERVISION GLB_TCMB DEF 12 M3993 DIRCBUT SRC AN 239 AXIS SRC O 459 SPINDLE SRC O 549 O 562 O 577 HELPDIAG SRC 797 MG_SPI_POS_M19_R_M0X GLB_TCMB DEF 11 M3994 SPINDLE SRC L 530 ...

Page 924: ..._STEP_R GLB_NC DEF 37 M4134 GEAR SRC S 607 AN 638 L 654 NP_M4150_MANUEL_MODE GLB_NC DEF 44 M4150 DIRCBUT SRC L 252 NP_M4151_ELECTRONIC_HAND GLB_NC DEF 45 M4151 DIRCBUT SRC O 253 A 286 NP_M4155_REFERENCE_MODE GLB_NC DEF 46 M4155 MAIN_PGM SRC O 14 DIRCBUT SRC O 254 NP_M4156_SOFTKEY_MANUAL_ GLB_NC DEF 47 M4156 DIRCBUT SRC O 255 NP_M4172_1_PLC_AFTER_POW GLB_NC DEF 48 M4172 MAIN_PGM SRC L 5 GEAR SRC L ...

Page 925: ...TOR_TEMP GLB_TCMB DEF 75 M4812 HELPDIAG SRC S 773 O 794 PN_ERROR_I2T_LIMITATION GLB_TCMB DEF 76 M4813 HELPDIAG SRC S 747 MG_FUNCTION_ON GLB_TCMB DEF 77 M4814 SOFTKEYS SRC L 841 R 842 LN 846 S 847 PN_ERROR_GEAR_SWITCHING GLB_TCMB DEF 82 M4815 GEAR SRC 644 L 646 PN_ERROR_SPINDLE_ZERO GLB_TCMB DEF 83 M4816 GEAR SRC S 662 __B0 INITI472 SRC 125 B0 INITI472 SRC PL 139 BG_MPAXIS X_CA_PA GLB_TCMB DEF 35 B...

Page 926: ...NITI472 SRC 56 WG_MOTOR_TEMP_2 GLB_TCMB DEF 52 W4070 INITI472 SRC 58 WG_MOTOR_TEMP_3 GLB_TCMB DEF 53 W4072 INITI472 SRC 60 WG_MOTOR_TEMP_4 GLB_TCMB DEF 54 W4074 INITI472 SRC 62 WG_MOTOR_TEMP_5 GLB_TCMB DEF 55 W4076 INITI472 SRC 64 WG_MOTOR_TEMP_S GLB_TCMB DEF 56 W4078 INITI472 SRC 66 WG_ACTIVE_PWM_AXIS GLB_TCMB DEF 47 W4082 INITI472 SRC 128 L 131 134 AXIS SRC A 350 WG_SERVO_ENABLE_INTERNAL GLB_TCM...

Page 927: ...C_STOP GLB_IOMB DEF 25 I147 DIRCBUT SRC L 238 I_RAPID_BUTTON GLB_IOMB DEF 26 I148 DIRCBUT SRC L 242 O_1_AXIS_ENABLE GLB_IOMB DEF 39 O0 AXIS SRC 508 O_2_AXIS_ENABLE GLB_IOMB DEF 40 O1 AXIS SRC 510 O_3_AXIS_ENABLE GLB_IOMB DEF 41 O2 AXIS SRC 512 O_4_AXIS_ENABLE GLB_IOMB DEF 42 O3 AXIS SRC 514 O_5_AXIS_ENABLE GLB_IOMB DEF 43 O4 AXIS SRC 516 O_1_CLAMPING GLB_IOMB DEF 45 O7 AXIS SRC 519 O_2_CLAMPING GL...

Page 928: ... 590 TR_1_SERVO_SUPERVISON GLB_TCMB DEF 104 T56 HELPDIAG SRC LB 759 TR_2_SERVO_SUPERVISON GLB_TCMB DEF 106 T57 not used TR_3_SERVO_SUPERVISON GLB_TCMB DEF 108 T58 not used TR_4_SERVO_SUPERVISON GLB_TCMB DEF 110 T59 not used TR_5_SERVO_SUPERVISON GLB_TCMB DEF 112 T60 not used TR_6_SERVO_SUPERVISON GLB_TCMB DEF 114 T61 not used TR_7_SERVO_SUPERVISON GLB_TCMB DEF 116 T62 not used TR_8_SERVO_SUPERVISO...

Page 929: ...ITI472 SRC Module 29 10 98 C HEIDEN 1 PLC_GB JHPGM 410_430D M_FUNCT SRC Module 29 10 98 C HEIDEN 1 PLC_GB JHPGM 410_430D REF_ENDL SRC Module 29 10 98 C HEIDEN 1 PLC_GB JHPGM 410_430D DIRCBUT SRC Module 29 10 98 C HEIDEN 1 PLC_GB JHPGM 410_430D AXIS SRC Module 29 10 98 C HEIDEN 1 PLC_GB JHPGM 410_430D SPINDLE SRC Module 29 10 98 C HEIDEN 1 PLC_GB JHPGM 410_430D GEAR SRC Module 29 10 98 C HEIDEN 1 P...

Page 930: ...d BYTE LW Load WORD LD Load DOUBLE WORD Assign B Assign BYTE W Assign WORD D Assign DOUBLE WORD N Assign NOT Assign two s complement Setting commands S Set R Reset SN Set NOT RN Reset NOT Logical operations A And AN And NOT O Or ON Or NOT XO Exclusive OR XON Exclusive OR NOT Arithmetical instructions Addition Subtraction x Multiplication Division MOD Remainder Increment INC Increment operand INCW ...

Page 931: ...ion in logical operations A And AN And NOT O Or ON Or NOT XO Exclusive OR XON Exclusive OR NOT Parenthetical expressions with arithmetical instructions Addition Subtraction x Multiplication Division MOD Remainder Parenthetical expressions in comparisons Equal Less than Greater than Less than or equal Greater than or equal Equal Shifting instructions Shift left Shift right Bit commands BS Bit set B...

Page 932: ...umulator from the data stack PLW Pull word accumulator from the data stack Jump commands JP Unconditional jump JPT Jump if logic accumulator 1 JPF Jump if logic accumulator 0 CM Call module CMT Call module if logic accumulator 1 CMF Call module if logic accumulator 0 EM End of module program end EMT End of module if logic accumulator 1 EMF End of module if logic accumulator 0 LBL Label Group of fu...

Page 933: ...Execution times I O M C T B W D K String L LN L N Up to 0 5 µs Up to 0 5 µs 1 0 to 15 µs A AN O ON XO XON Up to 0 5 µs Up to 0 5 µs S SN R RN Up to 0 5 µs OVWR 1 0 to 15 µs Up to 0 5 µs 1 0 to 15 µs x Up to 0 5 µs MOD 0 1 to 1 5 µs Up to 0 5 µs 1 0 to 15 µs Up to 0 5 µs BT BS BR Up to 0 5 µs LB LW 0 1 to 1 5 µs LD 1 0 to 15 µs B W 1 0 to 15 µs D 1 0 to 15 µs PL PS 0 1 to 1 5 µs 0 1 to 1 5 µs CASE ...

Page 934: ...g cyclic setting of the pulse release of a soft key row etc For some modules the execution times are longer Commands without operands Execution times PLL PLW PSL PSW PSX PLX Up to 0 5 µs A XON for these commands Up to 0 5 µs X for these commands Up to 0 5 µs MOD for these commands Up to 0 5 s 0 1 to 1 5 µs for these commands Up to 0 5 µs LBL 0 µs JP JPT JPF Up to 0 5 µs CM CMT CMF in their own sou...

Page 935: ...and in the following program sequence Example Gate the inputs I4 and I5 with AND and assign the result to output O2 Initial state Input I4 1 Input I5 0 Output O2 Function STL Accumulator contents bit Operand contents bit 31 15 7 0 Load the operand content into the logic accumulator L I4 x x x x x x x x x 1 x x x x x x x 1 Gate the content of the logic accumulator and input I5 with AND A I5 x x x x...

Page 936: ...ommand You cannot replace the L command with a logical gating instruction Example Gate a constant and byte B5 with AND and assign the result to byte B8 Initial state Constant 54 36 hex Byte B5 2A hex Output B8 Function STL Accumulator contents bit Operand contents bit 31 15 7 0 7 0 Load the constant into the word accumulator L K 54 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 Gate the contents of word accumu...

Page 937: ...e following program sequence Example Gate the inverted logical state of inputs I4 and I5 with AND and assign the result to output O2 Initial state Input I4 0 Input I5 1 Output O2 Function STL Accumulator contents bit Operand contents bit 31 15 7 0 Load the inverted operand content into the logic accumulator LN I4 x x x x x x x x x 1 x x x x x x x 0 Gate the content of the logic accumulator and inp...

Page 938: ...ou cannot replace the L command with a logical gating instruction Example Gate the complement of byte B6 and byte B5 with AND and assign the result to byte B8 Initial state Byte B5 2A hex Byte B6 B6 hex Byte B8 Function STL Accumulator contents bit Operand contents bit 31 15 7 0 7 0 Invert byte 6 and load into the word accumulator LN B6 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 Gate the co...

Page 939: ...n Example Negate the content of byte B5 and then add it to the content of byte B6 Assign the result to byte B8 Initial state Byte B5 15 dec Byte B6 20 dec Byte B8 To aid understanding of this example the contents of the accumulator and operands are shown as decimal values in parentheses Function STL Accumulator contents bit Operand contents bit 31 15 7 0 7 0 Load byte B5 into the word accumulator ...

Page 940: ...essary the TNC supplements the accumulator with the correct algebraic sign Example A pure binary coded value is read through inputs I3 to I10 and saved in byte B8 in order to process it later Initial state Input I3 1 Input I7 0 Input I4 1 Input I8 1 Input I5 1 Input I9 1 Input I6 0 Input I10 0 Function STL Accumulator contents bit Operand contents bit 31 15 7 0 I10 3 Load inputs I3 to I10 into the...

Page 941: ...gebraic sign Example See example command LB Use command LW in the same way as LB However the TNC processes 16 operands 7 7 8 LOAD DOUBLE WORD LD Syntax LD LOAD DOUBLE WORD Operands M I O T C Action Copy 32 markers inputs outputs timer or counters with ascending numbering into the word accumulator Each operand occupies one bit in the accumulator The TNC saves the entered operand address in the accu...

Page 942: ... see example Example Gate the inputs I4 and I5 with AND and assign the result to outputs O2 and O5 Initial state Input I4 1 Input I5 0 Output O2 Output O5 Function STL Accumulator contents bit Operand contents bit 31 15 7 0 Load the operand content into the logic accumulator L I4 x x x x x x x x x 1 x x x x x x x 1 Gate the content of the logic accumulator and input I5 with AND A I5 x x x x x x x ...

Page 943: ...te B8 and byte B10 Initial state Constant 54 36 hex Byte B5 2A hex Byte B8 Byte B10 Function STL Accumulator contents bit Operand contents bit 31 15 7 0 7 0 Load the constant into the word accumulator L K 54 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 Assign the contents of the word accumulator to byte B8 B8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 00 11 0 11 0 Gate the contents of word accumulator and byte B5 wit...

Page 944: ... the MSB Example See example of command D Use command B in the same way as D However the TNC processes 8 operands 7 7 11 ASSIGN WORD W Syntax W STORE WORD Operands M I O T C Action Assign 16 markers from the word accumulator to inputs outputs timer or counters with ascending numbering Every bit occupies an operand The TNC assigns the LSB in the accumulator to the operand address specified in the c...

Page 945: ... in the command the specified address 1 as LSB 1 etc The last 32nd operand is assigned the MSB Example Transfer a certain bit pattern located in word W8 to the output addresses O5 to O20 Initial state Word W8 36FF hex Function STL Accumulator contents dec or bit Operand contents bit 31 15 7 0 15 8 7 0 Load content of word W8 into the word accumulator L W8 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 011011...

Page 946: ...edure see example command ASSIGN Word processing Syntax N STORE NOT Operands B W D Action Assign the complement of the word accumulator to the addressed operand For procedure see example command ASSIGN 7 7 14 ASSIGN TWO S COMPLEMENT Syntax STORE MINUS Operands B W D Action Assign the TWO S COMPLEMENT of the word accumulator to the addressed operand For procedure see example command ASSIGN ...

Page 947: ...le Gate input I4 and I5 with OR If the gating result is 1 then set output O2 and marker M500 Initial state Input I4 1 Input I5 0 Output O2 Marker M500 Function STL Accumulator contents bit Operand contents bit 31 15 7 0 Load the operand content into the logic accumulator L I4 x x x x x x x x x 1 x x x x x x x 1 Gate the content of the logic accumulator and input I5 with OR O I5 x x x x x x x x x 1...

Page 948: ...t I4 and I5 with OR If the gating result is 1 then reset output O2 and marker M500 Initial state Input I4 1 Input I5 0 Output O2 Marker M500 Function STL Accumulator contents bit Operand contents bit 31 15 7 0 Load the operand content into the logic accumulator L I4 x x x x x x x x x 1 x x x x x x x 1 Gate the content of the logic accumulator and input I5 with OR O I5 x x x x x x x x x 1 x x x x x...

Page 949: ...Example Gate input I4 and I5 with OR If the gating result is 0 then set output O2 and marker M500 Initial state Input I4 0 Input I5 0 Output O2 Marker M500 Function STL Accumulator contents bit Operand contents bit 31 15 7 0 Load the operand content into the logic accumulator L I4 x x x x x x x x x 0 x x x x x x x 0 Gate the content of the logic accumulator and input I5 with OR O I5 x x x x x x x ...

Page 950: ... input I4 and I5 with OR If the gating result is 0 then reset output O2 and marker M500 Initial state Input I4 0 Input I5 0 Output O2 Marker M500 Function STL Accumulator contents bit Operand contents bit 31 15 7 0 Load the operand content into the logic accumulator L I4 x x x x x x x x x 0 x x x x x x x 0 Gate the content of the logic accumulator and input I5 with OR O I5 x x x x x x x x x 0 x x ...

Page 951: ...oad command see L LN L n Within a logic sequence gate the content of the logic accumulator and the logical state of the operand with AND The TNC saves the result of the operation in the logic accumulator Example Gate the inputs I4 and I5 with AND and assign the result to output O2 Initial state Input I4 1 Input I5 0 Output O2 Function STL Accumulator contents bit Operand contents bit 31 15 7 0 Loa...

Page 952: ...the accumulator with bit 1 of the operand etc The TNC saves the result of the operation in the word accumulator Example Gate the content of byte B5 and byte 6 with AND and assign the result to byte B8 Initial state Byte B5 2A hex Byte B6 36 hex Byte B8 Function STL Accumulator contents bit Operand contents bit 31 15 7 0 7 0 Load byte B6 into the word accumulator L B6 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 ...

Page 953: ...nce gate the content of the logic accumulator and the logical state of the operand with AND NOT The TNC saves the result of the operation in the logic accumulator Example Gate the inputs I4 and I5 with AND NOT and assign the result to output O2 Initial state Input I4 1 Input I5 1 Output O2 Function STL Accumulator contents bit Operand contents bit 31 15 7 0 Load the operand content into the logic ...

Page 954: ... with bit 1 of the operand etc The TNC saves the result of the operation in the word accumulator Example Gate the content of words W4 and W6 with AND NOT and assign the result to word W8 Initial state Word W4 36 AA hex Word W6 3C 36 hex Word W8 Function STL Accumulator contents bit Operand contents bit 31 15 7 0 1 5 8 7 0 Load W6 into the word accumulator L W6 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0...

Page 955: ...e gate the content of the logic accumulator and the logical state of the operand with OR The TNC saves the result of the operation in the logic accumulator Example Gate the inputs I4 and I5 with OR and assign the result to output O2 Initial state Input I4 0 Input I5 1 Output O2 Function STL Accumulator contents bit Operand contents bit 3 15 7 0 Load the operand content into the logic accumulator L...

Page 956: ...ator with bit 1 of the operand etc The TNC saves the result of the operation in the word accumulator Example Gate the content of byte B5 and byte 6 with OR and assign the result to word W8 Initial state Byte B5 2A hex Byte B6 36 hex Word W8 Function STL Accumulator contents bit Operand contents bit 31 15 7 0 1 5 8 7 0 Load byte B6 into the word accumulator L B6 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 00...

Page 957: ...ce gate the content of the logic accumulator and the logical state of the operand with OR NOT The TNC saves the result of the operation in the logic accumulator Example Gate the inputs I4 and I5 with OR NOT and assign the result to output O2 Initial state Input I4 0 Input I5 0 Output O2 Function STL Accumulator contents bit Operand contents bit 31 15 7 0 Load the operand content into the logic acc...

Page 958: ...of the operand etc The TNC saves the result of the operation in the word accumulator Example Gate the content of words W4 and W6 with OR NOT and assign the result to word W8 Initial state Word W4 36 AA hex Word W6 3C 36 hex Word W8 Function STL Accumulator contents bit Operand contents bit 31 15 7 0 1 5 8 7 0 Load W6 into the word accumulator L W6 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0111100 001101...

Page 959: ...nce gate the content of the logic accumulator and the logical state of the operand with EXCLUSIVE OR The TNC saves the result of the operation in the logic accumulator Example Gate the inputs I4 and I5 with EXCLUSIVE OR and assign the result to output O2 Initial state Input I4 1 Input I5 1 Output O2 Function STL Accumulator contents bit Operand contents bit 31 15 7 0 Load the operand content into ...

Page 960: ...ator with bit 1 of the operand etc The TNC saves the result of the operation in the word accumulator Example Gate the content of byte S B5 and B6 with EXCLUSIVE OR and assign the result to word W8 Initial state Byte B5 2A hex Byte B6 36 hex Word W8 Function STL Accumulator contents bit Operand contents bit 31 15 7 0 1 5 8 7 0 Load byte B6 into the word accumulator L B6 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 ...

Page 961: ...te the content of the logic accumulator and the logical state of the operand with EXCLUSIVE OR NOT The TNC saves the result of the operation in the logic accumulator Example Gate the inputs I4 and marker M500 with EXCLUSIVE OR NOT and assign the result to output O2 Initial state Input I4 0 Marker M500 0 Output O2 Function STL Accumulator contents bit Operand contents bit 31 15 7 0 Load the operand...

Page 962: ...it 1 of the operand etc The TNC saves the result of the operation in the word accumulator Example Gate the content of words W4 and W6 with EXCLUSIVE OR NOT and assign the result to word W8 Initial state Word W4 36 AA hex Word W6 3C 36 hex Word W8 Function STL Accumulator contents bit Operand contents bit 31 15 7 0 1 5 8 7 0 Load W6 into the word accumulator L W6 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0...

Page 963: ...mber saved in word W6 then assign the result to double word D8 Initial state Constant 10 000 dec Word W6 200 dec Double word D8 To improve clarity the contents of the accumulator and operand are shown in decimal notation The ten digit accumulator results from the greatest possible accumulator content 2 147 483 647 Function STL Accumulator content dec Operand content dec x x x x x x x x x x Load th...

Page 964: ...from the constant and then assign the result to double word D8 Initial state Constant 10 000 dec Word W6 200 dec Double word D8 To improve clarity the contents of the accumulator and operand are shown in decimal notation The ten digit accumulator results from the greatest possible accumulator content 2 147 483 647 Function STL Accumulator content dec Operand content dec x x x x x x x x x x Load th...

Page 965: ... word W6 then assign the result to double word D8 Initial state Constant 100 dec Word W6 20 dec Double word D8 To improve clarity the contents of the accumulator and operand are shown in decimal notation The ten digit accumulator results from the greatest possible accumulator content 2 147 483 647 Logic Byte Word Double word Constant Processing time s 3 5 to 4 3 3 2 to 3 8 3 0 to 3 8 Number of byt...

Page 966: ...t Example Divide the constant by the number saved in word W6 then assign the result to double word D8 Initial state Constant 100 dec Word W6 20 dec Double word D8 To improve clarity the contents of the accumulator and operand are shown in decimal notation The ten digit accumulator results from the greatest possible accumulator content 2 147 483 647 Function STL Accumulator content dec Operand cont...

Page 967: ...e number saved in word W6 by the constant then calculate the REMAINDER and assign the result to double word D8 Initial state Word W6 50 dec Constant 15 dec Double word D8 To improve clarity the contents of the accumulator and operand are shown in decimal notation The ten digit accumulator results from the greatest possible accumulator content 2 147 483 647 Function STL Accumulator content dec Oper...

Page 968: ...T index register Syntax INCX INCREMENT INDEX Operands None Action Increase the content of the index register by one 7 7 31 DECREMENT DEC DECREMENT operand Syntax DEC DECREMENT Operands B W D Action Decrease the content of the addressed operand by one DECREMENT word accumulator Syntax DECW DECREMENT WORD Operands None Action Decrease the content of the word accumulator by one DECREMENT index regist...

Page 969: ...xample Compare a constant with the content of double word D8 and assign the result to marker M500 Initial state Constant 16 000 dec Double word D8 15 000 dec Marker M300 To improve clarity the contents of the accumulator and operand are shown in decimal notation The ten digit accumulator results from the greatest possible accumulator content 2 147 483 647 Function STL Accumulator contents dec or b...

Page 970: ...W 16 bits and D K 32 bits Example Compare a constant with the content of double word D8 and assign the result to marker M500 Initial state Constant 16 000 dec Double word D8 15 000 dec Marker M500 To improve clarity the contents of the accumulator and operand are shown in decimal notation The ten digit accumulator results from the greatest possible accumulator content 2 147 483 647 Function STL Ac...

Page 971: ...here B 8 bits W 16 bits and D K 32 bits Example Compare a constant with the content of double word D8 and assign the result to marker M500 Initial state Constant 16 000 dec Double word D8 15 000 dec Marker M500 To improve clarity the contents of the accumulator and operand are shown in decimal notation The ten digit accumulator results from the greatest possible accumulator content 2 147 483 647 F...

Page 972: ... bits W 16 bits and D K 32 bits Example Compare a constant with the content of double word D8 and assign the result to marker M500 Initial state Constant 16 000 dec Double word D8 15 000 dec Marker M500 To improve clarity the contents of the accumulator and operand are shown in decimal notation The ten digit accumulator results from the greatest possible accumulator content 2 147 483 647 Function ...

Page 973: ...rand where B 8 bits W 16 bits and D K 32 bits Example Compare a constant with the content of double word D8 and assign the result to marker M500 Initial state Constant 16 000 dec Double word D8 15 000 dec Marker M500 To improve clarity the contents of the accumulator and operand are shown in decimal notation The ten digit accumulator results from the greatest possible accumulator content 2 147 483...

Page 974: ...D K 32 bits Example Compare a constant with the content of double word D8 and assign the result to marker M500 Initial state Constant 16 000 dec Double word D8 15 000 dec Marker M500 To improve clarity the contents of the accumulator and operand are shown in decimal notation The ten digit accumulator results from the greatest possible accumulator content 2 147 483 647 Function STL Accumulator cont...

Page 975: ...rd accumulator With the closing parenthesis command the TNC gates the buffered value from the program stack with the content of the logic accumulator or word accumulator depending on which you have addressed before the opening parenthesis statement The TNC assigns the result of the gating operation to the corresponding accumulator Maximum nesting depth 16 parentheses Please note The sequence of fu...

Page 976: ... x 1 x x x x x x x 1 Opening parenthesis Buffer the accumulator content onto the program stack A x x x x x x x x x 1 x x x x x x x Load the state of input I0 into the logic accumulator L I0 x x x x x x x x x 0 x x x x x x x 0 Gate the logic accumulatorwiththe state of input I1 O I1 x x x x x x x x x 1 x x x x x x x 1 Closing parenthesis Gate the accumulator content with the program stack A O x x x...

Page 977: ...mple A AND 7 7 40 OR O Syntax O OR Operands None Action See example A AND 7 7 41 OR NOT ON Syntax ON OR NOT Operands None Action See example A AND 7 7 42 EXCLUSIVE OR XO Syntax XO EXCL OR Operands None Action See example A AND 7 7 43 EXCLUSIVE OR NOT XON Syntax XON EXCL OR NOT Operands None Action See example A AND ...

Page 978: ...k This clears the accumulator for calculation of intermediate results The closing parenthesis command gates the buffered value from the program stack with the content of the word accumulator The TNC saves the result in the accumulator again Maximum nesting depth 16 parentheses If an error occurs during calculation the TNC sets the marker M4201 To improve clarity the contents of the accumulator and...

Page 979: ...ble word D12 into the word accumulator L D12 1 5 0 0 0 15 00 0 Opening parenthesis Buffer the accumulator content onto the program stack 1 5 0 0 0 Load the constant K 1000 into the word accumulator L K1000 1 0 0 0 Divide the word accumulator by the content of the double word D36 D36 1 0 10 0 Closing parenthesis Gate the accumulator content with the program stack 1 5 0 1 0 Assign the result of the ...

Page 980: ...tion See example for ADDITION 7 7 46 MULTIPLICATION X Syntax x MULTIPLY Operands None Action See example for ADDITION 7 7 47 DIVISION Syntax DIVIDE Operands None Action See example for ADDITION 7 7 48 REMAINDER MOD Syntax MOD MODULO Operands None Action See example for ADDITION ...

Page 981: ...ars the accumulator for calculation of intermediate results The closing parenthesis command gates the buffered value from the program stack with the content of the word accumulator The TNC saves the result in the accumulator again Maximum nesting depth 16 parentheses Comparative commands cause a direct transition from word to logical processing If the specified comparative condition is true the TN...

Page 982: ...Function STL Accumulator contents dec or bit Operand content dec or bits x x x x x x x x x x Load the double word D12 into the word accumulator L D12 1 5 0 0 0 15000 Opening parenthesis Buffer the accumulator content onto the program stack 1 5 0 0 0 Load the constant into the word accumulator L K1000 1 0 0 0 Multiply the content of the word accumulator with double word W36 x D36 1 0 0 0 0 10 31 15...

Page 983: ...R THAN Syntax GREATER THAN Operands None Action See example for EQUAL TO 7 7 52 LESS THAN OR EQUAL TO Syntax LESS EQUAL Operands None Action See example for EQUAL TO 7 7 53 GREATER THAN OR EQUAL TO Syntax GREATER EQUAL Operands None Action See example for EQUAL TO 7 7 54 NOT EQUAL Syntax NOT EQUAL Operands None Action See example for EQUAL TO ...

Page 984: ... four times to the left then assign it to double word 12 Initial state Double word D8 3E 80 hex Double word D12 The accumulator content is shown here in binary notation the operand content in hexadecimal notation Instead of using the K 1 command four times simply use the K 4 command Function STL Accumulator contents bit Operand content hex x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x ...

Page 985: ... times to the right then assign it to double word 12 Initial state Double word D8 3E 80 hex Double word D12 The accumulator content is shown here in binary notation the operand content in hexadecimal notation Instead of using the K 1 command four times simply use the K 4 command Function STL Accumulator contents bit Operand content hex x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x ...

Page 986: ...egral remainder of the result of the operand value divided by 32 Example Load double word D8 into the accumulator set bit 0 of the accumulator to 1 and save the result in double word D12 Initial state Double word D8 3E 80 hex Double word D12 Accumulator and operand contents are shown here in hexadecimal notation Function STL Accumulator content hex Operand content hex x x x x x x x x Load the doub...

Page 987: ...32 i e the integral remainder of the result of the operand value divided by 32 Example Load double word D8 into the accumulator set bit 0 of the accumulator to 0 and save the result in double word D12 Initial state Double word D8 3E 81 hex Double word D12 Accumulator and operand contents are shown here in hexadecimal notation Function STL Accumulator content hex Operand content hex x x x x x x x x...

Page 988: ...LSB and bit 31 MSB For operand contents greater than 32 the TNC uses the operand value modulo 32 i e the integral remainder of the result of the operand value divided by 32 Example Load the double word D8 into the accumulator and assign the logical state of bit 0 to output O12 Initial state Double word D8 3E 81 hex Output O12 The word accumulator and operand contents are shown here in hexadecimal ...

Page 989: ...and Syntax PS PUSH Operands B W D K Action The PS command enables you to buffer data The TNC copies the addressed operand value into the current address of the data stack During the word processing the TNC copies two words per PS command onto the data stack and extends the operand in accordance with the MSB with the correct algebraic sign In the event of a stack overflow the TNC displays an error ...

Page 990: ...ess into the addressed operand If the stack is empty the TNC displays an error message Example See PSW command Word processing with the PL command Syntax PL PULL Operands B W D K Action The PL command is the counterpart to the PS command Data that has been buffered with the PUSH command can be taken from the data stack by using the PULL command During the word processing the TNC copies with the PL...

Page 991: ... word accumulator With the PSW command the TNC copies the word accumulator onto the data stack The content of the word accumulator 32 bits occupies two words on the data stack In the event of a stack overflow the TNC displays an error message Example Since the sequence is the same for all stack operations this example also applies to the commands PS PL PSW PLL PLW The difference between the indivi...

Page 992: ...ULATOR FROM THE DATA STACK PLW Syntax PLW PULL WORDACCU Operands None Action The PLW command is the counterpart to the PSW command Data that has been buffered with the PUSH command can be restored from the data stack by using the PULL command During the word processing the TNC copies with the PLW command two words of the current data stack address into the word accumulator If the stack is empty th...

Page 993: ... 68 JUMP IF LOGIC ACCUMULATOR 0 JPF Syntax JPT JUMP IF FALSE Operands Label LBL Action The JPF command is a conditional jump instruction If the logic accumulator 0 the TNC resumes the program at the label that you have entered If the logic accumulator 1 the TNC does not jump JPF interrupts a logic sequence Example See JPT command Function STL Accumulator contents bit Operand contents bit 31 15 7 0...

Page 994: ...dules as often as you wish from different places in your program CM interrupts a logic sequence Example See command CMF 7 7 70 CALL MODULE IF LOGIC ACCUMULATOR 1 CMT Syntax CMT CALL MODULE IF TRUE Operands Label LBL Action The CMT command is a conditional module call If the logic accumulator 1 the TNC calls the module that begins at the label that you have entered If the logic accumulator 0 the TN...

Page 995: ...call the Module 10 Initial state Input I5 0 Function STL Accumulator contents bit Operand contents bit 31 15 7 0 Load the operand content into the logic accumulator L I5 x x x x x x x x x 0 x x x x x x x 0 If logic accumulator 0 jump to LBL 10 CMF 10 x x x x x x x x x 0 x x x x x x x Resume main program after module execution L M100 x x x x x x x x x 1 x x x x x x x 1 End of the main program EM La...

Page 996: ...MT Syntax EMT END OF MODULE IF TRUE Operands None Action An EMT command causes a return jump to the module call CM CMT CMF only if the logic accumulator 1 7 7 74 END OF MODULE IF LOGIC ACCUMULATOR 0 EMF Syntax EMF END OF MODULE IF FALSE Operands None Action An EMF command causes a return jump to the module call CM CMT CMF only if the logic accumulator 0 7 7 75 LABEL LBL Syntax LBL LABEL Operands A...

Page 997: ... TNC you must not acknowledge the POWER INTERRUPTED message Go into the PLC editor where you will be shown the error line The following addresses are valid n Mn X n In X n On X n Cn X n Tn X Operand number n X n Bn X Operand number n X n Wn X Operand number n 2 X n Dn X Operand number n 4 X n BTX Content of index register operand n BCX Content of index register operand n BSX Content of index regis...

Page 998: ...en the word accumulator and index register or between the stack and index register n LX Load index to accu Index register word accumulator n X Store accu to index Word accumulator index register n PSX Push index register Index register stack n PLX Pull index register Stack index register n INCX Increment index register n DECX Decrement index register ...

Page 999: ... the X th character of the specified string n Immediate string You can also enter a string directly in the PLC program The text string which may contain a maximum of 37 characters must be indicated by quotation marks Example Coolant 1 on n Texts from the PLC error message file or from the PLC dialog file By specifying the line number you can read texts from the active error message file or dialog ...

Page 1000: ...cters During a comparison the TNC always uses the significance of the characters from the ASCII table This results for example in A B AA A n If you have entered PLC error messages or PLC dialog texts in the argument the TNC compares the position in the error message file or dialog file 0 to 4095 but not the actual text as with an immediate string The processing times depend on the length of the st...

Page 1001: ...string accumulator The string that the TNC is to load is selected through the argument arg after the operand designation See also Operand declaration The resulting string must not be longer than 128 characters Example See command OVWR 7 9 3 SAVING A STRING Syntax STORE Operands S arg Action Assign the content of the string accumulator to the string memory The memory into which the TNC is to copy t...

Page 1002: ...also Operand declaration Example This example also applies to the string commands L and Add a string from the string memory S0 to an immediate string The result is to overwrite the contents of string memory S1 Initial state Immediate String HYDRAULICS String memory S0 OIL String memory S1 COOLANT MISSING Final state String memory characters 1 128 S0 O I L S1 C O O L A N T M I S S I N G Function ST...

Page 1003: ...tring to logical processing Compare the content of the string accumulator with the string in the argument If the string accumulator is less than the operand the condition is true and the TNC sets the logic accumulator to 1 If the string accumulator is greater than or equal to the operand it sets the logic accumulator to 0 Example See command 7 9 7 GREATER THAN COMMAND FOR STRING PROCESSING Syntax ...

Page 1004: ...cumulator to 1 If the string accumulator is greater than the operand it sets the logic accumulator to 0 Example See command 7 9 9 GREATER THAN OR EQUAL TO COMMAND FOR STRING PROCESSING Syntax GREATER EQUAL Operands S arg Action This command sets off a direct transition from string to logical processing Compare the content of the string accumulator with the string in the argument If the string accu...

Page 1005: ...logic accumulator to 0 Example This example of string processing also applies to the commands Compare the immediate string with the content of the string memory S0 Depending on the result call Module 50 Initial state String memory S0 SPINDLE 2 Immediate string SPINDLE 1 String memory characters 1 128 S0 S P I N D L E 2 Function STL String accu characters or logic accu bit 1 128 Load the string int...

Page 1006: ... decimal places Both the period and comma are permitted as decimal point The TNC returns the position in characters of the first character after the found number in the string memory to be searched Call PS K B W D Address of the string memory to be searched PS K B W D Address of the string memory for the found number CM 9070 PL B W D Offset end of numerical string in the searched string memory Err...

Page 1007: ...e string memory S0 to S15 Call PS K B W D S String no or string CM 9071 PL B W D Length of the string Error recognition Marker Value Meaning M4203 0 String length was ascertained 1 Error See W1022 W1022 2 Invalid immediate strings address of the source or target string is out of range 0 7 string memory was searched but no string end was found ...

Page 1008: ... an identifier a number between 1 and 255 assigned by the NC which the TNC enters in the word accumulator With this identifier and the REPLY function you can then interrogate whether the program is in the queue is being processed or has already been processed The TNC processes the submit programs in the sequence in which they were entered in the queue If errors occur during execution of the submit...

Page 1009: ... no room in the queue or if you program the SUBM command in a submit program nesting the TNC assigns the value 0 to the word accumulator Example See command CAN 7 10 2 INTERROGATING THE STATUS OF A SUBMIT PROGRAM RPLY Syntax RPLY REPLY Operands B W Action Interrogate the status of the submit program with the specified identifier You must have already stored the identifier in a byte or word when yo...

Page 1010: ...eady stored the identifier in a byte or word when you call the submit program After you have canceled the program the TNC immediately starts the next submit program from the queue The following PLC modules cannot be canceled at just any location with CANCEL n PLC module for access to screen 908X n PLC module for reading NC files 909X For these modules you must check with the RPLY command whether t...

Page 1011: ...ad the state of input I10 into the logic accumulator L I10 If logic accumulator 0 jump to LBL 100 JPF 100 Interrogate the status of the submit program and load it into the word accumulator RPLY B128 If the word accumulator is not equal to 0 i e the submit program has already been transferred to the NC for processing set the logic accumulator to 1 K 0 If logic accumulator 1 jump to LBL 100 JPT 100 ...

Page 1012: ...rt a task change between the individual jobs in the submit queue so that the TNC can execute parallel processes by the end of a job at the latest The cyclic PLC main program does not participate in cooperative multitasking but interrupts a submit job and the parallel processes at whatever stage they are at 7 11 1 STARTING A PARALLEL PROCESS SPAWN Syntax SPAWN label Operands D Action In the specifi...

Page 1013: ...ts The entries in the event file are listed line by line with the following syntax Job name condition event mask comment Event Function Job name This name is identical with the label specified with the spawn command The TNC evaluates only the first 16 characters Condition Logical expression in accordance with the C language convention identical with the syntax used in function FN20 See Data Transf...

Page 1014: ... process by recompiling the PLC program the TNC then deletes all entries in the list The TNC does not monitor the entries in the event file This means that syntactically incorrect entries of incorrect job names do not result in an error message The TNC issues a blinking error message if n A non existing event file is listed in the OEM SYS file when the first spawn command is executed n Due to the ...

Page 1015: ...gated the TNC returns and deletes only the set events You can specify the events to be deleted by calling without a waiting period and with an OR gate Event bits 16 to 31 are reserved for the operating system n Bit 16 BREAK cancels a function Setting and reading is permitted If you transmit this event the TNC cancels access to interfaces and the network n Bit 17 Reserved do not use n Bit 18 Reserv...

Page 1016: ...command The TNC always assigns the events that you send to the submit queue to the job that is running at the time of arrival If they are not read by this job they remain for the next one If you wish the receiver process to start immediately after Module 9261 you must also call Module 9262 to enable a change of context Event bits 16 to 31 are reserved for the operating system see Module 9260 Call ...

Page 1017: ...in a submit job or spawn job The module interrupts the calling process for at least the specified time If other processes or the submit queue are ready to run the TNC changes the context to one of these processes Markers 4200 to 4202 and 4204 have undefined changes after the module call The waiting period is interpreted as an unsigned number so that negative values result in very long waiting peri...

Page 1018: ...sses n L KF Name X with X 0 The TNC transfers the value of the constant defined by X in the constants field Name n L KF Name X with X 1 The TNC transfers the length of the constants field Name n L KF Name The TNC transfers the absolute address of the constants field Name This is only worthwhile in conjunction with modules e g Module 9200 You can also use this addressing in a constants field Exampl...

Page 1019: ...nd jump commands reduces the number of available labels accordingly You can nest structured instructions in up to 16 levels It is not possible to share levels Example The instructions IFT IFF WHILET WHILEF ENDW UNTILT and UNTILF require a valid gating result in the logic accumulator You conclude the sequence of gating operations The instructions ELSE ENDI and REPEAT require that all previous opera...

Page 1020: ...e in the cyclic PLC program for the occurrence of an external event The following commands are available n REPEAT REPEAT Repeat the program sequence from here n UNTILT UNTIL TRUE Repeat the sequence until the logic accumulator 1 n UNTILF UNTIL FALSE Repeat the sequence until the logic accumulator 0 The TNC runs a REPEAT UNTIL loop at least once Function STL Load input I0 into the logic accumulator...

Page 1021: ...eginning The TNC runs a WHILE ENDW loop only if at the beginning the WHILE condition is fulfilled Before the ENDW instruction you must reproduce the condition for execution For the WHILE ENDW structure the TNC generates two internal labels The condition can also be produced in a manner different from before the WHILE instruction Function STL Load marker 100 into the logic accumulator create condit...

Page 1022: ... entry Example See command ENDC End indexed module call ENDC Syntax ENDC ENDCASE Operands None Action Use the ENDC command in connection with the CASE command It must directly follow the list of CM commands Example Function STL Case command and operand the internal address of the desired module must be saved in the operand CASE B150 Call module if operand content 0 Internal addressing from 0 to ma...

Page 1023: ...in another file and is identified there with GLOBAL You can then call this label from the active file You can dramatically improve the transparency of your program by dividing your source code by function into individual groups and then save these groups in individual files Each file can contain up to 1000 labels You can link up to 60 files to one program Each file can generate up to 64 KB of code...

Page 1024: ...does not run the file s program code The USES instruction cannot be compared with a CM instruction The linked files must therefore contain individual modules that you can then call with the CM instruction Example USES PLCMOD1 USES EPRUPG USES RAMPLC Linking of files Function STL Main program PLCMAIN PLC Link the file for spindle control USES SPINDEL PLC Link the file for tool change USES TCHANGE P...

Page 1025: ...me that is declared global in file A can be used again locally in file B Altogether 1000 labels may be as defined as global in all modules 7 14 3 EXTERN INSTRUCTION USES Syntax EXTERN label a module from another file can now be called with a CM command Operands None Action To enable a label in one file to access modules that other files have declared as GLOBAL you must declare the label with EXTER...

Page 1026: ... length should always be defined in bytes The TNC copies sequentially beginning with the first memory cell Therefore the function is not ensured if the source block and the target block overlap and the source block begins at a lower address than the target block In this case the TNC overwrites the overlapping part of the source block before the copying process Call PS B W D K Number of the 1st mar...

Page 1027: ...was read PS B W D K Address of the double word to be read CM 9012 READ DOUBLE WORD PL B Target address for double word that was read Error recognition Example of Module 9010 Initial state Byte B10 35 address Byte B35 80 byte to be read Byte B100 Marker Value Meaning M4203 0 Byte was read 1 Error code in W1022 W1022 3 Invalid address was programmed 5 Module 9011 Specified address is not a word addr...

Page 1028: ...to be written PS B W D K Double word to be written CM 9022 WRITE DOUBLE WORD TO ADDRESS Error recognition Example of Module 9020 Initial state Byte B10 35 address Byte B100 120 byte to be written Byte B35 Marker Value Meaning M4203 0 Byte was written 1 Error code in W1022 W1022 3 Invalid address was programmed 5 Module 9021 Specified address is not a word address Module 9022 Specified address is n...

Page 1029: ...TNC sets an algebraic sign only before negative numbers The control does not convert trailing zeros after the decimal point or leading zeros before the decimal point The TNC writes the string left aligned in the string address that you specify Constraints The decimal character is defined by machine parameter MP7280 as a comma MP7280 0 or a period MP7280 1 Call PS B W D K Mantissa of the number to ...

Page 1030: ...right aligned notation leading zeros before the decimal point are replaced by blanks in left aligned notation they are suppressed Trailing zeroes after the decimal point are always converted Constraints The decimal character is defined by machine parameter MP7280 as a comma MP7280 0 or a period MP7280 1 Call PS B W D K Numerical value to be converted PS B W D K Display modes bit encoded Bit 1 0 Fo...

Page 1031: ...umber CM 9052 PL B W D Numerical value PL B W D Exponent to the base of 10 of a value Error recognition Module 9053 Conversion from binary ASCII hexadecimal Module 9053 converts blocks of binary values from the word marker range into a string of ASCII coded hexadecimal numbers The TNC reads the specified number of bytes from the word address that you have specified and converts it to a hexadecimal...

Page 1032: ...e Call PS B W D K String address in which the hexadecimal value is saved PS B W D K Word address from which the TNC saves the binary values CM 9054 Error recognition Example Initial state SO 63 BO 99 Marker Value Meaning M4203 0 Number was converted 1 For error see W1022 W1022 2 Invalid string address 11 Invalid word address Odd number of characters in the string or a character that cannot be inte...

Page 1033: ...7 184 HEIDENHAIN Technical Manual TNC 426 TNC 430 ...

Page 1034: ...Interfaces and Operating Modes 8 15 8 3 3 Configuration of Interfaces 8 16 8 4 Data Transmission Protocols 8 20 8 4 1 Selection of Transmission Protocols 8 20 8 4 2 Standard Transmission Protocol 8 21 8 4 3 Transmission Protocol with Block Check Character 8 23 8 4 4 LSV2 Transmission Protocol 8 27 8 5 Saving Reading Files 8 28 8 6 Data Transfer by PLC 8 30 8 6 1 Settings 8 30 8 6 2 PLC Modules 8 3...

Page 1035: ...8 2 HEIDENHAIN Technical Manual TNC 426 TNC 430 ...

Page 1036: ...sical links between the computer system and the peripherals need a transmission line and appropriate software in order to transfer data between the individual units Standard interfaces include n RS 232 C V 24 or n RS 422 V 11 The relationship between hardware and software which fully defines an interface is illustrated by the following diagram The hardware in the diagram covers all the physical co...

Page 1037: ...tes 8 bits and supplied to the interface parallel In the case of serial data transmission the parallel information from the computer system has to be converted into a serial data flow by a USART Universal Synchronous Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter The receiver accepts the serial data flow and converts it back again into parallel information 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 LSB MS...

Page 1038: ...nsive Data coding A common code for data transfer is the ASCII code American Standard Code for Information Interchange which codes all characters with seven bits This means that in all 27 128 characters are coded Example The letter z is represented by the following combination of bits 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 122 dec 7A hex When the letter z is transmitted via a serial interface the appropriate characters ar...

Page 1039: ...es for one character frame Transmission reliability Parity bit With an asynchronous character frame transmission errors can be detected by using the parity bit The parity bit can take three different forms n No parity check Error detection is dispensed with n Even parity The transmitter counts bits with a value of one If the number is odd the parity bit is set to one otherwise it is cleared to zer...

Page 1040: ...r rate of 19 200 bps will have a bit duration of tB 52 083 µs The number of characters transmitted per second can be calculated from the transfer rate and the transmission format Example With a transmission format of one start bit 7 data bits two stop bits and a data transfer rate of 300 bps exactly 30 characters per second will be transmitted tB 1 Baud rate Bit s tB 1 19200 Bit s 52 083 µs Charac...

Page 1041: ...ng requires n The data lines TXD and RXD transmitted and received data n The RTS control line switch on transmitting unit n The CTS signal line Clear to Send n A ground connection Software handshaking Control of data transfer is achieved by control characters transmitted via the data line Example XON XOFF method with the RS 232 C V 24 interface The meaning XON is assigned to control character DC1 ...

Page 1042: ...le n Standard transmission protocol n Transmission protocol with Block Check Character BCC n LSV2 transmission protocol 8 2 2 RS 232 C V 24 Interface RS 232 C V 24 is the designation for a serial interface Data transfer is executed asynchronously with a start bit before each character and one or two stop bits after each character Transmission distance up to 20 m Hardware The physical connection be...

Page 1043: ...ver the range 3 V to 15 V and logical one MARK over the range 3 V to 15 V n Control and verification lines These signals are defined as being ON High over the range 3 V to 15 V and as OFF Low over the range 3 V to 15 V Note For all signals The voltage range from 3 V to 3 V cannot be evaluated 15 3 3 15 0 LOW OFF 1 MARK HIGH ON 0 SPACE U V Data signals Control and verification signal ...

Page 1044: ...e TNC The TNC delivers no signal from this pin DTR Data Terminal Ready TNC ready not ready for service e g the receiving buffer is full the signal DTR indicates LOW DSR Data Set Ready Peripheral ready not ready for service RTS Request to Send Switch transmission unit on TNC wishes to transmit data CTS Clear to Send Readiness for transmission The peripheral wishes to transmit data n Ground conducto...

Page 1045: ...rface module of the TNC can transmit data at up to 115 200 bps Transmission distance over 1 kilometer Hardware The interface works symmetrically using two signal lines At the receiver the difference in voltage of the two lines is evaluated Advantage n Longer lines can be used n Higher data transfer rate Physical connections Transmission length Receiver Transmitter RxD TxD RxD TxD ...

Page 1046: ... a logically defined level Signal designations The following signals are transmitted as differential signals The protective ground connects the transmitter and receiver housings GND is the differential voltage reference conductor These signals perform the same functions as those on the RS 232 C V 24 interface Pin layouts The logic unit and adapter block have the same pin layout 6 5 2 0 2 0 2 2 5 6...

Page 1047: ...erminates a data transfer block The character that follows BCC is used for data checking DC1 XON Starts the transfer of data DC3 XOFF Stops the transfer of data ETX End of Text Transmitted at the end of a program EOT End of Transmission Terminates the data transfer and establishes the idle state This character is transmitted by the TNC at the end of a program input and to the external device in th...

Page 1048: ...abled 1 RS 232 C V 24 interface disabled 2 RS 422 V 11 interface disabled Communication between TNCs 7 7 7 7 Set both TNCs to LSV2 protocol The control from which you start the data transmission is the master The PLC provides you with access to the data interfaces EXT3 For the following external devices Choose the operating mode HEIDENHAIN Floppy Disk Unit n FE 401 B n FE 401 as of program no 230 ...

Page 1049: ...bers less than 20 are defined as control characters If calculation of the BCC produces a number less than 20 then a blank space is sent in addition immediately before ETB The BCC will consequently always be greater than 20 and therefore cannot be interpreted as a control character Hardware handshaking With bit 2 you can determine whether the TNC stops transfer from an external device by sending an...

Page 1050: ...ntrol character DC3 Transfer is then resumed with character DC1 XON XOFF method If transfer is stopped with the control character DC3 up to three more characters can be stored any further incoming characters are lost Software handshake is normally recommended when interfaces are connected to an external device Character parity Bits 4 and 5 determine the type of parity check CST RST RxD TxD RST CST...

Page 1051: ... 5 0 character parity not desired 1 desired Bit 6 0 Bit 7 0 Length of the stop 1 5 bits Bit 6 1 Bit 7 0 Length of the stop 2 bits Bit 6 0 Bit 7 1 Length of the stop 1 bit Bit 6 1 Bit 7 1 Length of the stop 1 bit MP5020 0 Operating mode EXT1 MP5020 1 Operating mode EXT2 MP5020 2 Operating mode EXT3 PLC Transmission protocol The transmission protocol for operating modes EXT1 EXT2 EXT3 is defined wit...

Page 1052: ... the TNC 7 7 7 7 Select MP5000 0 7 7 7 7 Select MP5020 0 10101001 7 7 7 7 Select MP5030 0 0 7 7 7 7 Call the MOD functions 7 7 7 7 Press the RS 232 C RS422 SETUP soft key 7 7 7 7 Choose the EXT1 operating mode 7 7 7 7 Set the baud rate for EXT1 to 9600 bps Machine parameter Effect MP5000 0 No interface inhibited MP5020 0 10101001 Bit 0 8 data bits Bit 1 any BCC character Bit 2 transmission stop by...

Page 1053: ...e error message Protected file 7 7 7 7 Press the ADDITIONAL FUNCTION UNPROTECT soft key to cancel write protection and continue the transmission If a file has been read out and the data transfer menu has been terminated with the END key the TNC outputs the characters EXT and EOT If a transmission is terminated with the END key the error message Program incomplete is issued Operating modes Transmis...

Page 1054: ...er If the receiver s data buffer is full the transfer can be stopped and resumed in one of two ways n Software handshaking Stop transfer by sending the character DC3 XOFF Continue by transmitting the character DC1 XON n Hardware handshaking By suitable levels on the control and message lines RTS and CTS of interfaces RS 232 C V 24 or RS 422 V 11 Twelve characters before the receiving buffer is ful...

Page 1055: ...Resume transmission with DC1 If the file name in the first line and the name indicated in the TNC are not identical the TNC reads each block in and searches for the correct file name If the END PGM block has been read in and the selected name is not known the TNC remains static without an error message 7 7 7 7 In this case terminate transfer with the END key TNC to peripheral Peripheral to TNC NUL...

Page 1056: ... DC1 Block Check Character BCC In addition to checking the parity of the individual characters the parity of the complete transferred block is also checked The BCC always rounds the individual bits of the transferred characters in a data transfer block to even parity Example of BCC generation In this example program 15 which has been written in HEIDENHAIN dialog H is input through the data interfa...

Page 1057: ...ters in the header If this block is acknowledged by ACK then the next program block is transmitted With NAK the same block has to be re transmitted etc Once the last program block has been acknowledged by ACK the transmission is terminated by the characters ETX end of text and EOT end of transmission Handshaking The character DC1 XON follows the BCC This character is required by many devices to ex...

Page 1058: ...x Code letters Sectors Name P1 CR LF 1 P Protected optional The first four lines ending in CR LF are ignored In subsequent lines ending with CR LF the program name and after any number of blank characters the number of sectors are stored If the character combination FREE is detected only a number the number of free sectors will be read in The TNC requests the complete directory The directory is sa...

Page 1059: ...e selected files After each file the control characters EXT EOT are sent to the peripheral device Read in selected file To read in a file from an external memory the TNC sends a header with the file name TNC to peripheral Peripheral to TNC SOH K Name E ETB BCC DC1 ACK STX 1st line ETB BCC DC1 ACK STX last line ETB BCC DC1 ACK ETX EOT ...

Page 1060: ...r service purposes The last 1000 events are stored in the TNC HEIDENHAIN offers two LSV2 software packages n TNCremo Software for TNC remote control Can be run on an AT compatible PC with MS DOS All the above functions are available n LSV2 TOOL BOX Software tools in C programming language for creating the transfer telegrams The tool box comprises A library Executable files for telegrams Source cod...

Page 1061: ...with a Block Check Character BCC each device outputs and receives the correct file code File File extension File code NC program in HEIDENHAIN dialog H H NC program in ISO format I D Tool table T T Pallet table P L Datum table D N Machine parameters MP M Compensation table COM V Compensation assignment CMA S PLC program PLC P Text file A A Pocket table TCH R Help files HLP J Point table PNT U PLC ...

Page 1062: ... is given the file extension LNC For data transmission with the HEIDENHAIN Software TNCremo the file code has no significance The files are saved on the PC with the same extension as on the TNC Note Files that have no code can only be transmitted with the LSV2 protocol of TNCremo ...

Page 1063: ...put 0 110 bps 1 150 bps 2 300 bps 3 600 bps 4 1200 bps 5 2400 bps 6 4800 bps 7 9600 bps 8 19 200 bps 9 38 400 bps 10 57 600 bps 11 115 200 bps 8 6 2 PLC Modules With the following PLC modules you can operate the data interfaces from the PLC n Modules 9100 and 9101 Assign release the data interfaces n Module 9102 Interrogate the status of the interface n Modules 9103 and 9104 Transmit and receive a...

Page 1064: ...rface is switched to receive mode Once assigned to the PLC the interface is disabled for use by the input output program of the user interface The assignment is canceled when the PLC program is recompiled Can only be called in a submit job or spawn job Call PS B W D K Interface 0 RS232 1 RS422 PS B W D K Transfer parameters 0 from MP50x0 2 1 from MOD function CM 9100 Error recognition Address Valu...

Page 1065: ...he module reads the last valid status Call PS B W D K Interface 0 RS232 1 RS422 CM 9102 PL B W D Interface status 1 Error code in W1022 Bit 0 Interface is assigned Bit 1 Interface is assigned to PLC Bit 2 Interface is ready see above Bit 3 Transmit buffer is empty Bit 4 Error during transmission Bit 5 Receive buffer is full Bit 6 Error in reception Bit 7 ETX was received not ready to receive Bit 8...

Page 1066: ...dialog file are deleted See Error Messages on page 3 3 Can only be called in a submit job or spawn job Call PS B W D K Interface 0 RS232 1 RS422 PS K B W D Number of source string in the string buffer CM 9103 Error recognition Marker Value Meaning M4203 0 String was transmitted 1 Error code in W1022 W1022 1 Incorrect interface or incorrect string number 12 No string end found 13 Interface not read...

Page 1067: ...ts the receive buffer Can only be called in a submit job or spawn job Call PS B W D K Interface 0 RS232 1 RS422 PS K B W D Number of the string in the string buffer 0 to 15 CM 9104 Error recognition Marker Value Meaning M4203 0 String was received 1 Error code in W1022 W1022 1 Incorrect interface or incorrect string number 12 String too long 14 Interface not assigned 16 Receiving buffer empty 18 T...

Page 1068: ... two ASCII characters at the interface Can only be called in a submit job or spawn job Call PS B W D K Interface 0 RS232 1 RS422 PS K B W D Number of the first byte in the binary block 0 to 1023 PS K B W D Length of the binary block 0 to 63 CM 9105 Error recognition Marker Value Meaning M4203 0 Data was transmitted 1 Error code in W1022 W1022 1 Incorrect interface or incorrect byte number or block...

Page 1069: ...k is returned as the initial variable Can only be called in a submit job or spawn job Call PS B W D K Interface 0 RS232 1 RS422 PS K B W D Number of the first byte in the binary block 0 to 1023 CM 9106 PL B W D Length of binary block in bytes 1 Incorrect module call Error recognition Marker Value Meaning M4203 0 Data was received 1 Error code in W1022 W1022 1 Incorrect interface or incorrect byte ...

Page 1070: ...s of the receiving buffer are retained and can be read by Modules 9104 and 9106 Can only be called in a submit job or spawn job Call PS B W D K Interface 0 RS232 1 RS422 PS B W D K Offset of byte to be read in binary block CM 9107 PL B W D Read binary value Error recognition Marker Value Meaning M4203 0 Receiving buffer was read 1 Error code in W1022 W1022 1 Incorrect interface or incorrect byte n...

Page 1071: ...D K Source address With binary Number of the double word 0 to 1020 With string Number of the string CM 9110 PL B W D Error code 0 Message is being transmitted 1 No connection to host 2 Transmit buffer full 3 Incorrect data type not 0 or 1 4 Incorrect source address Error recognition Marker Value Meaning M4203 0 Message was transmitted 1 Error code in W1022 W1022 2 Incorrect data type 4 No double w...

Page 1072: ... B W D K Target address With binary Number of the double word 0 to 1020 With string Number of the string CM 9111 PL B W D Error code 0 Message was read 1 No connection to host 2 No message of this type in receiving buffer 3 Incorrect data type not 0 or 1 4 Incorrect target address Error recognition Marker Value Meaning M4203 0 Message was received 1 Error code in W1022 W1022 2 Incorrect data type ...

Page 1073: ...ace 0 RS232 1 RS422 PS ASCII code 0 to 255 CM 9112 Error recognition Note Set MP5030 2 2 so that the transmitted characters do not disturb the set protocol procedure Define the characters in at least one word so that the values to 255 can be recognized Marker Value Meaning M4203 0 Character was transmitted 1 Error code in W1022 W1022 1 Incorrect interface 13 Interface not ready or no connection 14...

Page 1074: ...from the interface If MP5030 2 2 the characters cannot be read from the interface until the line with the character requested in the protocol has been executed Can only be called in a submit job or spawn job Call PS B W D K Interface 0 RS232 1 RS422 CM 9113 PL W D Read ASCII character 0 to 255 ASCII characters 1 error Error recognition Note Store the result in a word at least so that the values to...

Page 1075: ... After the End of Program block CR LF and also EXT must be programmed n For NC programs the spaces can be omitted between the individual words n When reading in DIN blocks the asterisk character is not required at the end of the block n Comments are separated from the NC block with a semicolon n Comments located before the program are not saved n With conversational programming the block numbers a...

Page 1076: ...of traffic at the time on the net Typical values n NC program up to 300 Kbps n ASCII program up to 1 Mbps 8 8 1 Hardware The integrated Ethernet expansion card provides you with a 10BaseT twisted pair port The port is metallically isolated from the control electronics For information on the pin layout See Mounting and Electrical Installation on page 3 5 X25 Ethernet interface RJ45 port 10BaseT Max...

Page 1077: ...r TCP protocol 3 Network layer IP protocol 2 Data link layer Ethernet card 1 Physical layer Soft key Option Meaning Settings on the TNC for networking ADDRESS Internet address of the TNC Enter as four decimal numbers separated by points dotted decimal notation Your network supervisor can give you an internet address MASK Subnet mask Enter as four decimal numbers separated by points dotted decimal ...

Page 1078: ... input values unless you have encountered throughput problems Input range 512 to 4096 bytes WS Datagram size for output byte An entry of zero means that the optimum transfer size as indicated by the NFS server is used Do not enter any other input values unless you have encountered throughput problems Input range 512 to 4096 bytes TIMEOUT Timeout ms A Remote Procedure Call that is not answered by t...

Page 1079: ... Rest Read Write Search FCM File Create Mode Here you assign access rights to files on the NFS server The entry is binary with 3 places each for owner group and the other users Sequence Owner Group Rest Read Write Execute AM Auto mount yes 1 no 0 Here you define whether during power on the TNC automatically mounts the network If you do not mount automatically you can mount at any time afterward by...

Page 1080: ...tivated PRINTER NAME Printer name Name of the printer for the printer server Any errors occurring during network operation are displayed If a ping is sent the receiver sends it back to the sender Thus a ping can be used to check whether a connection to a particular remote station is possible The address is entered as four decimal numbers separated by points dotted decimal notation After the ping h...

Page 1081: ...ernet card you receive a CD ROM with the NFS server software CimcoNFS for HEIDENHAIN Sample settings for the TNC Soft key Option Input ADDRESS 160 1 180 21 MASK 255 255 0 0 ROUTER PROT RFC HW 10BaseT HOST ADDRESS 160 1 113 5 RS 8192 WS 8192 TIMEOUT 0 HM 1 DEVICE NAME PC PATH UID 0 GID 0 DCM 111111111 FCM 111111111 AM 1 ...

Page 1082: ...e to enter the PLC partition via the LSV2 protocol using the code number 807667 even if PLCPASSWORD was used to define a new codenumber in OEM SYS In the standard setting the PLC partition can be accessed via the LSV2 protocol using the codenumber 807667 To permit this access only with the codenumber defined in OEM SYS under PLCPASSWORD no longer with 807667 7 7 7 7 Enter the codeword REMOTE PLCPA...

Page 1083: ...8 50 HEIDENHAIN Technical Manual TNC 426 TNC 430 ...

Page 1084: ...December 2001 9 1 9 Original Equipment Manufacturer s OEM Cycles 9 1 HEIDENHAIN Standard Cycles 9 3 9 2 CycleDesign 9 4 9 3 Application of OEM Cycles 9 5 9 4 Compatibility with Earlier OEM Cycles 9 10 ...

Page 1085: ...9 2 HEIDENHAIN Technical Manual TNC 426 TNC 430 ...

Page 1086: ...rmations and several special functions are also available as cycles The cycles are divided in groups and are called by soft key The TNC graphically illustrates the type of information required in the input parameters There are n cycles that go into effect immediately upon definition and n cycles that must be called with CYCL CALL after they have been defined The User s Manual for the TNC provides ...

Page 1087: ...n Reorganize cycle groups n Develop your own cycles With CycleDesign you can access all files of the HEIDENHAIN standard cycles The program includes a soft key editor for creating your own soft keys You can draw the help graphics to illustrate input parameters in any graphics program that can save files in DXF format e g AutoSketch not included The colors in which the TNC displays the graphics are...

Page 1088: ...ation about programming with Q parameters in the User s Manual Illegal functions The following functions are not permitted in OEM cycles n M functions M02 M30 M06 with program stop n Programmed STOP block n Program calls with PGM CALL n Definition of Cycle 14 Contour Geometry Cycle 14 Contour Geometry must be defined in the main program Q parameters with special meanings Q parameters Q100 to Q199 ...

Page 1089: ...her local or global Use MP7251 to define the effect MP7251 Defining Q parameters Q60 to Q99 Input 0 Q60 to Q99 local 1 to 40 Q 100 input value to Q99 global Parameters Q0 to Q59 are used in the HEIDENHAIN standard cycles for mathematical operations We recommend this for your OEM cycles as well Optional parameters CycleDesign lets you define optional parameters Use a parameter as optional parameter...

Page 1090: ...f OEM cycles When nesting OEM cycles you must distinguish between DEF active and CALL active OEM cycles DEF active cycles n Are effective immediately upon definition n Can be called by another OEM cycle CALL active cycles n Must be specially activated with CYCL CALL n Cannot be called by another OEM cycle Managing more than one cycle tree With CycleDesign you can build a cycle structure with up to...

Page 1091: ...NC The system file PLC CYCLE SYS is opened on the TNC The directories and files of the OEM cycles soft keys and help graphics are defined in the system file Note You can also store OEM cycles on the hard disk of the TNC in coded form to protect them from unauthorized alteration If the TNC does not find the file PLC CYCLE SYS the HEIDENHAIN standard cycle structure goes into effect Save the PLC par...

Page 1092: ...0 1 If not set the constant to negative 11 FN 9 IF 0 EQU 0 GOTO LBL 194 12 LBL 197 13 FN 0 Q30 1 Otherwise set the constant to positive 14 LBL 194 15 FN 9 IF Q97 EQU 1 GOTO LBL 193 Inquiry whether signs were already negated 16 CALL LBL 4 17 LBL 193 18 FN 1 Q19 Q203 Q200 Calculate Z end position 19 FN 9 IF Q204 EQU 0 GOTO LBL 2 Inquiry whether 2nd safety clearance was entered 20 FN 1 Q19 Q203 Q204 ...

Page 1093: ...M cycles even without CycleDesign Earlier OEM cycle n Call with CYCL DEF 12 program call and CYCL CALL The cycle cannot be programmed by soft key It is defined with CYCL DEF 12 and then called with CYCL CALL or M99 n Call with PGM CALL The cycle cannot be programmed by soft key It is called with PGM CALL You will find detailed information about the use of earlier OEM cycles in the User s Manual fo...

Page 1094: ...es as of NC Software 280 476 01 10 9 10 2 1 Non Axis Specific Error Messages without Control Reset 10 9 10 2 2 Axis Specific Error Messages without Control Reset 10 10 10 2 3 Non Axis Specific Error Messages with Control Reset 10 14 10 2 4 Axis Specific Error Messages with Control Reset 10 16 10 3 Comparison of Old and New Error Messages 10 22 10 4 TNC Error Messages during Data Transfer 10 29 10 ...

Page 1095: ...10 2 HEIDENHAIN Technical Manual TNC 426 TNC 430 ...

Page 1096: ... pulse width modulation hardware problem or wrong value in MP2180 DSP ERROR FF0B Error upon memory request data processing error DSP ERROR FF0C No velocity control interrupt data processing error DSP ERROR FF0D Checksum error code data processing error DSP ERROR FF0E Timeout of the speed interrupt data processing error DSP ERROR FF0F Error when initializing a software timer data processing error D...

Page 1097: ...ERROR C012 No TL and sync source initializing data processing error Error message Cause of error corrective action As of NC SW Error message Cause of error corrective action As of NC SW DSP ERROR 1000 y Timeout during a command data processing error 280 470 01 280 472 01 280 474 01 DSP ERROR 1001 y Incorrect acknowledgment of a command data processing error DSP ERROR 1002 y Command is sent before ...

Page 1098: ...e error in power module table DSP ERROR F0E0 y Peak current in power module error in power module table DSP ERROR F0F0 y Current controller proportional factor too high DSP ERROR F100 y Current controller integral factor too high DSP ERROR F110 y Motor temperature DSP ERROR F120 y Reserved DSP ERROR F130 y Oscilloscope parameter is incorrect Only for test purposes data processing error DSP ERROR F...

Page 1099: ... DSP ERROR C140 y Number of pole pairs too large error in motor table or MP2230 DSP ERROR C150 y ASM field defining current error in motor table DSP ERROR C160 y Grating period of velocity encoder error in motor table DSP ERROR C170 y ASM Rotor time constant error in motor table DSP ERROR C180 y Break rated speed error in motor table DSP ERROR C190 y Unknown drive type MP2000 DSP ERROR C1A0 y Rese...

Page 1100: ...R C340 y Unknown counter chip type at rotational speed input hardware problem DSP ERROR C350 y Power module switches off during operation external operation error DSP ERROR C360 y Reserved DSP ERROR C370 y Excessive angular deviation during alignment Zn Z1 tracks do not match encoder error DSP ERROR C380 y Motor is uncontrollable at Imax no expected rotary movement drive error DSP ERROR C390 y Err...

Page 1101: ...ayed axis is incorrect Axis axis MP2340 MP2350 incorrect MP2340 MP2350 field angle offset for the displayed axis is incorrect Axis axis MP2190 incorrect MP2190 dc link voltage for the displayed axis is incorrect Axis axis MP120 MP121 incorrect MP120 MP121 Assignment of the speed command signal outputs for the displayed axis is incorrect Axis axis MP2540 MP2550 incorrect MP2540 MP2550 damping of ba...

Page 1102: ...nform your service agency Check the machine parameters deceleration of spindle If required check the braking resistor Replace the power supply unit 280 476 09 8082 MCU command unknown n Internal software error n Inform your service agency Check software version 280 476 01 8086 Probing already active n An internal software error has occurred n Inform your service agency Check software version 280 4...

Page 1103: ...s n If the motor temperature continues to increase the unit will be switched off Motor overload Machine parameters incorrect n Reduce the motor load n Inform your service agency Reduce machine parameters 280 476 01 8110 Warning I2t monitoring of axis n If the motor current continues to increase the unit will be switched off Motor or power module overload Machine parameter MP230x x incorrect n Redu...

Page 1104: ...relation between electrical field and mechanical motor motion n Incorrect motor encoder signal n Incorrect motor connection n Mechanical brakes not released n Inform your service agency Check entry in MP331 and MP332 Check entry in MP2020 For linear motors In motor table check distance per electrical motor revolution Check motor encoder connection Check motor connection Release brakes during orien...

Page 1105: ...k n Inverter is not ready for operation n Motor control board defective n PWM cable defective n Noise pulses n Inform your service agency Check the control and cabling of the pulse release Check Uz If the power supply is not regenerative Is the braking resistor connected If the power supply is regenerative Is energy recovery activated Check the grounding and shielding of the cable Exchange the pow...

Page 1106: ...t not be limited during acceleration 280 476 09 A110 Safe speed SRG exceeded axis n The rotational speed limit SBH was exceeded while the protective door was open and the key switch was turned to automatic n Inform your service agency 280 476 01 AC00 Mot enc amp too high axis n Noise on motor encoder signal n Short circuit in motor encoder cable n Signal amplitude of motor encoder is too high n In...

Page 1107: ... your line power supply n Inform your service agency Check the inverter 280 476 01 C009 Stack overflow n Internal software error n Inform your service agency Check software version 280 476 01 C00A PWM triangular signal error n Hardware error Triangular signal does not oscillate or it oscillates at the wrong frequency n Inform your service agency Exchange drive control board 280 476 01 C00B Too lit...

Page 1108: ...g RDY status of spindle n Cabling to inverter defective n Spindle not connected spindle release relay n Inverter defective n Inform your service agency Check the inverter and cabling 280 476 01 E007 Wrong RDY status of axes n Cabling to inverter defective n No axis connected axis release relay n Inverter defective n Inform your service agency Check the inverter and cabling 280 476 01 E008 SRG spee...

Page 1109: ... 280 476 01 C170 Rotor time constant err axis n The rotor time constant calculated from the rotor table is invalid n Inform your service agency Check the motor table 280 476 01 C180 Rated speed error axis n Incorrect entry in motor table n Inform your service agency Check the motor table 280 476 01 C1D0 Current sensor voltage axis n Incorrect entry in power module table n Inform your service agenc...

Page 1110: ...d n Inform your service agency Check the entry in MP2540 MP2541 MP2550 and MP2551 Check software version 280 476 01 C2D0 Motor encoder line count axis n Motor encoder line count was changed during operation n Restart control with the END key 280 476 08 C2E0 Motor pole pair number axis n Motor pole pair number was changed during operation n Restart control with the END key 280 476 08 C2F0 DIR in mo...

Page 1111: ...f the power supply is not regenerative Is the braking resistor connected If the power supply is regenerative Is energy recovery activated Check the grounding and shielding of the cable Exchange the power module For P controls Exchange the interface card Exchange the motor drive control board 280 476 14 C370 Angular deviation of motor encoder axis n Motor encoder defective n Motor encoder cable def...

Page 1112: ... n Incorrect motor connection n Inform your service agency Check the inverter Check motor and cabling Check machine parameters 280 476 14 C3C0 Motor current axis too high n Incorrect current controller parameters n Incorrect parameters in the motor table n Power module defective n Motor defective n Motor control board defective n Inform your service agency Is the correct motor and power module sel...

Page 1113: ...n Inform your service agency Check the inverter Check the cabling of the cutout channels 280 476 01 E160 Inverter axis not ready n RDY status of the inverter is LOW instead of HIGH n Inform your service agency Check the inverter Check the cabling of the cutout channels 280 476 01 E130 Position error too large axis n MP650 too small n Incorrect mounting of position encoder n Incorrect temperature c...

Page 1114: ...December 2001 DSP Error Messages as of NC Software 280 476 01 10 21 ...

Page 1115: ...s amplitude too low Positioning error Excessive following error in axis Error in PLC program 1Q PLC M4005 M4006 M4007 incorrect Error in PLC program 1R PLC More than one strobe active Error in PLC program 00 PLC Invalid command Error in PLC program 02 PLC Invalid operand type Error in PLC program 03 PLC Operand not found Error in PLC program 04 PLC Operand incorrect Error in PLC program 05 PLC Err...

Page 1116: ...oo many local labels Error in PLC program 38 PLC Too many global labels Error in PLC program 39 PLC External label not defined Error in PLC program 40 PLC External label in CASE Error in PLC program 41 PLC External label in JP Error in PLC program 42 PLC Global label defined twice Error in PLC program 43 PLC Incorrect program structure Error in PLC program 44 PLC Structure open at file end Error i...

Page 1117: ...applied to the entered operand type 3 ESC Operand not found A type was entered for the operand but no value 4 ESC Operand outside the permissible range An operand number was specified that lies outside the value range for this operand 5 ESC No limiter after command The PLC command is followed by further characters that cannot be interpreted 6 ESC No line ending found The line is longer than 128 ch...

Page 1118: ...TERN from another module was used again with a LBL or KFIELD instruction A name reserved for internal modules 9000 9255 was used with an LBL KFIELD or EXTERN instruction 19 SC Word assignment missing A word logic operation was conducted However the result was not assigned to an operand but to a new logic operation 20 SC Logic assignment missing A logic operation was conducted However the result wa...

Page 1119: ... previously loaded 31 SC String statement within parentheses You programmed a string statement within parentheses String operands cannot be nested with parentheses 32 SC Sting assignment missing You started a new logic operations sequence without first assigning the logic operation formed in the string accumulator 33 SC GLOBAL EXTERN not at beginning of file You wrote the GLOBAL or EXTERN commands...

Page 1120: ...es from files that are linked with the USES statement can be made accessible for other files through the GLOBAL statement 50 R Excessive nesting You attempted to nest more than 32 module calls You programmed a recursive module call that exceeds the limit of 32 levels 51 R Stack underflow You attempted to retrieve data from the stack although it had not yet been written there 52 R Stack overflow Yo...

Page 1121: ...value 0 or 999 During the addressing of a component string Sn X the value range for the index register 0 127 was exceeded 57 R PLC error table missing A PLC error module 9085 9086 was called although no error table was compiled or there were no entries in the table A PLC error module 9085 9086 was called or an error marker was set although the error table was edited or deleted after compilation 58...

Page 1122: ...ched off or defective Data transfer erroneous x x error code see table Error code Meaning E During data transfer with BCC the NAK signal was received 15 times in succession A to H except E Error code of the receiver module with one of the following causes n The transfer rate setting of the TNC and peripheral device do not match n The parity bit is erroneous n Erroneous data frame e g no stop bit n...

Page 1123: ...ogram incomplete ERR 010 Program not on floppy disk ERR 011 Program is protected against deletion ERR 012 Program is now being written to ERR 013 Program table of contents is full ERR 014 Floppy disk is full ERR 100 Floppy disk not initialized ERR 101 Sector number too large ERR 102 Drive not ready ERR 103 Floppy disk is write protected ERR 104 Data on floppy disk is faulty ERR 105 Sectors cannot ...

Page 1124: ...ency File system error 2 File system error 3 File system error 4 File system error 5 File system error 6 File system error 7 File system error 8 File system error 9 File system error 10 File system error A File system error B File system error C File system error D File system error E File system error F File system error G File system error H File system error I File system error J File system er...

Page 1125: ...10 32 HEIDENHAIN Technical Manual TNC 426 TNC 430 ...

Page 1126: ...log outputs 6 394 AND A 7 102 AND NOT AN 7 104 ASSIGN 7 93 ASSIGN BYTE B 7 95 ASSIGN NOT N 7 97 ASSIGN TWO S COMPLEMENT 7 97 ASSIGN WORD W 7 95 Assignment of encoder inputs 6 15 Assignment of nominal speed command output 6 15 Axes clamping 6 131 Axis designation 6 6 B Backlash compensation 6 36 BIT RESET BC 7 138 BIT SET BS 7 137 BIT TEST BT 7 139 Block Check Character 8 23 Block number increment ...

Page 1127: ...reversal spikes 6 46 Compensation of sliding friction 6 50 Compensation of static friction 6 48 Compensation of thermal expansion 6 44 Compile 7 13 Connection overview 3 13 Constants Field KF 7 169 Contour velocity at corners 6 153 Control characters 8 14 Control in operation 6 240 Control loop 6 109 Conversational language 6 325 Counter 7 19 Current controller 6 147 6 213 Cutting data calculation...

Page 1128: ...eration 6 215 DSP Error Messages 10 3 E Electromagnetic compatibility 3 5 EMERGENCY STOP monitoring 6 173 Enabling the drive controller 6 143 Encoder for speed 3 37 Encoder monitoring 6 11 Encoder signals 6 9 Encoder with EnDat interface 6 101 Encoders 3 31 Encoders for position 3 31 END OF MODULE EM 7 147 END OF MODULE IF FALSE EMF 7 147 END OF MODULE IF TRUE EMT 7 147 EPROMs 2 37 EQUAL TO 7 120 ...

Page 1129: ...ely definable tables 6 310 G Gantry axes 6 87 Gear ranges 6 187 Gear shifting 6 188 GLOBAL instruction 7 176 Graphic display 6 229 GREATER THAN 7 122 GREATER THAN OR EQUAL TO 7 124 GREATER THAN OR EQUAL TO STRING 7 155 GREATER THAN STRING 7 154 H Handshaking 8 8 Handwheel 6 380 Handwheel Input 3 64 Hard disk organization 7 39 Heat Generation and Cooling 3 7 Help 6 276 Help cycles 6 287 Help soft k...

Page 1130: ...E 426 CB 2 5 ID number of LE 426 M 2 8 2 9 ID number of LE 426 PB 2 6 ID number of LE 430 CA 2 5 ID number of LE 430 M 2 8 2 9 ID number of LE 430 PA 2 7 ID number of MB 420 2 11 ID number of PL 4xx B 2 12 ID number of TE 420 2 10 ID number of TS 220 2 20 ID number of TT 130 2 21 Id Nr options 2 21 IF ELSE ENDI 7 171 INCREMENT INC 7 119 Incremental jog positioning 6 395 INDEX register X register 7...

Page 1131: ...ng measurements 6 354 6 357 Logic diagram 7 9 Logical PL 6 387 Logo 6 248 LSV2 8 27 Lubrication pulse 6 26 M M Functions 6 280 M06 6 285 M103 6 285 M114 6 83 M128 6 84 M134 6 286 M89 6 285 Master slave torque control 6 91 Material tables 6 419 Mechanical Vibration 3 8 Memory test 6 326 MGROUPS SYS 6 297 7 44 Modules for String Processing 7 157 Monitoring functions 6 156 Monitoring of power supply ...

Page 1132: ...apter spindles 6 65 Operating times 6 328 Optional parameters 9 6 OR O 7 106 OR NOT ON 7 108 Oriented spindle stop 6 201 Oscilloscope 6 457 OVERWRITE STRING OVWR 7 153 P Pallet management 6 303 Pallet table executing 6 304 Parity bit 8 6 Physical PL 6 387 PLC Axes 6 28 PLC Files 6 319 PLC partition 7 39 PLC pop up window 6 278 PLC positioning 6 33 PLC program example 7 50 PLC program format 7 46 P...

Page 1133: ...L 7 171 Replacement tool 6 415 RESET R 7 99 RESET NOT RN 7 101 Rigid tapping 6 209 S SET S 7 98 SET NOT SN 7 100 SHIFT LEFT 7 135 SHIFT RIGHT 7 136 Shipping brace 3 6 Signal period 6 8 Small PLC window 6 250 Software option 2 32 Software releases 2 42 Special tools 6 414 Speed controller 6 134 6 212 Spindle 6 180 Spindle override 6 190 Standard Cycles 9 3 Standstill monitoring 6 162 Status submit ...

Page 1134: ...ool changer 6 400 6 421 Tool identification 6 420 Tool life 6 415 Tool measurement 6 370 Tool table 6 400 Touch probe 6 346 Touch probe cycles 6 347 Trace 7 7 Traverse Ranges 6 22 Traversing the reference marks 6 98 U User parameters 6 323 USES instruction 7 175 Utilization display 6 169 V Velocity 6 111 Velocity feedforward control 6 124 Visual display unit 3 92 Volts per hertz control mode 6 196...

Page 1135: ...23 HRA 110 3 69 X23 PL 4xxB 3 28 X25 3 62 X3 BTS 1x 3 100 X3 MB 420 3 89 X3 to X4 PL 405B 3 77 X3 to X6 PL 410B 3 75 X30 3 71 X31 HRA 110 3 69 X34 3 29 X35 to X38 3 33 X4 MB 420 3 89 X4 to X7 BTS 1x 3 100 X41 3 79 X42 3 73 6 143 X43 3 92 3 94 3 95 3 96 X44 3 27 X45 3 90 X46 3 87 X47 3 84 X48 3 48 X49 3 97 X50 3 72 6 143 X51 to X59 3 44 X60 3 38 X61 3 44 X62 to X64 3 38 X69 3 24 X7 to X8 PL 410B 3 ...

Reviews:

No comments

Brands by name

Popular brands

Load more brands